At Struct Ref

AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Page 1
1. Table of Contents
1.1. Table of Contents

1. Table of Contents 1
1.1. Table of Contents 1
1.2. General Information 4
1.3. Installation 5
2. General Info, Templates, Coordinates 6
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Construction 6
2.2. New AutoCAD 2000 Features 11
2.3. Coordinate Systems 12
2.4. AutoCAD Standard Commands 14
2.5. Select Lines 16
2.6. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Dialog Templates 17
2.7. Logical Links 19
3. Auxiliary Commands, Display, Copy 22
3.1. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Object Snap 22
3.2. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Layer Commands 24
3.3. Hide Command 26
3.4. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Regenerating 27
3.5. Display Classes 28
3.6. Area Classes 30
3.7. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Family Classes 32
3.8. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Copy/Move 35
3.8.1. Copy 36
3.8.2. Move 39
3.8.3. Rotate 40
3.8.4. Mirror 42
3.8.5. Align 44
3.8.6. Clone 46
3.9. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Direction Vectors 48
3.10. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Construction Lines 49
3.11. STRUCTURAL 3D Weight Center Calculation 54
4. Work Frames, Views, Perspectives 55
4.1. Work Frame Command 55
4.1.1. Rectangular Work Frame 56
4.1.2. Cylindrical Work Frame 62
4.1.3. Wedge-Shaped Work Frame 64
4.1.4. Pyramidal Work Frame 66
4.1.5. Work Frame Names 68
4.2. SELECT VIEW COMMAND 70
4.3. Object View Command 74
4.4. Object UCS Command 76
4.5. Global View Command 78
4.6. Top View Command 79
4.7. Free View Command 80
4.8. Perspective View Command 81
Page 2 AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
4.9. Cut Plane Command 84

5. Shapes, Plates, Stiffeners 87
5.1. Insert Shapes Command 87
5.2. Insert Bent Shape Command 104
5.3. Insert Shapes After Picking Command 107
5.4. Insert Plates Command 108
5.5. Insert Bent Plates Command 113
5.6. Insert Stiffeners Command 114
6. Modifying, Drilling, Notching 118
6.1. fy Elements Command 118
6.1.1. Modify Length Function 119
6.1.2. Fit Shapes Together Function 121
6.1.3. Mitered Cut Function 123
6.1.4. Divide / Combine Function/COMBINE 124
6.1.5. Cope/Notch Function 126
6.1.6. Polycut Function 128
6.1.7. Outlet Function OUTLET 131
6.1.8. Plate Processing Function 133
6.2. Plate Editor Command PLATE EDITOR 135
6.3. Drilling Command 136
7. Connections, Haunches, Joints 143
7.1. Bolt Command 143
7.2. Plate Connection Command 145
7.2.1. Free Plate Connection Command 146
7.2.2. Standard plate Command 153
7.2.3. Plate Connections Lateral Force 156
7.2.4. User-Defined Plate Connection 157
7.2.5. Haunches and Plate Connections 158
7.3. Base Plate Command 160
7.4. Web Angle Command 165
7.5. Shear Plate Connection 169
7.6. Splice joints 173
7.7. Haunch Command 177
7.8. Bracing Command 180
7.9. Purlin Connection Command 185
8. Construction Groups, Positions, Bills of Materials 193
8.1. Groups Command 193
8.2. Positioning Command 198
8.3. Compare Parts Command 210
8.4. Find Parts Command 211
8.5. Create Parts List Command 214
8.6. Process Parts List Command 217
9. Detailing, Processing, Modifying 226
9.1. Drawing Information Command 226
9.2. Global Scale Command 228
9.3. The New AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL Detailing 229
9.3.1. The 2D Detailing 2 D DETAILING 231
9.3.2. Detailing with the Detail Center DETAIL CENTER 232
9.3.3. Intelligent 2D-Details 237
9.3.4. Detailing Style 239
9.3.5. Component Overview 275

9.3.6. Views Overview 284
9.3.7. Detail Block Overview (Insert) 290
9.3.8. Automatic Translation 296
9.3.9. Transfer Drawing Paths 298
9.3.10. Drawing Verification 300
9.3.11. Direct Detailing 303
9.3.12. Modification Management 304
9.3.13. DetailCenter Express! 306
9.4. Insert 2D Cut Command 321
9.5. Insert Drawing Border Command 322
9.6. Insert Elevation Command 324
9.7. Insert Weld Symbols Command 326
9.8. Dimensioning Command 329
9.9. Cut Out 2D Command 337
9.10. Shortening 2D Shapes 338
10. Import, Export, Interfaces 339
10.1. Data Exchange with AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D 339
10.2. Data Import Command 342
10.3. Data Export Command 346
10.4. New Interfaces 349
10.4.1. DSTV Product Interface Steel Construction 350
10.4.2. AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Standard Interface 355
10.4.3. STAAD III Interface 357
10.4.4. PXF Interface 358
10.5. Previous Interfaces 359
10.5.1. DSTV PPS Interface 360
10.5.2. DSTV-Statics Interface 365
10.5.3. DSTV-NC-Interface 367
11. Special Shapes, 3D Solids, Miscellaneous 371
11.1. Special Shapes Command 371
11.2. 3D Solids Command 376
11.3. Boolean Operations 378
11.4. Add Shape Section Command 379
11.5. Collision Check Command 381
11.6. Dispatch Blocks Command 382
11.7. Tube Unwind Command 386
11.8. Divide Surface Command 388
11.9. Global Settings Command 392
12. Configuration - Technical Notes 403
12.1. Shape Database 403
12.2. Connection Plate Database 413
12.3. User EEDs 415
13. Structural Elements 416
13.1. Structural Elements 416
13.2. Structural Element "Handrail" 417
13.3. Structural Element "Purlin Course" 424
13.4. Structural Element "Truss/Lattice Girders" 427
13.5. Structural Element "Staircase" 430
13.6. Structural Element "Hangar Frame" 438
13.7. Structural Element "Bracing" 443

13.8. Structural Element "Ladder" 452
1.2. General Information
Contents of this Manual

This manual provides a complete description of all commands available with the AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D steel construction software package.
Some of the individual descriptions contain examples, which facilitate the recreation of the different
command applications by providing graphics and screenshots. If you are already a AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D for AutoCAD user and have purchased an AutoCAD 2000 update, you will be informed
of significant changes when working with any of the commands.
Not Provided in this Manual

Working with AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D and this manual requires that you are already familiar with
the use of AutoCAD 2000 or an earlier version. If that is not the case, you should familiarize yourself with
the most important basic AutoCAD commands to be able to work effectively with the new software.
Although the program will help you to overcome many of the three-dimensional AutoCAD construction
hurdles, you should be familiar with such terms as object snap, user coordinate system (UCS), blocks, etc.
- This manual requires knowledge of AutoCAD and Windows.
Only with Hands-on Experience ...

All of these descriptions, however, do not replace first-hand experience with the application using your
computer! Start the program and try out the commands for yourself. Watch what happens as you carry
out a certain command. No need to worry every command can be undone at any time if the results are
not what you expected. You will see that 3D construction using AutoCAD 2000 and AUTOPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D is much less complicated than you might have thought in the beginning.
3D Display of a Steel Construction

1.3. Installation
Procedures to install STRUCTURAL are outlined in the Installation and Configuration Guide provided with
your software. This is the small insert document provided with your CD. This reference guide assumes you
have already properly installed and configured STRUCTURAL using the instructions provided in that
document.
Each STRUCTURAL package is licensed for use on only one computer, or for a limited number of
workstations in a network environment.
The Rebis Security Configuration Manager application is provided to authorize your software. The
procedure to authorize AutoPLANT applications is provided in the help file for this application, which may
be launched via your Window Start menu by selecting Rebis Security/Rebis Security Configuration
Manager, then Help/Contents. The Authorization Procedures area of this help provides graphical
walkthrough procedures of each phase of the authorization process.
When you start an AutoPLANT application that has not been authorized, a dialog will display enabling you
to either run the software in Demo mode, or authorize the software as an Evaluation copy for a limited
number of days. The software can only be fully authorized using the Rebis Security Configuration Manager
application described above.
NOTE: No existing hardware locks will be authorized for use with applications using the new software
security. This means the old hardware locks will not work with the new applications. Users should keep
their hardware locks in a safe place to allow project support for previous versions of the software. Again,
refer to the Rebis Security Configuration Manager help file for details on authorizing your software.
Program Start
To start AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL, select Programs/AutoPLANT 3D/Plant Design from your Windows
Start menu. This will start AutoCAD and load the Rebis application menu. Select AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL from the Rebis menu or toolbar to start the application..
2. General Info, Templates, Coordinates
2.1. AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Construction
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is a 3D steel construction application for the CAD program AutoCAD
2000, which means that the software is not a stand-alone program and has to be run in conjunction with
AutoCAD.
If you previously have used only traditional AutoCAD tools or other 2D applications to create steel
construction drawings, you will have to adjust to a new way of generating drawings. You will no longer
work within a shop drawing but rather "build" your construction on screen in a more or less real manner
using a model. This model is then used by the program to generate the required 2D shop drawings with
parts lists automatically. These drawings can be manipulated at any time using normal AutoCAD
commands. A brief comparison illustrates the most important differences of the working method:
Conventional Construction with 2D CAD 3D Construction with AutoPLANT

STRUCTURAL 3D
Creating a general drawing.
(Possibly previous 2D general global view
plans)
Derivation of individual design areas from the
general drawing. Arrangement of 3D work frames and display of
important system lines. Verification of system
dimensions.
Display of shapes and connections in several views

with the drawing of the shapes including correct Construction/design 'assembly.' Insertion and
length, cuts, invisible and dotted lines, etc. exactly cutting of shapes at construction lines and other
as required by the shop plans. shapes with easy 'mouse clicks,' automatic
creation of connections/joints, drill holes,
copes/notches, etc.
Complete dimensioning of the shapes and drill
holes, connection plates, etc.
Positioning of the individual components and parts

and entering these positions and their terms into the Automatic positioning of the complete
shop plans. construction.
Manual or system-supported generation of bill of

materials lists/parts list. Automatic derivation of parts lists from previous
positioning.
Monitoring drawing of all manually entered
dimensions. Automatic checking for overlapping parts.
Automatic mapping/detailing of the finished

model for 2D shop plans including dimensioning
and labeling.
Sometimes possible to move drawn parts to other
drawing sheets. Arranging the generated 2D parts on a blank
sheet or several pages.
A Work Session with the Program
Any design and construction work using the program usually follows this general pattern:
Arranging and creating the work frames and all necessary system lines.
Inserting shapes; creating connections such as bolted joints, etc. until the construction is completed
as desired.
Assigning the position number with the help of automatic or manual positioning.
Verifying the model structure with the help of the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Detail Center.
Automatic derivation of parts lists from drawing and diagram data.
Perhaps: Automatic NC data generation.
Shop drawings have not been required up to this point.
Verifying the structure using collision checking.

Checking the structural system and control dimensions. If these are in order, any additional drawing
checks can be omitted.
Automatic generation of 2D details.

- Specification of the desired detail styles including scales and assigning these to the individual
components and parts, construction groups, or model frames using the
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Detail Center
- This is used to create the views automatically.
- If necessary, addition of further views.
- Generating the mapped details.
Creation of manual 2D details and construction global views.

- Determining a desired detail style including scale and setting of the desired view.
- Selection of the part of the 3D model to be displayed.
- Attaching system dimensions, position flags, as well as other details such as relative heights,
welding symbols, text, etc.
- Creating the mapped details.
Creating shop drawings.

- Once all required details have been created: Opening of a new AutoCAD drawing.
- Inserting drawing frame.
- Inserting all desired details from the corresponding detail library and placing these details in the
new drawing.
- Verification and possibly further revision of the created 2D details.
If you are dealing with an extremely large model, you can disassemble this model into several smaller
partial models using XREFs, which are then located in different files where they can be manipulated
individually. A basic drawing will then provide you with the complete view of all linked partial models.
This method has several advantages: The individual drawing files are kept at a manageable size and the
response time to commands is thus lower. Of course, the optimal size depends entirely on your hardware
equipment (e.g., processor speed, memory capacity). If you would like to use XREF, please read the
corresponding AutoCAD documentation very carefully.
The computing capacities of modern CAD calculators enable creation of drawings with a file size of several
MB without delay or problems.
In case of any subsequent changes, it is the model that should always be modified first. In case of
unchanged 2D details, it is possible to replace them automatically in the shop plans if so desired.
Otherwise, you can replot the details of the changes once more and exchange and adapt them and the
modification is done!
HINT: Only provide the amount of detail actually required by the model. Try to time complex
calculations, e.g., the collision check or mapping in case of slower computers, to run during times
when you can occupy yourself with other tasks. No further user input is required while the
detailing process is carried out.
This is a screen shot of a AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL work session. Among the new features are many
additional buttons in the toolbar. Next to the 3D construction you can see a typical AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D dialog box for the insertion of steel shapes.
Object-Oriented What Does that Mean?

No worries here because it provides you with nothing but advantages! Object-oriented is more than just a
new buzz word.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is a completely object-oriented program. Almost all elements AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL creates in the model are 'objects'. A steel shape will demonstrate the advantages of
'object oriented' programs.
Create a shape and you will see many lines on screen. Click one of these lines and then click the entire
shape. So far so goodyou know this effect from the usual AutoCAD blocks. But an 'object' is so much
more
Your shape has now acquired its own intelligence and you can treat it as a standard AutoCAD element.
Change the length by stretching it and the shape knows that it has been extended. If the shape has been
cut along another shape, it knows to adjust its cutting edges. Click the shape with the right mouse button
and you can change all of the characteristics and features of the shape that is because it consists of
much more than just simple lines.
The views are another good example: The program provides you with model views displayed as frames,
which you view from the perpendicular. One of these views might be called, e.g., VIEW_AXIS1, another
perhaps VIEW_PLATFORM.
Now rotate and move the model in three-dimensional space and then select VIEW_AXIS1. You still see
what you expected to see: All AutoCAD settings associated with the views have been adjusted to the
change automatically.
That is what 'object-oriented' means almost all elements act like real objects!
Frequent Errors
Drawing elements extend over all three dimensions always remember this fact.
Viewing the model from one side might imply that intersection points exist where there really are none.
Several lines superimposed or located behind one another might also appear as a single line
Example for a 3D Problem:
The 3D view is on the left, the front

view on the right.
The diagonals of the front view do
not intersect one another; the
same diagonal from the backside
is displayed behind every frame
line!
- If you 'manually' draw elements into the model using AutoCAD, they will be displayed in the plane of the
current user coordinate system. However, what you see can be deceptive. Make sure to align the user
coordinate system correctly (e.g., using the AutoCAD command "UCS Origin").
- Some views will display straight lines that are actually slanted to the front or rear. The object snap
feature "Perpendicular," the command "Distance," etc. often yield unexpected (but correct) results.
Remember to factor in spatiality when using these commands.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D has several commands that will help you work around such hurdles while
using with the program. Some are, however, "typical for AutoCAD" and you should keep this in mind.
2.2. New AutoCAD 2000 Features
MDI (Multi-Document Interface)

For the first time, it is possible to open and manipulate several models and 2D drawings simultaneously
thanks to AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D's multi-document interface. Because the program is loaded
only once, this represents a significant savings of available system resources.
The advantages will rapidly become apparent as you work since you can copy easily from other
constructions or just look up a few things as needed. The preview commands during the detailing process
(see 'Detailing,' Detailing Style) make use of this new AutoCAD property quite frequently.
However, you do have to be a bit careful when working with the program and observe which drawing
window is currently the active one because all commands and queries always reference the current
window!
Context Menus
AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D supports the context menus of the right mouse button, which you might
know from other Windows programs.
These menus appear when you select a window or drawing object and then click with the right mouse
button. Since the content of the menus depends on the selected object, you have a nicely structured, easy
access to frequently used commands related to object(s) selected.
Context Menu Shape Selection:
In addition to standard commands, this context menu also offers special

AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D functions.
HINT for users of previous versions: The shape property modification command you are familiar
with can now be accessed via the context menu by selecting the shapes, plates, etc. to be
changed.
2.3. Coordinate Systems
A brief explanation about the coordinate systems - further information is listed in the AutoCAD manual.
If you have previously used AutoCAD in the conventional manner, you have most likely utilized the World
Coordinate System (marked with the letter W on the coordinate axes) and have ignored the 3D space
component.
You have actually worked in a three-dimensional coordinate system, because AutoCAD does not offer
anything else. You might have indicated only the x/y component for the coordinate system, and omitted
the third dimension (also called the z coordinate), but AutoCAD then supplied the z coordinate using the
default value of z = 0.
Viewing the coordinate system in a three-dimensional fashion, it becomes apparent that you worked within
the x/y plane of the world coordinate system. The additional component is the z coordinate, which adds
the User Coordinate System (UCS).
The screen offers only two dimensions for drawing, which means you must tell AutoCAD which plane you
are drawing on. The user coordinate systems manage the different drawing planes. If you draw in a user
coordinate plane you will see the x/y plane of the current coordinate system and entities are drawn with
z=0. The x,y,z coordinates of an user coordinate system are not identical with the x,y,z coordinates of the
world coordinate system!
The user coordinate system is only an auxiliary coordinate system to help you more easily create 3D
drawings. AutoCAD automatically converts all user coordinate points back to unique world coordinates.
If you would like to determine the direction of the positive values of the z coordinate axis of a user
coordinate system (so that you can enter 3D points), then apply the "right hand rule":
To use the right hand, extend thumb and index finger so that they are perpendicular to each other. Then
add the middle finger to the vertical thumb and index finger (basically located on palm). If you now arrange
thumb (X) and index finger (Y) the same way as the coordinate symbols on the screen, the middle finger
points in the direction of the positive z-axis. You may have to twist your hand to achieve this.
The diagram below illustrates the relationship between world and user coordinate systems. You can try
the "right hand rule" described above.
World Coordinate User Coordinate

System System
- by AutoCAD
Origin (0,0,0)UCS on
Origin (0,0,0) the gray plane, the
z-axis points
towards the
(The typical drawing outside.
plane)
(AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D
work plane)
2.4. AutoCAD Standard Commands
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is an extension of AutoCAD designed specifically for the tasks associated
with the steel construction industry. The program makes use of the capabilities of AutoCADs object-
oriented programming interface.
In simple terms, this means that AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D elements (e.g., shapes) act in much the
same way as standard AutoCAD elements do. You can move, copy, and delete shapes, list properties, etc
by using familiar AutoCAD commands to achieve all of this.
Use the standard AutoCAD stretch command to modify a shape, however, and the difference between
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL shape and typical blocks or conventionally drawn "shape" is immediately
apparent.
If you stretch a AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D shape, it changes its length and perhaps even its position.
It still remains intact as a proper shape with all the correct dimensions however, if it was created 'by
hand' using AutoCAD, the lines it will become distorted:
After stretching it, you will see

that the lower "shape" was
distorted, the upper, however,
retained its correct dimensions.
Commands modifying the fundamental structure of a shape require special AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
commands among them are, e.g., diagonal cuts, notches, drill holes, etc.
Attention!!
NEVER use the AutoCAD command "Origin" on any of the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects
within the 3D model! This will destroy the functionality and the program can no longer process the
object.
Grips
Working with AutoCAD might have familiarized you with the "grips" on the ends of most elements, which
allowed position and length modifications. These grips are also located on AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
elements and can be used in the same manner. For example, these grips can be used to stretch shapes,
change the shape of plates, etc. Just click the elements to see if the desired command allows the use of
grips. Some elements allow the ALT key to also be used, extending the function of the grips (for more
information see command 'Global Settings').
Basic 3D Shapes
Please note:
Although you will not see any visual differences, the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects are not based
on AutoCAD ACIS volume modeler, but on the surface modeler like that used by the AutoCAD
Architectural Desktop. This means that AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects are not "compatible" with
the AutoCAD basic 3D shape or the AutoCAD Boolean volume commands. If the commands are used
together, it is not going to result in an error situation but rather nothing at all will take place!
The basic 3D shapes and the Boolean operations have been redefined so that you have the same
commands available as with AutoCAD.
(see command 'Basic Shapes, command 'Boolean Operations').
(Basic 3D Shape Supplement)
In addition, you can, however, process the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL basic 3D shapes with the
processing functions of the program. These shapes can be transferred into detailing. They will be
displayed and dimensioned like any other AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D object.
An alternative is to convert the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects to ACIS objects if the ACIS option is
available (see command 'Add Shapes/Change Properties). The general shape properties remain
unchanged the only differences between the two volume models are the data size and computational
speed in favor of the AEC modeler.
2.5. Select Lines
Many of the program functions will ask you to select a line. The following prompt appears in the AutoCAD
command line:
Pick the desired (point) <line>
Instead of clicking a line to select it, you can also create a temporary line by clicking two points. The
program will then behave as if there is a line between these two points and carry out the command
accordingly. To create a temporary line, enter the letter P (for Point) when prompted and press ENTER.
The program then asks for the starting and ending points of the construction line, which should be
indicated by clicking them.
Please note:
Remember that the current UCS plane controls any points selected without object snap.
2.6. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Dialog Templates
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D provides a variety of different dialog boxes, which are used to enter
settings for the functions and commands. Many of these settings are repeated for construction tasks in
different orders or are used in a slightly modified form (e.g., connection plates with holes for specific
supports) it would be useful to save these settings for later use.
For this purpose, AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D offers you a template management function. Many of
the dialogs feature a TEMPLATE button. Clicking this button calls up the template management dialog
box where you then can save or load the settings.
Although this is always the same window, the options depend on the type of dialog box from which you are
using the template management dialog. The only items visible in the command 'Work Frame' are saved
work frames. The command 'Plates' offers only connection plate specifications, etc.
Dialog Box: Template Management
Example - Template
Management for Work
Frames
Previous Template Files and Version Control

You are perhaps used to the fact that in previous program versions already defined templates were often
lost during an update. This is the reason why the data structure of template file was completely modified
and equipped with a version and type control from update release 3 of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D for
AutoCAD 2000 on. In future program versions your new defined templates remain compatible and all still
valid values of former versions will be adopted.
In addition, you have at some commands the possibility to convert the last valid templates of the former
data structure. The options Add and Mix permit you to adopt all or only some selected former templates
into the new structure according to the same pattern. Just select the Former Templates entry under File
Type of the file selection dialog.
Attention: The former templates had neither version control nor type control! Therefore you can
only convert the last valid former templates. It is true that the program tries to prevent a wrong
selection, but you cannot rely on a perfect functioning due to the former data structure. You
absolutely have to save your drawing before carrying out the conversion.
Settings:
Name: Indicate the name used to save and load the settings of the dialog box.
LOAD The template marked in the selection list is loaded and the input fields of the
dialog box are filled in accordingly. Then, the dialog will be closed immediately.
You can also double-click the list entry for this command.
SAVE The settings entered in the dialog box are saved using the name indicated in
the Name field. If an entry with the same name already exists you can overwrite
the data.
DELETE The selected entry is deleted.
RENAME The selected entry of the selection list is renamed using the name indicated in
the Name field. This permits you to correct e.g. typing errors or to indicate more
expressive names at a later addition of entries, if the names are already
assigned.
ORDER The alphabetical order of the display list is turned upside down. Thus you can
reach entries which are placed further down without having to scroll up and
down the list.
IMPORT Click this button to add a single template of another template file of the same
type to the list.
A file selection dialog opens where you can select the template file. It is
checked whether you selected the same type. Then, the available templates are
displayed in a list and you can select the desired template.
If its name is identical with the entry in the list, you can overwrite the existing
template or cancel the process.
MERGE Click this button to add all templates of another template file of the same type to
the list.
A file selection dialog opens where you can select the template file. It is
checked whether you selected the same type. In addition, you can decide
whether templates having the same name have to be overwritten or not.
The templates are saved in the variation directory of the program and are therefore available to all network
users at the same time if these stations have created the same directory.
The last settings are also saved in an individual temporary directory of the workstation so that you have
rapid access to the last entry if you would like to repeat the command.
2.7. Logical Links
An important work saving feature in AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D are the links between individual
components and parts, also called "logical links." These links are another characteristic of the object-
oriented structure of the program.
Since working with these links requires a certain level of skill we recommend that novice users first focus
on the basic functions such as creating and manipulating shapes and creating automatic connections.
What Are Logical Links ?

Logical links are links between AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects and their modifications. If you have
modified a component using another component, all components involved know of this "action." When you
now modify one of these components, all others will adjust accordingly. You can also change the entire
modification settings by accessing the corresponding link. See the following illustration:
In this example, using the command Stiffener , two stiffener

plates are added to a steel shape (beam), but with logical links
turned off or disabled. The steel shape and the two stiffeners
are created as three independent AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL
3D objects. To change the size of the beam, click on the
shape with the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D command
"Change Properties" (via the context menu). The shape size
may be changed, but the stiffeners remain the same same
size, same location. If you click one stiffener, you will receive
the information that you are dealing with one steel plate and
you can manipulate it. The second stiffener remains
unchanged, and must also be changed . AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL does NOT recognize the link between the steel
shape and stiffeners attached to it.
The previous example is a perfect illustration of valuable logical links can be. The steel shape (beam)
knows that stiffeners have been added to it and it also knows what they look like. If steel shape is
changed, the two stiffeners are automatically adjusted to fit the new shape size (while the other stiffener
settings remain the same). If the 'Stiffener' link of this shape is selected, the original dialog will display,
allowing changes or modifications to the current settings for just these stiffeners! The shape or thickness
of the stiffeners could be easily changed.
This example can also be applied and expanded to include a connection joint with header plates, cuts, drill
holes, and bolts everything will be automatically adjusted if any changes are made.
Logical links can save an enormous amount of work when creating 3D connections as long as the same
design laws (ie., the type of joint) also apply to the modification. If this is the case, just delete the
corresponding link and change the connection manually the links are an aid but do not have to be used
at all times.
Active and Passive Links

There are two types of links listed in the dialog entries: active and passive links. A passive link indicates
that component A belongs with component B. For example, stiffeners and shapes are connected with
passive links because the stiffeners do not effect any change at the shape and the shape does not directly
affect the stiffeners either.
Active links indicate that component A physically changes or modifies component B. For example, a
mitered cut connects both shapes with active links.
Controlling Links
The actual link content is not important because the program commands take care of this matter
automatically. Link usage may be active or inactive during the work session and may also be changed
when components are manipulated.
The first step is to specify whether links are to be created in general using the global program property
settings (see command Global Settings/LogLinks) and how the program is to act if a component with
existing links is modified. In addition to immediate or no part "updates" you can also confirm or block each
update per individual link.
Additionally, the context menu "Change PS Properties" provides you with access to each individual link of
a shape. Existing links feature an additional tab in the properties dialog, which offers more detailed control
settings.
Dialog Box: Changing (Shape) Properties

Settings:
Number of Links: The number of links already in existence for this component.
Link Type: This field describes the type of link such as cutting, stiffener, etc. that has been
created between the currently selected component, and references the
component that it is linked to.
Modification: This will show the manipulation caused by the other part if the links are active.
Index: This value serves to differentiate between the same type of links.
Active: If this field is checked, the selected link is activated and can become effective
depending on the setting made in 'Global Settings'/LogLinks.' This switch
may also be used to toggle deactivation of certain individual links.
DELETE This button is used to delete the selected link.

Of course, you delete only the link content; the link-generated components and
manipulations remain intact. You can delete a link if you no longer require
access to the performed "action" (see 'Notes about Practical Link
Applications').
<< / >> This button is used to select the desired link.
MODIFY If you click this button, a dialog box appears (depending on the link involved),
which may be used to subsequently change the settings, e.g., of a connection.
If you have connected two shapes using a connection plate, all connection
settings can be changed and the results may be observed directly within the
drawing. The program responds as if creating a new connection.
Notes about working with Links

Although the links represent an enormous time and effort saving, they can also harbor some inherent
dangers.
This is best illustrated by an example:
You have created a frame with two support columns and a beam or girder assembled using a plate
connection and now you will move the support shape. The beam including header plate updates
automatically meaning it is lengthened and joined again. This is desired most of the time and thus the
activated link serves a meaningful purpose.
It becomes necessary to insert an additional part between support and connection plate. To simplify
matters, just deactivate the global link update so that column can be moved. After moving the support, an
additional part is added. The links are then reactivated so that additional work can be done. Nothing really
troublesome has happened up to this point.
A few days later the column shape must be modified again, and all parts are automatically adjusted. As
the links rebuild the connections, the old plate connection is recreated as well. It is quite possible that this
undesired connection might go unnoticed. Remember the link was NOT deleted, but only deactivated
temporarily. And that meant it still existed once reactivated, it rebuilt its associated connection!
ALWAYS REMEMBER:
Active links associated with such basic design modifications should be deleted; NOT just deactivated
temporarily. While this type of occurrence might be unlikely, it does illustrate how logical links work.
3. Auxiliary Commands, Display, Copy
3.1. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Object Snap
Several functions are available to determine points in addition to the AutoCAD object snap function. These
are not independent functions but are applied when querying a point.
Midpoint: (PS_VMID)
This function locates the midpoint of any two 3D points (the midpoint of an
imagined line between the two points).
Both points must be selected.
Shape End Point: (PSPPT)

Shape Midpoint: This function locates the endpoint or midpoint of a shape.The crosshairs have to
be in the proximity of the respective point to receive the active object snap.
Virtual Intersection (PS_VSCH)

Point:
This function locates the intersection point of two lines or their assumed
extension. An actual intersection must be possible (ie. the lines must NOT be
parallel).
Both lines must be selected.
Virtual Intersection (PS_ZSCH)

Point without Z:
This function locates the intersection point of two lines or their assumed
extension which do not intersect, but are located in different planes.
The theoretical intersection point is returned on the current UCS plane.
Both lines must be selected.
This function can be used to determine the "intersection point" of the two
diagonals from the previous chapter and project them onto the current UCS
plane.
Perpendicular to Plane: (PS_LOTPL)
This function locates the plummeting point of any 3D point in any plane.
For this, you have to click the 3D point first, then determine the plane by clicking
three points (this clearly defines the orientation of the plane).
Relative Point: (PS_VREL)
This function locates a point relative to a 3D reference point.

The reference point must be selected first, then enter the relative coordinates
@x,y,z.
Relative Line Point: (PS_VREL)
This function locates a point relative to any reference point along a line.
First select a reference point on the line and then enter a distance. Then click
the line at any point in the direction of the new point.
3.2. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Layer Commands
Command name: PS_LAYER

AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is equipped with automatic layer control. If you use the program
commands to create different objects such as shapes, dimensions, welding symbols, etc.; these are
created on their own layer.
The activation, deactivation, and switching of layers is one of the most frequently performed tasks when
using AutoCAD. AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D supplies its own switching functions for this purpose.
Switching to the most important layers can be done with just one click, and without long searches. Select
the command by clicking its associated button or enter PS_LAYER from the keyboard, then indicating the
desired command line option.
Work Frame On: LFRAMEON
The layer with the frame for the work area is activated.
Work Frame Off: LFRAMEOFF
The layer with the frame for the work area is deactivated.
Element Layer On: LELEMON
The layers for the main elements are activated.

These are the layers for shape, roof/wall shapes, plates, construction lines, and
bolts.
Element Layer Off: LELEMOFF
The layers for the main elements are deactivated.

These are the layers for shape, roof/wall shapes, plates, construction lines, and
bolts.
Additional Layer On: LADDION
The layers for the additional elements are activated.

These are the layers for dimensioning, midlines, position flags, relative heights,
welding symbols, etc.
Additional Layer Off: LADDIOFF
The layers for the additional elements are deactivated.

These are the layers for dimensioning, midlines, position flags, relative heights,
welding symbols, etc.
Object Layer Current: LOBJECT
The layer for a freely selectable element becomes the current layer.
You can select the element by clicking it.
Object Layer Off: LOBJECTOFF
The layer for a freely selectable element is deactivated.

You can select the element by clicking it.
Construction Lines
Current. LCONSTAKT (Button with black lines)
The layer for the construction lines becomes the current layer.
Construction Lines On: LCONSTON (Button with brown lines)
The layer for the construction lines is activated.
Construction Lines Off: LCONSTOFF
The layer for the construction lines is deactivated.
Layer 0 Current: LNULL
The AutoCAD layer '0' becomes the current layer.

3.3. Hide Command
Command name: PS_HIDE
This command can be used to hide components or whole groups, which means that the parts are made
not visible, and cannot be selected. This command permits you to hide only selected components or to
show only selected components and to hide all others. This provides a clearer view of the model.
HINT: This command is most practical if individual parts are to be hidden from view. To hide/show
entire groups of parts it is better to use display classes feature (see command 'Display
Classes').
Hide (PS_HIDE)
Select the parts to be hidden after selecting the command. The parts are no longer visible after pressing
the ENTER key or using the right mouse button. The command 'Regenerate' (not to be confused with
the AutoCAD command "Regenerate") will switch all parts back to visible.
HIDE EXCLUDE (PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE)
This function is working just the other way round than the previous one. After selecting the command, you
can choose the parts which you dont want to hide. After pressing the ENTER key or using the right
mouse button, all other parts are hidden.
Hide Group (PS_HIDE_GROUP) gray icon
This function is working like PS_HIDE. The only difference is that the whole group is hidden, if you only
selected one part of the group.
Hide Group (PS_HIDE_EXCLDE_GROUP) yellow icon
This function is working like PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE. The only difference is that the whole group remains
visible, if you only selected one part of the group
3.4. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Regenerating
Command name: PS_REGEN
This command shows all hidden components (see command 'Show').

Use this command, for example, to generate a parts list since all processed parts are automatically hidden
there for control purposes.
This command is not identical with the AutoCAD command "Regenerate" since the AutoCAD command
does not reactivate the components again.
3.5. Display Classes
Command name: PS_HIDE_CLASS
You can organize AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects from different layers into "Display classes",
which are independent of the AutoCAD layers.
Contrary to the command 'Hide,' which forces you to select all parts individually, here you can select
entire object groups and make them visible or hidden. This will simplify the view of the model displayed on
screen. For example, bracings, bay rails, curtain walls, etc. could each be assigned to a display class and
displayed or hidden as needed. Each element can exist in only one class at a time. This means that it will
be removed from one class if it is assigned to another.
Dialog Box: Display Classes

Settings:
Class Name: The available display classes are listed and the desired class may be selected.
The value of Status indicates if the elements are currently shown (On) or hidden
(Off).
HIDE PARTS Click this button to hide individual parts regardless of the display classes. This
calls the command 'Hide.'
SHOW ALL Click this button to show all parts hidden with the HIDE PARTS button or the
command 'Hide.' This calls the command 'Regenerate.'
HIDE LIST This command hides the elements of the selected display class.
SHOW LIST This command shows the elements of the selected display class.
ASSIGN Using this button, elements may be assigned to a display class.

The desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the button,
select the elements to be assigned to the display class in the model.
REMOVE Using this button, elements can be removed from a display class. The desired
class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the button, select the
elements to be removed from the display class in the model.
Complete Groups: If this field is checked, the complete group will be selected at selection of
elements, even if you select only one part of this group.
Defining Classes or Changing Names

Up to 64 different display classes may be defined, to which the components may be assigned.
To create a class, just double-click an empty list entry and enter a name in the input field that appears.
The same method applies to changing the name of an existing display class.
Dialog Box: Class Definition
Input Field for Defining Classes

or Changing Class Names
3.6. Area Classes
Command name: PS_AREA_CLASS

AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects may also be assigned to one of the "area classes" in addition to
the display classes (see command 'Display Classes').
While the display classes serve to present the 3D constructions in a clearly arranged manner, the area
classes are better suited for a logical structuring of the model into construction sections or similar divisions.
These area classes will be used as selection and sorting criteria during the detailing process. (see
'Detailing'). Each element can exist in only one of these area classes. This means that it will be removed
from one class if it is assigned to another.
Please note:
Area classes and display classes are completely independent from one another.
Dialog Box: Area Classes

Settings:
Class Name: The available area classes are listed and the desired class may be selected.
MARK LIST: By clicking this button, all component parts are marked in color, which are
assigned to the area class selected in the list. The marking is kept until you
select the function -> Regenerate or until you select SHOW LIST for this entry.
SHOW LIST: By clicking this button, you revoke the marking of the component parts of the
entry selected in the list.
ASSIGN By clicking this button, elements may be assigned to an area class. The desired
elements to be assigned to the area class in the model.
DELETE By clicking this button, elements may be removed from an area class. The
desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the button, you can
select the elements to be removed from the area class in the model.
Complete Groups: If this field is checked, the complete group will be selected at selection of
elements, even if you select only one part of this group.
Defining Classes or Changing Names

Up to 64 different area classes may be defined, to which the components may be assigned.
To create a class, just double-click an empty list entry and enter a name in the input field that appears.
The same method applies to changing the name of an existing area class.
Dialog Box: Class Definition
Input Field for Defining Classes

or Changing Class Names
3.7. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Family Classes
Command name: PS_FAMILY CLASS

The family classes are another structuring variant of the construction. The belonging to family classes
permits an automatic allocation of position number prefixes (see ->Positioning command) as well as a
differentiation of the constructive groups by different colors. In addition, components belonging to one
family class, can have a common detail style for detailing (see also ->Detailing).
Each element can, however, exist only in one family class, i.e. if you assign it to another family class, it will
be removed from its former family class.
Dialog box for Family Classes:

Settings:
Display List: The currently available family classes are listed as well as the linked defaults of
color, prefix etc.
Single Parts: If this field is checked, the parts are treated as single parts at selection. In this
mode, all data of the family classes will be adopted into the components.
Groups: If this field is checked, only the component groups are treated at selection of the
parts. In this mode, only the prefixes of the family classes will be adopted for the
position number of the group.
Both: If this field is checked, both the single parts and the groups are treated at
selection of the parts.
ASSIGN By clicking this button, elements may be assigned to a family class. The desired
elements to be assigned to the family class in the model.
DELETE By clicking this button, elements may be removed from a family class. The
desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the button, you can
select the elements to be removed from the family class in the model.
UPDATE: By clicking this button, you can transfer the modifications of the entries in the
family classes to the component parts. After clicking the button you can select
the elements which have to be up-dated in the model.
Defining Classes or Changing Properties

Up to 64 different family classes may be defined, to which the components may be assigned.
To create a class, just double-click an empty list entry. A dialog opens where you can define the
properties. The same method applies to changing the properties of an existing entry.
Dialog Box: Properties of Family Classes:
Settings:
Description: Enter the Name of your Part Family here. This Entry appears in the Selection
List and the Part Properties.
Pos Prefix: Enter the Pos Prefix here. The Pos Prefix is a Text which is appears in the
Position Number Field of each Part before the Position Number itself.
Color: Enter the color of the Part Family here. All Members of this Family Class are
displayed in this color. Enter the Colorindex here or select from the Colortable
via the Select Button.
DetailStyle: Enter the Detailstyle for all Members of this Family Class, or selct from the List.
All Members are being detailed by using this Detailstyle.
Note:Assigning Detail Styles is done normaly inside the Deatil Center.
Make shure you do not override your assignement later in the Detail
Center.
3.8. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Copy/Move
Command name: PS_COPY
The notes about the AutoCAD standard commands (see 'Standard Commands') mention the fact that
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects are treated as AutoCAD elements, and can be copied or moved
the same way.
This is correct, but the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL copy and move commands offer you additional help by
offering the option of limiting the direction of the move. Using AutoCAD object snaps may result in points
being selected that are not in the proper plane. The AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL copy and move
commands prevent this by limiting the direction of the move to the current user coordinate system plane or
even to one axis direction.
If several individual components have been assembled into construction modules or groups (see
command 'Construction Groups') this command can be used to process the entire group by selecting
just one part of the group. This will eliminate unnecessary searching and collecting of the parts within a
selection set.
After the command has been selected, a dialog box will become available featuring the following options:
Copy
Move
Rotation (with simultaneous copy)
Mirror (with simultaneous copy)
Align (with simultaneous copy)
Clone (transfer manipulations)
HINT:
For users of previous versions: All copy and move commands were collected in this dialog and
enhanced with additional functions. Individual commands can still called directly.
3.8.1. Copy
This command copies one or several components from one position to a new position.
Dialog Box: Copy Tab: Copy
Settings:
3D: If this field is checked, the selected elements can be moved in all three
dimensions.
A cone indicates the move direction.
2D: If this field is checked, the start and end points of the move are limited to the
current user coordinate system plane. This means that shapes are only moved
parallel to the user coordinate plane.
A cone indicates the move direction.
X-Axis: If this field is checked, the start and end points of the move are limited to the x-
axis of the current user coordinate system. This means that shapes are only
moved parallel to the x-axis within the user coordinate plane. A cone indicates
the move direction.
Y-Axis: If this field is checked, the start and end points of the move are limited to the y-
moved parallel to the y-axis within the user coordinate plane. A cone indicates
the move direction.
Z-Axis: If this field is checked, the start and end points of the move are limited to the z-
moved parallel to the z-axis within the user coordinate plane. A cone indicates
the move direction.
Free: If this field is checked, the selected elements can be moved in all three
dimensions.
The elements "drag" with the crosshairs and thus can be visibly moved.
Complete Groups: If this field is checked, select only one individual part of a construction group to
copy all parts of this group simultaneously. If the selected part does not belong
to a construction group it is treated as a normal single part.
Single: If this field is checked, only one copy is created.
Multiple: If this field is checked, the selected elements can be copied several times
(corresponds to the AutoCAD function "Multiple Copies").
COPY Click this button to select the copy commands Move, Mirror, or Rotate.
Copying Objects
You can limit the direction of the move with this command. The points clicked on or entered via the
coordinates are then aligned accordingly.
After selecting the command, select the elements to be copied, then confirm the selection. The following
message appears in the command line:
Pick the base point or enter displacement:
This allows two methods of indicating the copy location. Either click start and end point of the movement
(as in AutoCAD); or enter the move as a relative value (without the @ sign!), e.g., 1000,500,-1000 for a
shift of 1000 units in the x direction, 500 in the y direction, and 1000 in the negative z direction of the
current user coordinate system. Then just confirm the prompt Pick the end point of the move or press
ENTER by pressing the ENTER key or clicking the right mouse button.
Direct Use of the Copy Commands

The individual variations of the copy command can also be selected directly. The current settings of the
dialog box then apply to the remaining settings:
3D: PS_COPY_XYZ
2D: PS_COPY_XY
X-Axis: PS_COPY_X
Y-Axis: PS_COPY_Y
Z-Axis: PS_COPY_Z
Free: PS_COPY_FREE
The important axis is marked in red for emphasis in the associated buttons (contrary to the move
command, which is marked in yellow; see command 'Move').
3.8.2. Move
This command operates the same way as the copy command, except the elements are not copied but only
moved in their position. Since the command scope and sequence is almost identical, you can refer to the
section 'Copy' to find out more.
Of course, you can always move an element with the AutoCAD command "Move." The AutoCAD
command does not provide you with the 3D help offered by this command.
Direct Use of the Move Commands

The individual variations of the move command can also be selected directly. The current settings of the
dialog box apply to the remaining settings:
3D: PS_MOVE_XYZ
2D: PS_MOVE_XY
X-Axis: PS_MOVE_X
Y-Axis: PS_MOVE_Y
Z-Axis: PS_MOVE_Z
Free: PS_MOVE_FREE
The important axis is marked in yellow for emphasis in the associated buttons (contrary to the copy
command, which is marked in red; see command 'Copy').
3.8.3. Rotate
Use this command to rotate a component or an entire construction group by a certain angle. The
components can be copied at the same time (similar to the AutoCAD command "Array Polar").
Dialog Box: Copy Tab: Rotate
Settings:
Free Axis: If this field is checked, the rotation axis can be determined by clicking two
points.
Object Axis: If this field is checked, one of the (parallel) coordinate axes of the element UCS
is specified as the rotation axis.
Choose between the x-, y-, or z-axis of the element UCS, which is shown at the
selected object. After selecting the objects, the starting point of the rotation axis
may also be indicated.
90,180,270,Free: Specify the rotation angle. If the Free field has been checked, any rotation angle
can indicated in the input field next to it.
Turn+Copy: If this field is checked, the rotated object is created as a copy. Otherwise, the
original object is rotated to the new position.
Complete groups: If this field is checked, select only one individual part of a construction group to
rotate all parts of this group simultaneously. If the selected part does not belong
to a construction group it is treated as a normal single part.
TURN Click this button to use the selected rotate command.

Rotating Objects
After selecting the command, select the elements to be rotated and then confirm the selection.
If the rotation axis has been specified as a 'Free Axis,' you will be prompted for the start and end point of
the rotation axis, which can be selected by either clicking it or manually entering coordinates.
If the rotation axis is specified as a 'Shape Axis' and one of the associated coordinate axes has been
selected as well, the colored element UCS is shown. The following message appears in the command
line:
Pick the starting point of the rotation axis or press

<Enter> for object origin
The element UCS shows the direction of the coordinate axes. Press the ENTER key or the right mouse
button and the selected coordinate axis is going to be your rotation axis. Click a starting point and your
rotation axis features the clicked on origin and the alignment of the selected coordinate axis.
In case of diagonal
shapes, the copy with
rotation command
allows you to create
copies rotated by a
certain angle in the
same position as the
original shape.
HINT: Use the shape properties (see command 'Change Shape / Properties') to show the element
UCS before selecting the command.
3.8.4. Mirror
Use this command to mirror a component or an entire construction group on a certain plane. The
components may be copied simultaneously.
Dialog Box: Copy Tab: Mirror
Settings:
2-Point: If this field is checked, you can determine the mirror plane by clicking one or two
points. The plane is then perpendicular to the current view and aligned with this
line. It is best to use a perpendicular view of the component.
3-Point: If this field is checked, the mirror plane is indicated by selecting three points in
space.
Mirror+Copy: If this field is checked, the mirrored object is created as a copy. Otherwise, the
original object is mirrored at the new position.
Complete groups: If this field is checked, it is only necessary to select one individual part of a
construction group to mirror all parts of this group simultaneously. If the
selected part does not belong to any construction group it is treated as a normal
single part.
MIRROR Click this button to use the selected mirror command. If '2-Point' was selected,
specify the mirror plane after selecting the object by clicking the mirror axis or
two points. If '3-Point' was selected, specify the mirror plane after selecting the
object by clicking the origin as well as a point on the x- and y-axis.
Direct Use of the Mirror Commands

The individual variations of the mirror command can also be selected directly. The current settings of the
dialog box then apply to the remaining settings:
Mirror without Copy: PS_MOVE_MIRROR

(Yellow)
Mirror with Copy: PS_COPY_MIRROR

(Red)
3.8.5. Align
Use this command to align a component or an entire construction group in respect to a certain plane.
Specify two areas, which are then aligned with one another. The calculated required movement and
rotation are applied to the selected parts. The components may also be copied simultaneously.
Dialog Box: Copy Tab: Align
Settings:
3-Point: If this field is checked, determine the two planes by clicking three points in
space.
Faces: Currently inactive function.
Align+Copy: If this field is checked, the newly aligned object is created as a copy.
Otherwise, the original object is aligned with the new position.
align all parts of this group simultaneously. If the selected part does not belong
to any construction group it is treated as a normal single part.
ALIGN: Click this button to use the selected alignment command.

If '3-Point' was selected, specify the original position by clicking the origin as
well as a point on the x- and y-axis as a reference position. Then indicate the
desired new position by clicking the origin as well as a point on the x- and y-
axis.
The parts are then aligned according to the specifications with the origin points
being identical.
The example below shows how the left shape was aligned on the right shape as a copy. It is moved and
rotated at the same time.
Example -
Alignment with
Simultaneous
Copy
3.8.6. Clone
Use this command to transfer the manipulations performed on a component or an entire construction
group to other components.
A prerequisite for cloning is that the parts have a position number and that these match. The
manipulations are transferred in such a way that all components are identical again after the transfer has
concluded. However, there is the option to limit the manipulations to be transferred to certain types such
as only drill holes, etc.
For example, use this command to apply the same modifications within a model. For example, if a hangar
has been constructed with many identical supports and holes added to each support, they may be added
to just one support and then transferred to all of the others.
Dialog Box: Copy Tab: Clone
Settings:
Cuts: If this field is checked, all normal cuts are transferred (see command 'Edit /
Cut'). This includes the mitered cuts.
Holes: If this field is checked, all drilled holes are transferred (see command 'Drill
Holes').
Cuttings: If this field is checked, all polycuts are transferred (see command
'Edit/Polycuts').
Notches: If this field is checked, all outlets are transferred (see command
'Edit/Outlets').
Boolean: If this field is checked, all Boolean operations are transferred.
clone all parts of this group simultaneously. If the selected part does not belong
to any construction group it is treated as a normal single part.
Clone: Click this button and select the component with the manipulations to be
transferred. Then select the components, which are to accept the
manipulations. However, only parts with the same position number as the
original part will be considered.
HINT: Please remember that the transfer of the manipulations refers to the coordinate system of
the parts. For example, if you look at a shape whose parts coordinate system has its origin on the
right side and you would like to transfer a drill hole to a part 100 mm from the right but its parts
coordinate system originates from the left, this component will receive the new boring 100 mm
from the left as well!
3.9. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Direction Vectors
Command name: See Individual Command

For commands such as "Mirror" and others it is necessary to provide a second point indicating the
direction after clicking one point to specify the axis. For example, an axis in the direction of x might have
the relative point @1,0,0.
This auxiliary function speeds up your input. Click one of the direction vector buttons and the
corresponding relative coordinate is input as if typed from the keyboard.
Relative in the @1,0,0

Direction of X: A point in the positive direction of x is passed.

Direction of Y: A point in the positive direction of y is passed.

Direction of Z: A point in the positive direction of z is passed.
3.10. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Construction Lines
Command name: PS_CONST

The program offers several options to create construction lines, divide distances evenly, or measure
distances which all serve as design and constructional aids. These lines are created on their own layer
(default is Ps_const) so that all of them can be jointly hidden or deleted as well.
Dialog Box: Design Tools
Settings:
Type: Select the desired auxiliary function.
...Parallel: This creates parallel construction lines for a reference line selected or displayed
via pick points.
...Vertical: This creates vertical construction lines for a reference line selected or displayed
via pick points.
...Dispatch: The reference line created by two pick points is divided into equal sections with
the help of construction lines running perpendicular to this distance.
...All Deleted : All construction lines on the proper layer are deleted.
...Measurement: A 3D distance is measured and displayed in different variations (see

'Measure').
Pick Mode...: Determine how to communicate the reference line to the program.
...2-Point: Select a reference line by clicking two points.
...Line: Select a reference line by clicking one line if the function is designed for this.
Otherwise, the function switches automatically to the 2-Point mode.
...Point Line: Select a reference line by choosing a starting point and a line determining the
direction.
Line Type...: Indicates the type of construction lines.
...Lines: The length of the construction lines corresponds to the length of the picked line
or they are extended by the value indicated in the Projection field.
...XLines: The construction lines have an infinite length.

These infinite lines, however, do not influence the drawing limits, for example,
with the AutoCAD command "Zoom Limits."
Options...: Specify additional setting options.
...Distance: The distance of the construction line(s) from the displayed line in case of
parallel or vertical construction lines.
...Scale 1: Distance / spacing information is converted to the scale indicated here. This
allows actual dimensions to be used.
...Angle: The construction lines are rotated by the angle indicated here.
...Number: The number of construction lines or divisions created simultaneously when

using the Divide function.
...Offset: The construction lines are extended by this value with respect to the reference
line.
...UCS XY Plane: All construction lines are created on the current user coordinate system plane;
points are projected to the current user coordinate plane as well.
...Reference Line: A construction line is drawn on the reference line as well (even for a non-
existing line indicated with only 2 points).
Measure
Choose the 'Measure' command if you would like to measure a distance. Then click two points, which
returns the following dialog box showing a few measurement results.
The area 'UCS Coordinates' shows the measuring results regarding the current user coordinate system!
Start or End X,Y,Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points.
Dist X,Y,Z is the distance in the direction of the respective coordinate axis.
Dist Dir is the direct distance of the points.
Angle is the angle from the start to end point in reference to the user coordinate x-axis.
The section 'WCS Coordinates' shows the measuring results regarding the current world coordinate
system. Start or End X,Y,Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points of the UCS and Cos X,Y,Z is
the 'directional cosine' of the vector from start to end point.
Direct Use of Some Settings

You may also use selected settings to create construction lines directly and to create construction lines
much more rapidly.
The number and type of lines depends on the Number and Line Type settings as described in the previous
section (see command PS_CONST). The commands remain active until terminated by pressing the ESC
key or the right mouse button.
HINT: The construction lines are created only within the current user coordinate system plane. It is
best to use them only in the views.
PS_CONST_HOR
This command creates a horizontal construction line.
Click a point the construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_VER
This command creates a vertical construction line.
Click a point the construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_PAP
This command creates a construction line running parallel with a reference line.
First click the reference line and then on a point the construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_PAE
This command creates a construction line running parallel with a reference line using a specified distance.
First enter the desired distance and then click the reference line. Finally, click the side of the reference line
along which the parallel line is to be created.
PS_CONST_SAP
This command creates a perpendicular construction line for a reference line.
Click the reference line and then on a point the construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_SAE
This command creates a perpendicular construction line for a reference line using a specified distance
from the reference point.
First enter the desired distance and then click the reference line. Finally, click the reference point and then
on the side of the reference point where the perpendicular line is to be created.
PS_CONST_DVD
This command divides a reference line into equal segments and creates corresponding perpendicular
construction lines along this line (also utilizing the start and end point).
First enter the number of sections and then click the reference line.
PS_CONST_DEL
This command deletes all construction lines currently on the layer created for the construction lines
(default is Ps_const).
3.11. STRUCTURAL 3D Weight Center Calculation
Command name: PS_WEIGHTCENTER

This command makes it possible to determine the mutual center of mass/weight of as many components
distributed in 3D space as desired.
Select the parts to be considered for calculation after selecting the command. The mutual weight center is
then displayed in the form of a sphere with its center representing the calculated weight center. The result
is also displayed in the command line in the form of world coordinates:
Center is 606.789 -100.000 -801.789

4. Work Frames, Views, Perspectives
4.1. Work Frame Command
Command name: PS_WORKFRAME

Any AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D model generation is started with the creation of one or several Work
Frames.
These work frames aid 3D orientation because they can display the basic system dimensions (e.g., axes
dimensions) as design aid objects, and automatically create the associated UCS systems of the views
created by defining the work frame.
A simple click of the mouse will change the view.
Before defining a work frame, first decide basic shape desired. The following choices are possible:
Rectangular work frames

Cylindrical (also conical) work frames
Wedge-shaped work frames
Pyramidal work frames
The rectangular work frames description contains general information that is common to all workframes.
Information that is specific to the other types is presented separately in the following chapters.
4.1.1. Rectangular Work Frame
A rectangular work frame is inserted: The point of origin is the lower left corner of the basal area (standard
view = APOINT 0.66/-1.33/0.66).
Dialog Box: Rectangular Work Frame
Settings:
Dimensions and Division: The overall dimensions of the work frame are measured from the point of origin
and extending over all 3 axes. The notations length, width, and height
correspond with the WCS axes displayed by AutoCAD (y, x, and z), if the
orientation in 'WCS X-Axis' has been selected.
Note: The work area can also be extended beyond these dimensions the work frame is not a
limitation but rather an orientation aid.
Axis Distances: An asymmetrical distribution of the axes is possible using up to 64 fields. After
clicking this item, a list will appear showing all distances in an ascending order.
Change the entry by clicking it and entering a new value.
Axis Distance Dialog Area Usage:
Specifying Asymmetrical Length

Distribution
Clipping Planes- Define a global front and rear clipping plane for all work frames,
Distances: beyond which drawing objects are hidden in the associated view.
This provides a much clearer component overview because the views will only
show those parts located in the area of the selected work plane. This function
can be selectively activated or deactivated, which allows viewing the depths of
all parts simultaneously.
Roof Layout: The work frame also receives a double pitch roof with the indicated Ridge
Height and Ridge Width. However, you may also specify Roof Slope instead of
the ridge height. The ridge width is the y distance from the origin of the work
frame up to the roof high-point. If the roof is asymmetrical, roof slope refers to
the shorter side.
3D Pattern: If this field is checked, a spatial line grid is displayed in addition to the work
frame auxiliary objects, which clearly displays the sections in each view. This
grid may be used as additional construction lines, e.g., when inserting shapes.
Axis Descriptions: If this field is checked, axis names are added on the basal area of the work
frame to serve as orientation aids. The axes are specified in the tab AXIS
NAMES of the dialog (see 'Axis Names').
Lock Layer: If this field is checked, the layer for the work frame is locked automatically after
it has been created (default is Ps_frame).
Create Views: Determines which view is to be created for the area of the work frame using the
associated UCS system.
Create only those views needed to prevent accumulation of unnecessary
amounts of data you can always add additional ones later on.
Group Name: Name (as prefix) for the created views, see 'Several Areas.'
TEMPLATE Opens the dialog for the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D template management
system.
Insert Work Frame

After selecting the 'Work Frame' command, click the point of origin of the work frame or enter this value in
the form of coordinates. Just pressing the right mouse button causes the point (0,0,0) to be accepted as
point of origin.
Finally, indicate the spatial position by specifying the x-axis of the work frame. Pressing the right mouse
button causes the current UCS x-axis to be accepted as point of origin.
The dialog box for the work frame opens and you can select a type.
The entries of the dialogs above result in the following display of a AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D work
frame in AutoCAD (no additional rotation):
Example - Hangar Work Frame
With asymmetrical length

distribution
L=15000,
B=8000,H=5000
X-Axis: Axis 1
Y-Axis: Axis A
Z-Axis: perpendicular to axis
A/1
Origin: Axis A/1, Height H=0

Several Work Frames within One Model

You can define as many different work frames within one model as desired, which are then distinguished
from each other by their group names.
This group name is a prefix preceding the view name, e.g., hangar_TOP and platform_TOP (with 'hangar'
and 'platform' being the group names specified by you).
This makes it possible to set and specify all important areas of the project even before the 3D model is
built and access them easily using the PS_SETUCS view selection.
(Picture: Work area "hangar" / Work area "platform" x = 5000)
Example - Additional Platform

Work Frame
A platform with the dimensions

3000 x 3000 and a height of
1500 is to be inserted as
displayed.
The coordinates of the origin are

set to y=0, x=5000, z=0, and the
group name is platform the
other settings match the size
and sections.
When selecting the views to be created, the overlapping views of the same work plane of other work
frames may be omitted because they would duplicate views that already exist.
Omit the front and side view of the platform because they are already provided by the 'hangar' work frame.
Work Frames Are Objects

One of the great strengths of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is its object-orientation; and work frames are
good examples of this!
This means that previously created work frames can be modified and manipulated using the standard
AutoCAD commands. You can move, rotate, etc. the work frame or even just partial views the work
planes and the correct UCS settings 'listen to every word.'
If a view is selected, you will see the expected view. The associated UCS system has adjusted itself to the
movement of the object.
Additionally, you can subsequently set up individual cutting planes for each work plane and effect other
modifications using the context menu "Change PS Properties."
Please remember:
The frame layer has to be unlocked for any changes to take effect.
Example - Work Frame

Manipulation
The platform is moved using

AutoCAD and the entire work
frame 'hangar' and 'platform' is
rotated with AutoCAD.
Click on the 3D grid (via

"Change Properties"), and the
divisions or even the basic
shape of the frame can be
modified.
HINT for users of previous versions:

Once you have inserted a work frame, you can modify its shape dynamically. You can monitor the
effects of the settings immediately on screen and even adjust them later on. Remember that
shapes inserted along the lines do not "migrate" or move also, because the work frames continue
to be nothing more than design aids!
Dialog Box: Changing Work Frame Properties

(Select via context menu "Change APS Properties")
Settings:
Camera / Target: Specifying view using camera and target point (command is identical with the
AutoCAD definition for camera and target).
Name: Name of the view.
Front/Rear Distance: Default section plane distance in front and rear.
Frame: If this field is checked, the work plane is displayed as a frame.
Diagonal: If this field is checked, the corner points of the frame are connected diagonally
and the lines are available as construction lines.
Cut Plane: If this field is checked, the cutting plane is marked.
Origin: If this field is checked, the origin of the work plane is marked.
Area Name: If this field is checked, the name of the view is shown.
Dynamic Axisnames, Select whether you want a dynamic, left or right axis name.
Automatic size adoption Select for automatic sizing of the workframe axis name.
Left/Right Axisname Creates left or right dynamic axis name.

4.1.2. Cylindrical Work Frame
A cylindrical work frame is inserted: The center of the cylinder on the basal area is the point of origin.
Dialog Box: Cylindrical Work Frame
Settings:
Dimension No. of Division:

The overall dimensions of the work frame are measured from the point of origin.
The Baseradius and Top Radius fields are used to specify the bottom cylinder
radius (footer radius) and top radius (header radius). It is possible to create
cones using different values. The Height input field is used to specify the height
of the cylinder. The neighboring input field is used to enter the height divisions
including upper and bottom side, into which the area is to be divided. Remove
the marking on the left in front of the word 'height' if you would like an
asymmetrical height division. The corresponding Axis Distances field list is
activated and you can freely define the distances (see also 'Axis Distances').
Any values entered in Dimension+Number are then insignificant.
Axis Distances: Asymmetrical height segmentation is possible using up to 64 fields. Change the
entry by clicking it and entering a new value (see also 'Rectangular Work
Frame').
Clipping Plane- Here you can define a front and rear section plane for all work frames
This provides a much clearer part and component overview because the views
will only show those parts located in the area of the selected work plane. This
function can be selectively activated or deactivated later to be able to view the
depths of all parts simultaneously.
Segmentation:
(Grouping) The Segment Number input field is used to enter the number of circle segments
into which the cylinder is to be divided.
Segmentation:
(Switch) If this field is checked, the cylinder is divided into the equal number of segments
specified in 'Segment Number' ("slices of pie").
Create Views: Here you decide which view is to be created for which area of your work frame
using the associated UCS system.
Create only those views you really need to prevent accumulation of
unnecessary amounts of data you can always add additional ones later on.
system.
4.1.3. Wedge-Shaped Work Frame
A wedge-shaped work frame is inserted; the point of origin is the lower left corner of the basal area
(standard view = APOINT 0.66/-1.33/0.66). The wedge opening data also refer to this view.
Dialog Box: Wedge-Shaped Work Frame
Settings:
and extending over all 3 axes. The terms length, width, and height correspond
with the WCS axes displayed by AutoCAD (y, x, and z), if the orientation in
'WCS X-Axis' has been selected. The neighboring input field is used to enter the
number of axes including starting and ending axis into which the area is to be
divided symmetrically. Remove the marking on the left in front of the word
'length' if you would like an asymmetrical length division. The corresponding
Axis Distances field list is activated and you can freely define the distances (see
also 'Axis Distances'). Any values entered in the length fields
Dimension+Number are then insignificant.The length values refer to the outer
wedge side and decrease in proportion to the respective width.
Axis Distances: An asymmetrical distribution of the axes is possible using up to 64 fields.

Change the entry by clicking it and entering a new value (see also
'Rectangular Work Frame').
Clipping Plane- Define a front and rear clipping plane for all workframes,
This provides a much clearer part and component overview because the views
will only show those parts located in the area of the selected work plane. This
function can be selectively activated or deactivated later to be able to view the
depths of all parts simultaneously.
3D Pattern: If this field is checked, a 3D grid is displayed in addition to the work frame
objects. The sections are clearly depicted in each view. This grid may be used
as additional construction lines, e.g., when inserting shapes.
At Left: If this field is checked, the wedge opens towards the left. Otherwise, it opens
toward the right.
Create Views: Here you decide which view is to be created for each area of the work frame
system.
4.1.4. Pyramidal Work Frame
A pyramidal work frame is inserted. The point of origin is the lower left corner of the basal area (standard
view = APOINT 0.66/-1.33/0.66).
Dialog Box: Pyramidal Work Frame
Settings:
and extending over all 3 axes. The terms length, width, and height correspond
with the WCS axes displayed by AutoCAD (y, x, and z), if the orientation in
'WCS X-Axis' has been selected. The neighboring input field is used to enter
the number of axes including starting and ending axis into which the area is to
be divided symmetrically. Remove the marking on the left in front of the word
'length' if you would like an asymmetrical length division. The corresponding
Axis Distances field list is activated and you can freely define the distances (see
also 'Axis Distances'). Any values entered in the length fields
Dimension+Number are then insignificant. The dimension values refer to the
basal area and decrease in proportion to the respective height.
Axis Distances: An asymmetrical distribution of the axes is possible using up to 64 fields.

Change the entry by clicking it and entering a new value (see also
'Rectangular Work Frame').
Clipping Plane- Here you can define a front and rear section plane for all work frames beyond
Distances: which drawing objects are hidden in the associated view. This provides a much
clearer part and component overview because the views will only shows those
parts located in the area of the selected work plane. This function can be
selectively activated or deactivated later to be able to view the depths of all
parts simultaneously.
Roof Layout: The tip of the pyramid can be changed to an area. Enter the length of the work
frame in the direction of y into the ridge length and the width field of the work
frame in the direction of x into the ridge width field.
Create Views: Here you decide which view is to be created for which area of your work frame
system.
4.1.5. Work Frame Names
If display axes names is selected in the work frame, set the style of the axis name here. Indicate
settings for the x- and y-axis separately.
Axis names are viewed from the origin of the work frame and numbered sequentially according to the
settings.
Please note:
The axis name selected does not affect the labeling of the UCS plane (Work Frame Segments) of
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D. These always start with "1."
Dialog Box: Axis Names
Settings:
Display-
X-Axis
Y-Axis: If the 1,2,3 field is checked, consecutive numbers (starting with the value
indicated in the starting value field) are generated. If A,B,C is checked,
consecutive letters are used.
Order: The values are entered in ascending or descending order.
Display: The axis name is displayed without frame (only text) or within a circle or
rectangle depending on the setting.
Position: Determine the position of the axis name within the work frame (regarding the
standard view APOINT 0.66/-1.33/0.66).
Starting Value
X-Axis
Y-Axis: Indicate the starting value of the first axis.
Size: Indicate the text size (best specified in mm).
Distance: Indicate the text size (best specified in mm). A value >0 shifts the insertion
point of the name to the outside by the value specified.
Main Axis: Indicate the main axis for axis labeling, e.g. X. Then, you get consecutively
numbered axes like X1, X2, X3, etc.
Text Scaling: Enter the plot scale here, and the text size will match your plotter print output. If
you do not want to print the model, the text display can be scaled (standard
value=100).
Text Style: Specify an AutoCAD text style to be used for the axis name.
4.2. SELECT VIEW COMMAND
Command name: PS_SETUCS

Use this command to select the views defined by the work frames command or by adding new views.
Once you select a view, AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D places the UCS into the selected work plane and
displays the 3D model looking at the plane vertically. The specified cut planes are activated at the same
time so that only the objects within this area are visible.
Dialog Box: View Selection
This dialog shows you the views, which are the result of the settings for the 'hangar' work frame according
to the dialog box from the previous chapter.
The names of the views usually consist of the following:
Work Frame Name__View Name
The program enters the view names shown in the list below according to your selection. However, you
can subsequently change names using the context menu "Change PS Properties."
List of View Names:
_PLAN Plan view

_UNDERSIDE Underside view
_FRONT Front view
_BACK Back view
_SIDE_L Side view, left
_SIDE_R Side view, right
_ROOF_L Roof, left (real view upon the roof from the left side)
_ROOF_R Roof, right (real view upon the roof from the right side)
_X_1,2,... Width axis (intermediate axis, counted from the origin, depending on the number)
_Y_1,2,... Length axis (intermediate axis, counted from the origin, depending on the number)
_Z_1,2,... Height axis (intermediate axis, counted from the origin, depending on the number)
Remember that a top view used for a work frame with roof does not represent the entire model but
only a view onto the eaves! To access the entire top view,/ select the command 'Top View' from within
the global view or enter the AutoCAD command "Vpoint 0,0,1" in the command line.
Switching to New View
Select the associated list entry to choose a view (work plane). The selection appears in the Name field
then click the SET VIEW button.
You can also double-click the list entry instead.
The program now switches to the desired view.
If the Zoom Limits field is checked, the view is enlarged to the highest possible zoom value.
Switching to Object View
Clicking the OBJECT VIEW button switches you directly to the command for the object view. You can then
align your view on an object.
A description is listed under the command 'Object View.'
The program then switches to the corresponding view.
Switching to Freely Defined View
Clicking the FREE VIEW button enables you to specify a view indicating a target and source point.
Since this command is identical to the AutoCAD command for a dynamic 3D view via camera and target,
any further description is omitted (reference: AutoCAD manual).
The program then switches to the corresponding view.
Display 3D Global View
The global view cannot be obtained via this dialog but only using the command 'Global View' entering
PS_GLOBAL_VIEW, or you can click the associated button.
The program then switches to the model's global view.
Switch Only the UCS
In the current view, the UCS can be changed to another work plane without changing the view on the
screen. This method is recommended to draw a construction line in the side view while you are in the
general view, in order to subsequently align a shape with this artificial view.
This requires that you select the associated list entry and then click the SET UCS button if you want to
align the UCS using one of the work planes.
Click the OBJECT UCS button if you want to align the UCS with an object view (see command 'Object
View,' command 'Object UCS').
Adding User-Defined Views to the Selection List:
In addition to the views created by AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D you can also add your own model
views to the selection list. After defining these views, you have the same functions available as offered by
the standard views.
Your user-defined views are integrated into the selection list and you can switch to that view or change it or
carry out other manipulations at any time.
How to Create the New View:
To add a new view to the list, this command must be displayed before being selected. However, you can
select the command when you are already in the dialog box by clicking the button FREE VIEW or OBJECT
VIEW.
Example: You have created the 3D model on the left (the right shows its top view). You require a true
frame view for between the points A and C for your further work and you would like speedy access to this
view later on.
First click the Object View button and create a vertical frame view (1).The result is the picture above (2).
The UCS is already correctly aligned for the x/y plane. The z plane (depth) and with that the exact
specification of your later work plane are specified by placing the USC origin into the desired work plane
using the AutoCAD command 'UCS Origin.'
For example, to render the frame axis as the plane, you would select the shape center as the snap point
(not necessary here because in case of the object view, the USC assumes the axis as point of origin
automatically).
Use the dialog again and enter a name for the view using the Name input field. The name should also
indicate the work frame analog to the other views.
Now click the CREATE button. The program switches to AutoCAD and prompts you to enter the lower left
and upper right corner of a view frame, which you can create as depicted by the dotted line in the picture.
This frame describes the new work plane, which is now integrated into the list and thus available.
Deleting User-Defined Views from the Selection List:
If you would like to delete superfluous or erroneous views just select the corresponding view from the
selection list and click the DELETE button.
Do remember, however, that the associated display layer can only be deleted if the frame layer has
been unlocked!
4.3. Object View Command
Command name: PS_OBJ_VIEW_CEN / PS_OBJ_VIEW

The object view command is used to align the UCS plane on an object, which results in a perpendicular
view. The object is aligned in such a way as to center its pick point on the screen and align its insertion
direction parallel to the x-axis, which means that a shape inserted into a work frame at a slant is displayed
as running horizontally, and the surrounding work frame is rotated accordingly.
HINT: If the view does not match the model position select the command again (e.g., using the right
mouse button with the context menu and confirm immediately with RETURN. The view is aligned.
The following message appears in the command line after the command 'Object View' has been selected:
Pick the steel component defining the view or hit RETURN to align the view
You can now determine the desired steel part by clicking it. The default is to use the shape center as the
new UCS origin. If the pick point is to be the new UCS origin keep the ALT key depressed when clicking
the button. The same applies if you only enter the command "PS_OBJ_VIEW" instead of the command
"PS_OBJ_VIEW_CEN."
Colored coordinate crosshairs appear on the picked steel part and the command line shows the message
Select the desired axis
Now use your mouse to click the corresponding colored circle and the object view is displayed with the
selected direction.
Example - Object View
You want an object view on ...and coordinate crosshairs The view is displayed, the
front. Pick the shape while appear at the pick point. You UCS's origin is aligned and
keeping the ALT key depressed, can now select the matching parallel with the front.
clicking one of these lines on color by clicking it.
the front
4.4. Object UCS Command
Command name: PS_OBJ_UCS_CEN / PS_OBJ_UCS

This command creates a UCS system, aligning it with a steel part so that the x-axis of the USC is parallel
with the insertion direction of the object. The part view does not change, however.
The desired UCS position is specified as described for the command 'Object View' of the previous
section. The command process is described in that section.
The origin is set to the shape center using "PS_OBJ_UCS_CEN" as well; using "PS_OBJ_VIEW" sets it to
the pick point.
You need this command, e.g., to measure using an object (the UCS is now aligned right-angled to the
object), or to facilitate the placement of construction lines and other objects on slanted objects without
having to change the view.
UCS Origin (AutoCAD)
You will require the AutoCAD command "UCS Origin" more frequently in this connection and that is the
reason it is explained here briefly:
This command places the UCS origin in a point to be indicated; the orientation of the UCS plane does not
change (it is shifted parallel in space). Since you are drawing in the current user coordinate system plane,
you now have a defined position of your drawing plane.
Enter UCS into the command line and then the letter O or click the command button. AutoCAD prompts
you for the new point of origin, which you enter or select by clicking it.
Example of Working with the Object UCS Command and UCS Origin:
An additional shape is to be added vertically to a slanted shape with the same plane of the system lines.
How to add or create shapes and connections is not important here we are only dealing with the correct
orientation of the UCS planes.
This shape runs diagonally from Now select an object UCS along Using 'Ortho' (see AutoCAD)
one corner of the work frame to the shape and set the UCS just insert the shape using two
the other (centered). origin to the shape start points since this ensures that
(although in this case any you work vertically within the
standard position along the axis plane.
would suffice).
Use an object view for the

original shape to verify that the
new shape is vertical and
centered.
4.5. Global View Command
Command name: PS_GLOBAL_VIEW

This command shows the 3D model in a global view display.
The default is an isometric display of the model diagonally from the left front. Other global views
PS_GLOBAL_VIEW2 ... PS_GLOBAL_VIEW5 with their own direct calls are also possible.
The global views are freely definable (similar to the AutoCAD input "Apoint") for the view in the program
configuration file pr_st3d and initially indicated with default values.
Configuration File Excerpt:
... (other entries)
1VIEWX=0.66 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR X AXIS

1VIEWY=-1.33 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Y AXIS
1VIEWZ=0.66 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Z AXIS
2VIEWX=-0.46 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR X AXIS
2VIEWY=-1.33 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Y AXIS
2VIEWZ=0.66 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Z AXIS
The numbers placed in front of the view refer to the number of the command or button, i.e., _VIEW,
_VIEW2 to _VIEW5.
4.6. Top View Command
Command name: APOINT 0,0,1

The top view command is identical with the AutoCAD command "Apoint 0,0,1" you are viewing the
current user coordinate system vertically.
This command thus switches to the true model top view from within the global view. It does not have a
function in the other views because you already view the plane vertically.
Remember the difference between this top view and the top view used for a work frame with roof.
4.7. Free View Command
Command name: PS_FREEVIEW
The 'Free View" command creates a model view where you select a source and target point.
The view then presented appears to be from your source point to the target point.
The following message appears in the command line after the command 'Free View' has been selected:
Select the target point of the line of vision direction
You can now determine the target point by entering the coordinates or by clicking it. The following
message appears in the command line:
Select the source point of the line of vision direction
Specify the source point and the view is visible on the screen.
The cutting plane command is activated. Changing the distances is not possible here and can only be
done using the command 'Settings, Values.' Select the settings using the context menu.
4.8. Perspective View Command
Command name: PS_PERSP
3D design usually utilizes the isometric 3D depiction. This means that a line located very far back appears
to be as long on the screen as the distance located further to the front.
In reality, however, distances appear to shrink the farther they are removed from an object. This effect can
be simulated with the perspective view.
The perspective view is a form of free view using a fictional camera. You are thus prompted for the
position of source point (camera) and target point (motif, center of picture) and thus determine the line of
vision. The parameter Focal Distance is used to indicate as in photography the focus of the camera.
Larger values are used to zoom the object as if using a telephoto lens. Smaller values create a wide-angle
effect.
The parameter Distance is used to subsequently change the distance to the target point and move back
and forth along the indicated line of vision.
If you select the command, the following message appears in the command line:
Select the desired function/

Distance/Focal Distance/ <Set>
You can now select a function or select the command directly using the corresponding button:
Perspective On: SET
The perspective view is activated.

This requires that you first enter the target and source point of the view and the
focal distance of the camera. The program switches now to the perspective
view.
Perspective Off: OFF
The perspective view is deactivated.

The program switches now back to the isometric view.
Camera Focal Distance: FOCAL DISTANCE
Here you change the focal distance of the camera.

Camera Distance: DISTANCE
Here you change the focal distance of the camera from the target point.
Line of vision changes are only possible using coordinates; the pick function is deactivated. Changing to
the model global view does not yield the desired result until the perspective view is deactivated again.
Remember that the perspective view is only a display view and does not allow any changes. For
that, switch back to the isometric display!
An example of the difference between the perspective and the isometric display as well as the effect of the
focal distance on the display:
Isometric Display - 3D Global View
The point down on the left (0,0,0) is also

the point of origin of the world coordinate
system.
Isometric Display - Front View
You see a view with the settings

target point = (5000,0,5000)
source point = (5000,-100,5000)
Perspective View - Front View

Focal distance = 50
The source and target points are first set

identically
to the points of the isometric view.
However, since the picture is much too large, the

distance
from camera to target is increased to 30000.
This corresponds with the source point (5000,
-30000,5000)
Front View - Perspective

Focal distance = 100
The focal distance of the camera is

increased but the picture shows only a
section of the results.
4.9. Cut Plane Command
Command name: PS_CUTPLANE

Working with 3D model can quickly turn complex, especially if many parts are spatially stacked.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D offers a command to hide parts in front of and behind the current work
plane the cut plane. This facilitates the design process since only those objects are visible that are close
to the same work plane and prevents the accidental manipulation of stacked shapes. When selecting one
of the defined views or an object view, such objects are automatically hidden, provided that you have not
turned off this command globally.
Sometimes it is however also reasonable to look at all component parts of the model in the depth to have
an overall orientation. This is the reason why this function can be switched on and off.
Principle of Cut Planes
When the function Cut Plane is active, only those parts of the work frame are shown that are located
within the limits of the cut plane distance. The cut plane distance is the distance between imaginary
delimitation in front of and behind the active UCS plane.
The illustration below helps you to understand the effect of this command in practical application:
3D work frame of a platform, (Object) view on the upper (Object) view on the upper
global view. platform frame. The cut plane platform frame. The cut plane
function is activated (standard function is deactivated.
setting).
When you have selected the cut plane command, you can make the following selections by typing or by
clicking the corresponding button:
Cut Plane Off: OFF
The cut plane command is deactivated.

All component parts are shown. When switching to another view, the command
is activated again, provided that it has not been turned off globally.
Cut Plane On: ON
The cut plane command is activated.

Only those component parts that are located within the delimitation are shown.
If the command has been turned off globally, it is turned on again when
switching to another view.
Cut Plane On/Off FLIP

(Global):
The cut plane command is alternately switched on or off globally.
This command makes sense when you do not want to work with the cut plane
command for a long time.
Distance: DISTANCE
Input of the cut plane distances.

First, enter the rear distance and then the front distance. When entering the
distance 0, no cut planes are created.
When switching to one of the standard views, these values are overwritten.
5. Shapes, Plates, Stiffeners
5.1. Insert Shapes Command
Command name: PS_INS_PROF

The actual design work with AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D starts when shapes are inserted into the
work frame. However, you need not deal with shape dimensions, representations etc., but simply instruct
the program which shape shall be inserted where and the program will carry out the operation. When
inserting, you need not pay attention to overlapping shapes: there are many possibilities of correcting
overlapping afterwards using a mouse click.
First, make sure that the shapes are correctly positioned. Since the shop drawings are based on this
position, proceed with care.
From now on, you will work in work frames of the model that are smaller:
Selection of an appropriate view and creation of further construction lines, if necessary.

Insertion of some shapes and corrections, if necessary.
Adaptation of the shapes (e.g. shortening) and creation of connections.
Copying of identical parts, if any.
Dialog Box: Inserting Shapes

Settings:
Shape Type: Select a shape type from the list (HEA, angle etc.). The program has a
database containing all current shapes of steel structures (called standard).
See also 'Create Shape List.'
Additionally, you have the option of defining your own shapes. These shapes
are stored in the catalogs special shapes, roof-wall shapes and combination
shapes (see command 'Special Shapes'). After definition of the shapes, they
can be used like standard shapes.
Catalog Display Resolution
Type Size
Selection from the current catalogs is made in the list via the shape type. For
your own shapes, you can also choose between the resolutions high, normal
and low.
Shape Size / Key: Select the shape size from the list (HEA 100,120..., etc.).
When you have combined type and size, the selected shape is displayed
in the Key field. Within one shape type, you can directly enter the full
designation.
Display: If you click this button, you will open another dialog where you can create the
shape list from all of the available shapes. See 'Create Shape List.'
Material: Select a material from the list that shall be assigned to the shape in the parts
lists.
View: Here, you define in which view the shape is inserted.

Cross-section means that the cross-section is displayed in the UCS plane.
The length direction is towards the negative z-axis.
Insertion of the shape results in this 3D

as cross section... representation
This kind of insertion gives a shape the length that has been typed in the Length
field.
Basic position means that the shape is inserted as indicated in the shape
manual for steel structures. The length is defined by start and end point.
Shape in Basic Position

Inserted along Y-axis.
The method of inserting shapes is explained in the description of the buttons

LINE, 2 POINT, etc.
In principle, 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees represent the basic
position, the shapes being rotated counter-clockwise by the indicated degrees
(important e.g., for angles).
Length: The length of a shape in the case where you have selected the view cross-
section (length in negative z direction!). In other views, insert by using the
ANGLE button.
In the other insert modes, the length typed in this field is not taken into
consideration, but it is calculated on the basis of starting and end point.
Height: The inserted shape is moved in positive z direction by this value. When typing
a negative value, the shape is moved in negative z direction.
Front: The shape is shortened or stretched at the starting point by this value. When
entering a positive value, the shape is shortened towards the center of the
shape, whereas a negative value stretches the shape accordingly.
When using this command, you can directly leave space for a head plate
without need for a construction line.
Back: The command is identical with the function of the Front field, the changes
however, being carried out at the shape end.
Example - Application of the Entry Fields Length, Height, Front
Inserted in the active UCS level as cross- Inserted across two points (from ... to),
section, length = 1000, height = 300. The front = 100.
shape has a length of 1000 in negative z The beginning of the shape (from) is
direction and is moved in positive z direction shortened to a length of 900.
by 300.
Turn: The shape is rotated counter-clockwise on the indicated insertion line by the
specified value of the angle.
Radius: This field has no meaning unless you insert shapes by using the MULTIPLE
button.
When you have drawn a continuous line and want to insert a shape along this
line, the corners of the line are replaced by radii of the indicated size, and the
edges are provided with bent shape sections. When entering a value of 0, no
bends are inserted and no miters are cut!
This command is recommended, e.g., for handrails, in order to create a part of
the handrail by selecting the command only once.
EXAMPLE:
A tube with a radius of 45 is

inserted along the upper line.
Thus, two straight sections and
one tube bend are created.
Position: This option is important when inserting the shape by using the ANGLE button.
You decide whether you want to insert the beginning of the shape (Front), the
center of the shape (Middle) or the end of the shape (End).
Options: When the option UCS XY Plane is selected, all picked points refer to the active
UCS plane, i.e., any z coordinate is set to 0. When working in a view and
clicking a line, it may happen that the object snap "catches" a line behind. This
option makes sure that you select a point in the work plane.
When the option Select Position is activated, you can rotate the shape about
the insert axis after its insertion (see Insertion of Shapes).
rd
When the option 3 . point area bisector is selected, you can align the shape
with the help of limiting sides by indicating 3 points at its insertion (see
Insertion of Shapes).
When the option Active. Layer is selected, the shapes are not inserted on the
shape layer (default Ps_shape) but on the active AutoCAD layer.
MULTIPLE See Insertion of Shapes along a continuous line

LINE See Insertion of Shapes along a line.
2 POINT See Insertion of Shapes across two points.
3 POINT See Insertion of Shapes across three points.
ANGLE See Insertion of Shapes across a point and an angle.
INFO A window containing all stored information on the selected shape is displayed.
Shape Preview in the Dialog Box
In the right upper corner of the dialog box, you can see the shape to be inserted according to the selected
settings. The cross-section is displayed as if you looked from the end point to the starting point of the
shape. You can choose the sides of starting point and end point by specifying the mode of insertion (see
below). In this preview, you can also define how the shape will be oriented towards the insertion line in
longitudinal direction. Clicke of the circles (these circles are different for every shape type). The current
selection is displayed in red color.
Example: to insert a HEA 100 "on the axis," click the circle in the middle of the illustration. To insert the
shape 'top, center', click the circle in the middle of the upper edge, etc.
In some cases, the lines of gravity and the back gauge are displayed besides the corner points.
Insertion of Shapes
After having entered size and insertion parameters in the dialog box, the shape can be inserted into the
work frame in different ways. Select the insertion mode being most convenient with respect to the existing
construction lines and views or select the mode that you like best after having acquired some practical
experience.
In view of the large range of possibilities, some experience is necessary until you are familiar with the
principle of shape insertion and manage to insert a shape in the position you want. Practice this command
frequently by using simple examples in order to learn the response of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D.
Insertion along a Line (LINE Button)
This is the fastest way to insert a shape since you determine the insertion line just by clicking a
construction line. Starting point, end point, and thus the shape length, correspond to the selected line.
After selection of the line and in case of asymmetrical shapes, the program displays a cone with the point
pointed towards the end of the shape to be inserted. When you agree with the orientation, confirm by
pressing ENTER or by clicking the right mouse button. To interchange starting point and end, however,
type the letter d and press ENTER or click the right mouse button.
Now, the shape is displayed. If you would like to insert a symmetrical shape, it will be displayed
immediately as well.
Example:
You want to add another After that, click the line. The The shape is positioned with
shape to the frame the upper cone shows the direction of flush upper edge. For the time
edge of which being flush with shape insertion (starting point being, overlapping with the
the construction line. Select on the left, end point on the columns is of no importance.
the shape in the dialog box, right). Press ENTER or click
select the basic position, and the right mouse button.
select the point in the shape
preview (in the middle at the
top). Then click the LINE
button.
When you have selected the option Choose Position in the dialog, the shape can yet be rotated after the
first confirmation and the result is directly displayed. It is only inserted when confirmed once again.
The following message is displayed in the command line:
Pick outside the shape or choose Rotate or Return for Okay +/-/Angle<Return>
Then you can enter the rotation. When typing w, the program prompts you to type the angle of counter
clockwise rotation. When typing + or -, the shape rotates counter-clockwise or clockwise by 90 degrees.
When you do not want to rotate the shape, press ENTER or click the right mouse button.
You can rotate the shape several times. Please note, however, that the indicated rotating angle
always refers to the current position!
A faster way to rotate in 90 increments is to click the

left mouse button.
As you can see in the opposite picture, you can rotate

the shape on the insertion axis clockwise in increments
of 90 degrees by clicking the left mouse button (by the
th
4 mouse click, the shape returns to its initial position).
Insertion along 2 Points (2 POINT Button)
Select insertion line and shape length by typing the coordinates or

by clicking two points (the first point is the starting point, the second
one the end point of the shape).
As for the rest, this function is identical with the insertion along a line, except for the fact that the direction
cone is not necessary.
Insertion along 3 points (3 POINT button)
First, select insertion line and shape length by typing the coordinates or by clicking two points (the first
point is the starting point, the second one the end point of the shape).
By clicking a third point, you define how the shape shall be rotated on the insertion axis. This rotating is
demonstrated in real time by movements of the snap crosshairs.
rd
If you checked the option 3 point area bisector for insertion, you can define the third point of rotating by
means of two areas. At this method, the center of the two areas is determined and a selection crosshairs is
offered for all directions which are situated perpendicular or parallel towards it. The shape then will be
aligned correspondingly.
Example for the Area Method:
You insert the shape (3) first across starting point and end
point or as cross-section. Then, you indicate the two front
areas of the shapes (1) and (2) by clicking 2 lines each per
area. At the center area the selection crosshairs now will
appear and you can preset the final alignment.
As at the insertion of cross-sections, the basic alignment
normally is determined according to the current UCS, a shape
can thus be exactly aligned on the symmetry axis
Insertion across Point and Angle (ANGLE Button)
For this method of insertion, the orientation is defined on the basis of a point and an angle. The shape is
assigned the length that you have typed in the Length input field.
First, the program prompts you to type an Insertion Point. In the previous dialog box, you have defined the
insertion point in the Position field (possible positions: front, middle, end). Then type the angle to the
positive x-axis of the active UCS.
After selection of Choose Position in the dialog box, you can rotate the shape as described above.
Example - Insertion across Point and Angle
In the dialog, you have typed a length and selected

the end. To define the insertion point, click the
marked
point. Click the 45 angle. the program then inserts
the shape as displayed.
Multiple Insertions (MULTIPLE Button)
You can insert shapes along one or several individual continuous lines. Additionally, you have the
possibility of creating bent shapes along bowlines.
For this purpose, you are prompted to specify the Line Objects. You can select these objects either
individually by clicking or by selecting them all at the same time in a window. The program then inserts
one shape for each section of the line.
When you have typed a radius in the Radius field, the program tries to insert a curved shape with this
radius also in the corners. When you have typed a start and end offset (in the Front and End fields); this
offset is taken into consideration for each straight shape section. See also Radius.
Insertion As Cross-Section (See Button Below)
Rotating of the shape to be inserted depends on the selected button. For more information about the
insertion point, see selection View.
LINE First, you are prompted to define the insertion point and then to enter a line.
Select by clicking.
The upper edge of the shape is oriented parallel to this line.
2 POINT You are prompted to define the insertion point.

3 POINT You are prompted to define the insertion point. Define rotation of the shape by
clicking another point.
The shape rotation is displayed in real time.
ANGLE Define the insertion point and type the angle of counter-clockwise rotation.
MULTIPLE Inserts multiple shapes aligned with the selected AutoCAD lines and arcs.
Repeat Insertion
After execution, all insertion commands repeat automatically using the same settings, allowing the same
shape to be quickly inserted several times.
When finished inserting shapes, cancel the command by pressing the ESC key.
HINT: Sometimes, it may be quicker to repeat an insertion although the shape is not correct and to
subsequently change shape type or length.
Create Shape List

Use the DISPLAY button to open a dialog, which allows modifications to the shape list . This might involve
limiting the list to only a few user selected shape types or adding a certain foreign shape, for example.
You then can choose from all types registered with the program (see also 'Shape Database'). The
following dialog appears after the command is selected.
Dialog Box: Creating Shape List
Settings:
Available Shape Classes

(Left List): This is a list of all shape types registered in the program.
In Selection List
(Right List): This is a list of all currently selected shape types listed in the same order as in
the selection list of the shape dialog.
This facilitates setting frequently used types to the top of the list and makes
searching for types much easier.
APPEND>> If you click this button the selected type from the left list is appended to the end
of the right list.
INSERT>> If you click this button the type selected in the left list is inserted before the
marked type.
<<DELETE If you click this button the type selected in the right list is removed from the list.
ALL>> If you click this button all types of the left list not inserted yet are appended to
the end of the list.
<<ALL If you click this button the right list is deleted in its entirety.
Metric,
Imperial,
Automatic: Here you indicate the unit system to be used (inch or mm) for evaluating the
shape keys. If automatic is selected, the system currently used by AutoCAD is
applied (see also the system variable MEASUREMENT in your AutoCAD
manual).
Once you exit the dialog, the shape type list is expanded or reduced depending on your entries on the right
side.
According to the specifications of this sample dialog, the list would only offer the types HEA, HEB, HEM,
and HEAA for selection in just this order.
Query and Change of Shape Properties

Using the context menu "Change PS Properties" you can query any inserted shape and change any
parameters of such a shape. The display of the shape is immediately changed, so that you can view the
change immediately.
Display of the dialog box, however, depends on subsequent manipulation of the shape (e.g. cuts and
drillings). Therefore, only the basic properties necessary for the command Insertion of Shapes are
explained. Additional properties are shown in the corresponding AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
commands.
In the following, only new settings will be presented; the other ones can be derived from the previous
descriptions.
The behavior of the shape is not affected by a simplified representation!
Dialog Box: Changing Shape Properties

(Select using the context menu "APS Properties")
Settings (Display):
Layout: Only Midline: the shape is displayed as one single line, the shape axis.
Envelope: the shape is displayed as rectangular cross-section formed by the
outer dimensions of the individual closed continuous lines of the cross-section
(example: HEA 100 becomes a rectangle 100x96, round tubes are changed into
squares etc.).
Edge Outside: the radii are represented by slanted lines at the ends of the
straight sections.
Edge Inside: the shape is displayed without the radii. The straight sections are
elongated up to a common point of intersection.
With Radii: the shape is displayed as it is in reality.
Holes: Hidden: no drill holes are displayed.

As Lines: only the axes of the drill holes are displayed.
As Circles: the diameters of the drill holes are displayed as surface circles.
As Extrusion: the drill holes are displayed as diameter extrusions.

Real: the drill holes are displayed as volume, i.e., you can look through the hole.
Options: Centerline: the center axis of the shape is additionally displayed.

Gravity Line: the line of gravity of the shape is displayed.
Gauge Line: the gauge lines (marking off dimensions) of the shape are
displayed.
Element Name: the name of the shape is displayed, which is based on ACIS.
ECS System: the inner system of coordinates of the object is displayed (do not
confuse this system with the UCS!).
Outercont Only: only the outer contour is displayed (in the case of hollow
shapes).
Modeler: the shape model is always created by applying the AEC modeler and
not a pure wire model.
ACIS means that an ACIS object is generated to create the model, which is then
fully compatible with such programs as Mechanical Desktop, which is based on
ACIS. In addition, curves are displayed more exactly.
2D: If this field is checked, the shape is displayed in 2D together with a calculation
of the hidden edges which it would have according to the current view.
The display depends, however, on the assigned detail style for detailing (see ->
Detailing / Detail Styles function). If there isnt any style assigned, an internal
default will be used.
INFO: By clicking this button, you can see the entries of shape database (like e.g.
flange thickness, weight per meter etc.).
Settings (Data):
Name: This shape name is entered in the parts lists.
Note1, Note2 Information in the parts lists (comments, items etc.).

PosNo, Send No,
Item:
OrigPosNo: Item number after having fixed the positioning (see ->Positioning function).
Material: Material of the shape.
Length: Length of the shape. Any change refers to the starting point only.
Width, Height, Weight: Width, height, and weight of the shape.
Addition: Addition for the shape length, entered in the parts lists.
Number, Total: Number of parts.
Changed: When this box is selected ('Change Flag'), the shape has been modified and
can be entered into a modified parts list. It can be created new using the
command Detail Changes. See also command 'Positioning.'
In Partslist: When this field is selected, the shape will be entered into the parts lists.
Vol Weight: When this field is selected, the volume modeler calculates the actual weight of
the shape minus all sections. Otherwise, only the usual weight per meter is
indicated. The weight is displayed in the Weight field.
No Detailing: When this field is selected, the shape is excluded from detailing. It doesnt
appear in the parts list of the DetailCenter nor would it be displayed as
subordinate part of a group drawing.
See also ->Detailing / DetailCenter).
Settings (Position):
Shape Display: The red point shows the insertion axis or the reference axis of the shape. This
axis can be changed in the illustration. You look at the cross-section from the
end point to the starting point of the shape.
Insertion Axis: If this field is selected, you can define the insertion axis by means of the shape
figure. The shape position related to the insertion points will be influenced.
Reference Axis: If this field is selected, you can define the reference axis by means of the shape
figure, provided it was added to the shape with ADD.REF. AXIS.
Dx, Dy: Movement of the shape or reference axis referred to the inner system of
coordinates or the insertion line.
-90, +90: The shape is rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise in 90 increments (pay

attention to line of vision).
Turning Angle: Enter a rotating angle.
-PHI, +PHI: The shape is rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise by the value specified in
the field (pay attention to line of vision).
ADD. REF. AXIS: By clicking this button, you can add an additional axis as reference axis to the
shape.
This reference axis is another reference line of the shape and is provided for
later extensions.
SUB. REF. AXIS: By clicking this button, you can remove the reference axis again.
ADD. REF. POINT: By clicking this button, you can add up to two reference points to the shape for
dimensioning. At detailing, all dimension chains will be related to these
reference points.
Unless you make some modifications, the reference point of dimensioning is
always the starting point of the insertion axis. See also -> Detailing.
SUB. REF. POINT: By clicking this button, you can remove the reference points again.
TURN: Starting point and end point of the shape are interchanged, so that the Shape
Display is in accordance with the current line of view.
Settings (Assignments):
Detail Style: You can modify the assigned detail style of the shape having a decisive
influence on the shape layout in 2D or at detailing. (see also -> Detailing).
Please note, however, that the detail styles normally should be assigned
within the Detail Center. If the Detail Center is open, you have to carry out
an update of the component parts list after modifications of shape
properties.
Display Class: You can change the assigned display class of the shape (see also > Display
Classes command).
Area Class: You can change the assigned area class of the shape (see also > Area
Classes command).
Part Family: You can change the assigned part family of the shape (see also > Family
Classes command).
5.2. Insert Bent Shape Command
Command name: PS_INS_RPROF

You have the possibility of inserting bent shapes along bowlines or of creating an arc by specifying three
points.
The basic settings are the same as in the case of inserting straight shapes. For information on the dialog
field, refer to the relevant descriptions. In the following, only the differences between the two commands
are described.
Dialog Box: Insertion of Bent Shapes

Settings:
Dialog Box: See command Insertion of Shapes in the previous section.
ARC: By using this button, you insert the shape along a bent line. The remainder of
the command is identical with the insertion of straight shapes along a line (see
command Insertion of Shapes / Insertion along a Line).
3 POINT: By using this button, the shape is inserted across 3 points forming a circular arc.
First, you are prompted to define the center point of the arc, then to define
starting and end point of the shape.
Contrary to AutoCAD, the program determines the arc shape by arranging the
arc section with the shorter arc length between starting point and end point.
This command cannot create an arc of 180 degrees. Use a construction line or
Change Properties.
Example:
2 arc shapes
In case of the right arc, a point

below the right-hand starting point
has been clicked.
Query and Change of Shape Properties

In addition to the settings of view, data, and position (as in the case of straight shapes), you find a tab for
the bend.
Dialog Box: Changing Shape Properties

(Select via the context menu "Change PS Properties")
Settings (Bend):
Radius: Radius from the center point to the insertion line of the shape.
Start Angle: The angle between an imaginary vertical line through the center point to the
starting point of the shape in arc direction.
End Angle: Angle between an imaginary vertical line through the center point to the end
point of the shape in arc direction.
Turning: Rotating of the shape.

5.3. Insert Shapes After Picking Command
Command name: PS_INS_PPROF

Using this command, you can insert a shape by clicking another shape. This allows for quick insertion of
shapes of equal size (e.g. as an additional support) in case the existing shape is not known any more.
There is no need for querying the shape information.
After selecting the command, you are prompted to click a shape. Then, the usual dialog box of the
command Insert Shapes is displayed, the defined shape being entered in the Key field.
Do not get confused if the shape is not displayed in the list, the type of the picked shape will be inserted
anyway since Key takes precedence. The other shape data, however, must still be entered individually.
5.4. Insert Plates Command
Command name: PS_PLATE
Apart from given standard shapes and freely defined special shapes of any kind, you can insert plates of
any shape (in the program, such plates are called poly-plates). Such plates are flat plates of equal
thickness such as gusset plates or other types of connecting plates.
The other plate types commonly used for steel structures such as base plates, cap plates, or stiffeners can
be created by the program using automatic functions. The program also names them. These functions
are explained later in the users guide; here you find a general explanation of plates of any thickness.
Dialog Box: Insert Plates
Settings:
Thickness: Thickness of the plate to be created.

Insertion: The insertion plane of the plate is moved by this value in
negative direction towards the reference plane (active UCS or element UCS).
Dimensions: Enter the plate dimension into the Length and Width fields if you have selected
the contour 'Rectangular.'
Insert Plane: Here you indicate the reference plane for the insertion of the plate.
If the Act. UCS field is marked, the corner points of the polyline are referenced
with the current UCS when creating the plate if you have selected the contour
'Take over contour.' This is the standard case if the drawn ply-line is located
within the UCS.
If the Element UCS field is marked, the element UCS of the polyline is
considered to be the reference plane when creating the plate if you have
selected the contour 'Take over contour.' Use this setting if the polyline is not
located in the current UCS and you want to insert a plate to it.
If the Areas field is checked, the plane described by two lines (on which you
have to click) is considered the reference plane. For example, you can thus
align a plate on a shape.
Contour: The shape of the plate is determined here:
If the Pick Contour field is marked, the shape of the plate is determined by
picking the individual corners in the current UCS plane. This does not allow for
any radii.' When clicking the corner points you have the same command
functions available as when drawing a polyline using AutoCAD. If the selected
corner points are located outside of the current user coordinate plane they are
projected into the current UCS plane.
If the Take over Contour field is marked, the shape of the plate is determined by
selecting a polyline. This polyline can include radii. Remember that the polyline
is not deleted after it has been integrated.
If the Rectangular field is checked, a rectangular plate with the dimension

specified in 'Dimensions' is created. Use the 'Insertion Point' field to specify the
insertion point of the plate. See also the command Insert Shapes.
If the Rectangular with Line field is checked, a rectangular plate is created

along a line. The line determinates the length of the plate and the width is
determined by the value specified in Dimensions.
Use the 'Insertion Point' field to specify the insertion point of the plate. (See
also the command Insert Shapes.). Now additional buttons will be displayed
with which the plate can be rotated around this insertion line. By clicking the
button +90 or 90, the plate is rotated in 90 increments. By clicking +PHI or
PHI, the plate is rotated by the angle specified in the accompanying input field.
If the Along 4 Points field is checked, you determine the form of the plate by
picking any four points in the space you like. The first three points determine at
the same time the insertion plane of the plate. The fourth point is plumbed
towards this plane. Thus you have the possibility to create a plate without
setting the UCS before.
Options: If the Act. Layer field is checked, the plates are not inserted in the plate layer
(default is Ps_plate) but rather in the current AutoCAD layer.
If the Grid field is checked, an additional grid is visible at the upper side to
display gridirons, for example.
Insert Edge: The selection Upper Edge, Middle, or Lower Edge determines the insertion
plane of the plate. Please note that the values for the insertion height apply up
to this plane.
Offset: Here you specify an offset in the direction of x and y (Dx and Dy) by which the
insertion point is shifted. This is only significant if you have selected the
'Rectangular' contour and the variable 'Insertion Point' (red point).
Insertion Point: Here you determine the insertion point if you have selected the 'Rectangular'
contour. You can click one of the 10 points. If you have selected the variable
insertion point (red point), you can specify any x and y offset.
Material: Choose the material from this list, which will be associated with the plate in the
parts list.
Part Name: Select a different plate name for the parts list to be able to distinguish between
steps of a staircase, gridirons, and others.
INSERT: After clicking this button the plate is created.

Depending on your selection you either indicate the desired corner points of the
plate using coordinates or pick the points (Pick Contour) or click a drawn
polyline (Take Over Contour) or click an insertion point (Rectangular). Now the
plate is displayed immediately.
DIMENSIONS Click this button to re-specify the reference line for the plate length. (See also
'Re-Specify Dimensions and Grid').
GRID Click this button to re-specify the reference line for the plate grid. (See also
'Re-Specify Dimensions and Grid').
INSERT After clicking this button, the plate is created.

Depending on your selection you either indicate the desired corner points of the
plate using coordinates or pick the points (Pick) or click a drawn polyline (Take
Over). Now the plate is displayed immediately.
INSERT EDGE Use this button to re-specify the reference length of the plate for the plate length
of the plate identifier (the default is the longest side).
The following three figures show you some variants of plate creation.
This polyline is located in the displayed UCS plane

and is to serve as the contour line for a plate
This plate is created when specifying a plate

thickness = X and an insertion height = 0.
The insertion height is middle, and the plate
is created by using the Import mode.
This plate is created when specifying a plate

thickness = X and an insertion height > 0.
The insertion plane is the upper edge (depicted in
gray), and the plate is created by using the Import
mode. The offset is in the negative z direction
Re-Specify Dimensions and Grid
The overall dimensions are usually determined with the following program rule:
If a right angle exists, the two lateral sides of the angle define the plate orientation. The longer of the two
laterals then defines the lengthwise direction of the plate. If a proper right angle does not exist, the longest
side of the plate defines the lengthwise orientation.
You can freely define this reference edge after clicking the DIMENSIONS button. This requires that you
first click the plate to be changed to select it and then on a line determining the direction. The dimensions
are now recalculated using the data for this lengthwise direction.
The plate grid also adjusts itself tot his lengthwise direction by default. Clicking the GRID button aligns the
grid using the same method as applied for the dimensions.
Examples Plate Orientation
The first plate has a right angle;

the second is aligned with the
longer side. The third plate is
identical with the second plate
but has been realigned
Query and Modify Plate Properties
The PS plate properties dialog of the context menu in principle corresponds to the one of shape properties
and therefore doesnt need any further explanationsl The data on the property page Position of course
suit to the description of insertion positions of plates.
A special feature is, however, the determination of the plate name. In the Name input field, you only enter
the part of the plate name which stays the same. The actual structure of the name with the variable part
resulting from the dimensions displayed in the gray field below is determined by the program with the
help of a format default.
This format default is determined in the global settings of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D (see command -
> Global Settings / Plates).
5.5. Insert Bent Plates Command
Command name: PS_ARCPLATE

This command also permits you to insert bent plates at arc lines or to construct the plate along 3 points. A
plate is created which corresponds to a bent rectangular plate (resp. to a bent flat steel).
The essential settings are the same like those for inserting normal rectangular plates. You can look up the
meaning of the dialog boxes there. The following description therefore only shows the contrasts to this
function.
Dialog Box: Insert Bent Plates
Settings:
Dialog Boxes: see ->Insert Plates function in the previous chapter.
ARC: By clicking this button, you insert the plate at a bent line.
The selected insertion point determines the plate position related to this line.
You have to click the arc.
3 POINTS: By clicking this button, you insert the plate along three points constructing a
circular arc.
You are asked for the center of the arc first, then for the starting and end point
of the plate.
In contrast to AutoCAD, the program determines the arc in the way that the
plate is aligned towards the piece of arc having the smaller circular length
between starting and end point.
A 180 arc isnt possible by means of this function. It has to be created by
means of an auxiliary circular line or by modification of Properties.
Example:
Bented Plate
5.6. Insert Stiffeners Command
Command name: PS_RIP / PS_RIP_ANGLE
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D offers an automatic command for the insertion of a stiffener into a shape.
Although stiffeners are common poly-plates, the program already calculates their dimensions according to
the shape and user specifications. You may select from a number of variables and track the result
immediately in the drawing, modifying it in "real time."
In the case of symmetric shapes such as HEA, HEB, etc., two opposite stiffeners are created between the
web and the two flanges. When only one stiffener is needed for the structure, just delete the other one.
Dialog Box: Insert Stiffeners

Settings:
Layout: Here you select the stiffener shapes.

Slanted: the shape radius is bridged by a bevel, so that square stiffeners are
created.
Slanted: the shape radius is bridged by a bevel, so that square stiffeners are
created.
Adapted: the stiffener radius is adapted to the shape radius.
Rounded: the stiffener radius is rounded towards the inside, e.g., in order to
provide gaps for the galvanization process.
Stiffener Length: Full Stiffener: the stiffener height extends over the complete web height.
Half Stiffener: the stiffener height stretches over half the web height. As you
insert the stiffener, you can decide whether you want to attach the stiffener at
the upper or the lower flange.
To Measure: the stiffener is given the height that you enter into the Length
Dimension field. As you insert the stiffener, you can decide whether you want to
attach the stiffener at the upper or the lower flange.
Square: A triangular stiffener is inserted with the height that you enter into the
Length Dimension field. (The length O means half the height of the shape). As
you insert the stiffener, you can decide whether you want to attach the stiffener
at the upper or the lower flange
Form Group: If this field is checked, the stiffeners and the shape are arranged to form a
group. If the shape is already part of another group, the plate is allocated to
that other group.
Slope Insertion: When this field is checked, you can insert the stiffeners into the shape using a
slanted position. As you insert the stiffener, you are prompted to define a line
specifying the direction.
The necessary extension of the stiffener width is calculated automatically.
Weld Mark: When this field is checked, you indicate whether small borings serving as weld
mark have to be inserted into the shape after insertion of the stiffeners. These
marks can be output in the workshop drawings or in the NC-data.
None: No marks are fixed.
At Center: A mark is fixed at the center of the stiffener.
At Edges:: A mark is fixed at each of the outer edges of the stiffener.
Dimensions: Here, you enter the stiffener dimensions.

Thickness: Thickness of the stiffener plate.
Flange Offset: when calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to
the flange side, i.e., the stiffener height is slightly reduced.
Web distance: when calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to
the web side, i.e., the stiffener width is slightly reduced,
Web distance: when calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to
the web side, i.e. the stiffener width is slightly reduced
Length: value for the stiffener length when you have selected the stiffener
length To Measure.
Offset: when calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to the
flange outside, i.e., the stiffener width is slightly reduced. If the stiffener is to
slightly project towards the outside, type a negative value.
Round: this is the rounding accuracy applicable to the width of the calculated
stiffened plate. Rounding is carried out after calculation of the projection. Using
this command, it is possible, e.g., to permit only dimensions divisible by 5, so
that flat steel bars can be used.
Options: Here, additional stiffener data can be entered:

Radius: this value indicates the radius of the ribbed plate at the shape radius. If
this value is 0, the shape radius is imported.
If you have selected the form Insert at Slant, the radius is bridged by a slanted
edge.
Angle: here, you can enter the angle of deviation of the slanted stiffeners from
the normal position (if applicable). In the entry boxes Af and As, you enter the
weld seam thickness on the flange side (Af) and on the web side (As) of the
stiffener. Weld seams will be entered. The welding symbols can be added
later.
Item: An item number can be added to the stiffeners which can be analyzed and
evaluated e.g. in the parts list.
Material: Select the material that the ribbed plate is to be assigned in the parts
lists.
Insertion of Stiffeners
You can insert stiffeners either in views or in the global view. When you have selected normal stiffeners
(i.e., stiffeners running vertically to the shape axis), you are prompted to specify the Shape where the
stiffeners are to be inserted.
After selection, the program prompts you to specify the Center of the Insertion Point of the Stiffeners. Click
the point you want on the shape or on a construction line. Your pick point is generally placed
perpendicular to the shape axis.
When you have selected Full Stiffener, the stiffener is inserted to fit. When you have selected Half
Stiffener' or To Measure, you are prompted to specify the fastening side of the stiffeners. Click the flange
side with which the stiffeners are to be in contact.
Example:
You have drawn the construction

lines on the upper flange in the top
view as shown. If you click the line
at any point, the pick point is always
positioned perpendicular to the axis
and used as the insertion point of
the stiffeners.
When selecting the command for the stiffeners, the last setting will be used, and the stiffener will be
inserted with these dimensions. In the dialog displayed afterwards, you can adapt the dimensions and
check the result in the model immediately.
Slanted Stiffeners:
In principle, the insertion of slanted stiffeners is the same as described above, except for the fact that you
are prompted to define a Position Line of the Stiffeners. Click a (construction) line showing the orientation
of the stiffeners.
Now, the stiffeners are inserted into the shape in a slanted position. The distances refer to the outer
corners of the stiffener plates.
If you select the command via "PS_RIP_ANGLE," you will be prompted for the position line right during
input and can then click it.
HINT: Show the center line of the shape in the top view and use the virtual point of intersection
without z, in order to get an exact center point of insertion using the point of intersection of the
axis and the construction line.
6. Modifying, Drilling, Notching
6.1. fy Elements Command
Command name: PS_MODIFY

It may be necessary to correct the length of shapes and plates already inserted or to provide bevels,
notches, etc. When inserting the component parts, you have paid attention to inserting the shape at the
correct position, e.g., you have positioned the axis on a system line. Very often, however, component
parts overlap and must be adapted subsequently. Additionally, it may be necessary to rework your work
frame due to modifications.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D offers a large range of commands for the modification of component
parts. Some operations can (also) be executed using the standard AutoCAD commands and the grips.
Others, however, require the corresponding AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D commands.
There are many different commands for a modification depending on purpose. In the following chapter,
these commands are explained in detail.
This is the main window with a selection of functions that are activated by clicking the button. Most
functions can also be selected directly by typing a command.
Some functions repeat again automatically, which allows several component parts to be modified by
applying the same functions. When this function is not required, it can be canceled by pressing the ESC
key or by clicking the right mouse button.
Dialog Box: Selecting Modification Functions

6.1.1. Modify Length Function
Shortening Shapes
You can shorten shapes by selecting a distance through picking, by typing a dimension, or by using a
default value.
In any case, you are first prompted to select the shape by clicking. Your pick point determines the side on
which the shape is to be shortened. When clicking within one third of the length seen from the end, the
corresponding side will be shortened by the specified value.
When clicking within the middle third, either side of the shape will be shortened by half the specified value.
Cut by Pick: PS_MODIFY_SHP
First, you select the shape by picking the corresponding position. Then you are
prompted to define starting and end point of the shortening action.
Since the vertical projection of the two points on the length axis determines the
dimension of the length modification, it is recommended to work parallel to the
length axis.
Cut by Dim: PS_MODIFY_SHE
First, you select the shape. Then you are prompted to define the value of the
length modification. Type or confirm this value. It remains stored until the next
modification.
Cut by Default: Select via main dialog
First, you select the shape.

Then, the shape is directly shortened by the value displayed in the Default
Value field. Here, you may enter a value for the spacing of linings placed
underneath base plates.
Cut by Default and Cut by Dim are independent of each other, so that you have two values for direct
access.
Extending Shapes
These functions are used like the previous functions for shape shortening, except for the fact that the
shape is extended by Cut by Default or Cut by Dim. For a description of the function, read the previous
explanations.
Extend by Pick: PS_MODIFY_LGP
Extend by Dim: PS_MODIFY_LGE
Extend by Default: Select via main dialog box

6.1.2. Fit Shapes Together Function
This function allows complete shapes to be cut or extended at boundaries, just like the AutoCAD command
for the stretching and cutting of lines. The boundary may be formed by another shape or by a construction
line (arranged vertically to the active UCS plane, thus creating a cut plane). If the plane is slanted, the
modified shape will have a slanted line, too. By using this function, shapes that are too long or too short
can be adapted to fit after their insertion.
When you have typed a value in the Distance field of the main dialog, the shape will be shortened by this
value after it has been cut.
Please note: The distance refers to a vertical distance between shape and cut plane.
At Line: PS_MODIFY_CTL
The shape is cut at an imaginary plane, the line being oriented vertically to the
active UCS plane. Working in a view simplifies your work, since the shape is
cut at this line.
Click the shape at the end to be cut. Then, select a line. If the shape could
intersect with the line (you consider the line to be of infinite length!), the shape is
cut. To extend the shape, hold down the ALT key while clicking the end to be
extended.
At Object: PS_MODIFY_CTS
The shape is cut or extended at another shape. When the shape is cut, the
shorter section is always cut off.
Click the shape to be cut and then the shape along which this shape is to be
cut. The plane actually hit by the centerline (or the extended centerline) of the
shape to be cut will be the cut plane. If the centerline does not meet any
surface, no cut can be made!
6.1.3. Mitered Cut Function
Command name: PS_MODIFY_CTA

This function allows for mitering two shapes that may even have different sizes.
In the main dialog, you can choose between a normal mitered cut across the bisecting line of the angle
(Anglebisector) or across the outside edge (in the case of different shapes, it results in a cut variant).
Additionally, you can define the gap in the GAPdistance box.
Apart from real mitered cuts, this function allows for cutting shapes with rounded corners towards each
other. The radius of an additional bent shape is inserted in the Radius input field. If shapes with different
sizes have been selected, the bent shape corresponds to the size of the shape which was clicked first.
When clicking the button ANGLEBISECTOR, OUTSIDE EDGE or ROUNDED CORNERS, you are
prompted to indicate the two shapes to be cut by clicking. For a direct use of the function Real Mitered
Cuts, the active settings of the main dialog apply.
Miter and Rounded Corners

Variations:
6.1.4. Divide / Combine Function/COMBINE
A single shape can be divided into two independent shapes, and two identical shapes can be connected to
form one single shape.
This function enables you to create joists for the design of platforms by connecting the shapes to be
replaced in a first step and by separating them one after the other in a second step. Vice versa, joists can
be easily removed and replaced by shapes.
Divide: PS_MODIFY_DVD
By using this function, a shape can be divided into two shapes. The cutting line
may be any line. If the line is slanted, the shapes are divided accordingly.
To start with, select the shape to be divided. Then, click the cutting line. When
you have entered a distance in the main dialog DISTANCE, both new ends will
be shortened by this value.
Please note: the distance refers to a vertical distance between shape and
cutting line.
The information for the parts lists is identical with that of the initial shape, except
for the length.
In order to master the course of the cut line better, it is recommended to work in
one of the views.
Combine: PS_MODIFY_CMB
This function allows shapes of the same length to be combined, provided that
they are exactly aligned!
Click the two shapes to be combined.
If they are not in alignment, the function will be aborted.
The information for the parts lists is identical with that of the first selected shape,
except for the length.
On the next page, you will see how to work with the function Divide using the
example of a platform.
Example - Platform Design (Simplified):
Task: Design a platform

using the following shapes:
Platform beams IPE 300

Platform edge girders IPE 200
Headers HEA 120
Create a working area with these

dimensions and insert the shapes at
the construction lines.
Overlaps can be ignored!
(See also command Working Area,
command Insert Shapes)
Change to the top view and

use the dialog box for the processing
of the elements. As an alternative, you can
also process the y-axes of the general
overview in the front view.
Since IPE 300 has a flange width of
150 mm, enter the value 75 in the
Separation Distance field and click
the button DIVIDE.
Zoom the points of intersection one after
the other, select the part of the cross
girder to be separated, and the construc-
tion line as cutting line.
Now you have several shape parts that can

be connected subsequent steps.
(The program offers the necessary
commands).
Thus, you need not insert each partial shape
(which may be a large number), and the risk
for dimensional errors is eliminated. If you
want to remove beams, you can easily close
the gaps between cross girders and create a
continuous shape by clicking the function
Combine.'
6.1.5. Cope/Notch Function
Command name: PS_NOTCH

Notches and shape cuts can be created automatically using re-selectable distance dimensions. You may
select from various variants and track your input directly in the drawing and change in "real time" if needed.
Dialog Box: Create Notches
Settings:
Layout: Here, you select the shape of the notch. The different variants are shown: On
the upper left, the initial situation before notching is shown (the shapes are still
overlapping), and on the upper right you see the Contour. Pictures below from
left to right: Fit Shape Start (the normal notch), Fit Shape Middle and Fit Shape
End.
Align: If Outer Edge is activated, the dimensions for the distance between top and
bottom flange inside refer to the outside of the flanges. If Inner Edge is
activated, the dimensions refer to the inside of the flanges.
Edge Layout: Edge means that the notches at the shape radii are carried out with a beveled
edge.
Radial means that the notches at the shape radii are carried out with adapted
radii. In the Radius input field, the determined radius can be modified later.
Opt. Access means that holes are drilled in the inner corners of the notch. In
the Radius input field, the radius of the drill holes can be preset.
Distance: The following dimensions can be set. (The distance dimensions for the bottom
flange can also be entered individually.):
Top Flange Outside
Top Flange Edge Top Flange Inside
Web Distance
In the Radius input field, you can indicate the radius of Drill Holes or Radial
option.
GET FLANGE - Clicking this button allows an unknown shape to be clicked.

THICKNESS The flange thickness is then entered in the input fields for Top and Bottom
Flange. If you have entered a value in the +Distance field, this value will be
added.
Using this function, a flange distance can be swiftly determined without knowing
the shape. As reference, you should select the setting Outer Edge.
+ Offset: This value is added to the result in the function GET FLANGE THICKNESS.
CLONE: By clicking this button, you can transfer the data of the current cope directly to
several copes which have to be created anew. You have to click all shapes first
which have to obtain the cope. Then you have to click the shapes to be
notched.
Preparing Notches
First, click the shape to be notched and then the shape specifying the contour. When selecting the
notching function, the last settings will be used as default values, and the connection will be created
accordingly. In the dialog that appears, you can adapt the connection and check the result immediately in
the model.
6.1.6. Polycut Function
Command name: PS_MODIFY_CTP

Using this function, you can cut out shapes along any freely drawn contour (polyline). This allows, e.g.,
cutting of notches that are not covered by the special notch function (see function Notch).
For penetrations, you can separate shapes from each another, e.g., to obtain slotted tubes, drilled railing
posts or similar elements.
If you entered a value in the Gapdistance input field of the main dialog, the cut is extended by the indicated
value to all directions regularly to obtain some space for inaccuracies of production.
In case of a direct use of this function, the active settings of the main dialog apply.
Please note in both variations: When you divide a shape using this function, you will not obtain two
shapes. This has to do with the volume modeler of AutoCAD. You must take care not to create
two parts of a shape, e.g., by prior shape shortening. If you want to obtain two shapes, please use first
the function Divide and divide the shape at a suitable point.
Cut Out at Polyline

A shape can be cut out along any polyline, which is drawn either beforehand or subsequently by clicking
corner points. A previously drawn polyline will not be deleted after cutting.
Work in a suitable shape view, which can be selected using the commands Select View or Object
View.
Select the setting Polygon when you have already drawn the line. Then click the
POLYCUT button. You will be prompted to enter the shape to be processed and
then the existing polyline.
When you have selected the Pick function, you can create the polyline by clicking
the corner points. The resulting line is displayed for checking.
The settings Only Top and Only Bottom mean that only the part above or below
the shape centerline is cut out.
Penetrations and Contour Incision

Like in the function Notch, Shape Cut, you can create a penetration by separating one shape volume
from another.
Unlike that function, the exact shape is cut out with no option of keeping a fitting tolerance. The important
difference, however, is the fact that a shape is just cut to the penetration depth of the shape determining
the shape. When using the function Notch, the shape will be cut out completely.
If you want to remove the contour of a shape, you can insert a

shape for defining the contour, carry out the function, and
delete the shape afterwards.
In order to perform a POLYCUT for a penetration, select in the main dialog the setting Remove and click
the button POLYCUT.
First select the shape to be incised, and then the shape (or another 3D model) that is to penetrate the
other shape. The first shape will then be cut out.
Example - Polycut as a Contour Incision:
Two small tubes are to be welded to the vertical hollow tube

in a slanted position
First, insert the shapes in a way that they overlap.

On the first two pictures, the situation is shown in the
front view and in the top view (the cut planes are deactivated,
so that you can see the depth (see also command Cut Plane).
Select the dialog Processing Elements, put the selection

for Polycuts on Remove and click the button POLYCUT.
Now click the big tube, then one of the small tubes in order
to cut out the volume. Click again the big tube and then
the other small tube, in order to cut out the volume.
Exit the command.
In picture No. 3, you see the cutouts in the big tube.

(The two slanted tubes have been omitted in this
representation).
6.1.7. Outlet Function OUTLET
Command name: PS_OUTLET

Using this function, you can insert simple geometrical shapes of outlets and countersunk parts into your
shapes. With repeated use, any complex structure can be created.
You can create square, wedge-type, and circular shapes. The dimensions are entered via a dialog box.
Since the entered data can be directly checked on screen, the entries are not described in detail.
Dialog Box: Inserting Cutouts
When selecting the command you are prompted to indicate the shape to feature a cutout.
First, click the shape and then select the cutout insertion point.
In the dialog box you enter the dimensions of the cutout and its relation to the insertion point.
On the screen, the selected shape of the cutout is shown in red color. After quitting the dialog box, the
displayed cutout will be cut from the shape.
Example - Notch:
The outer edge of the top flange The corner has been cut from Repeat use creates
is the cutout insertion point the flange. more complex millings.
The expected cutout is defined by
edges.
The dialog box POSITION tab also offers you the option to rotate the inserted notch or cutout by any of
the three coordinate axes.
Just click the +90/-90 button if you want to rotate the cutout in 90 steps. If you require a different angle
just enter the value into the Rotation Angle field and then click the +PHI/-PHI button.
6.1.8. Plate Processing Function
Especially for the processing of poly-plates (plates), various functions are offered for swift and easy
modifications. Please note that these functions exclusively apply to poly-plates and not to automatically
created connecting plates, head plates, flat bars, etc.
Insert Corner: PS_MODIFY_PAE
Use this function to add a new corner to a poly-plate. Position and shape of that
corner can be moved, and the shape of the plate can be modified as well.
For this purpose, click the plate edge at the point where the new corner is to be
inserted.
Since the "corner" is in alignment with the previous edge, you will see
nothing at this point but will receive a new point for an AutoCAD grip.
Delete Corner: Use this function to remove a corner from a poly-plate. For this purpose, click
the plate edge to be removed. The edge will be calculated anew from the
previous to the next corner point.
Round Off Edge: This function permits you to round off the edge of a poly-plate to create an arc
between the two corner points of the edge.
Click the edge to be round off. A dialog opens, where you can enter the
rounding radius. This radius must not decrease the minimum radius displayed
there. Dont confuse this command with the rounding off of two edges colliding
with each other. For this purpose, you have to use the Chamfer Corner
function.
Take Over Contour: By using this function, you can transfer the contour of a plate to another plate.
Click the plate first, the contour of which you want to adopt. Then, select all
plates which have to take over this contour.
Chamfer Corner: PS_MODIFY_PCH
Using this function, you can chamfer the corners of a poly-plate

in any manner .
For this purpose, click the desired plate. Then the following dialog box open:
Dialog Box:
Attach Chamfer
Here you select whether you want to attach a straight Chamfer, or a convex or
concave curvature.
If you have selected 'Chamfer' you can indicate the two chamfer distances in
st nd
the 1 Edge and 2 Edge input fields.
If you have selected 'Convex' (rounding towards outside) or 'Concave' (rounding
towards inside), you can now enter the rounding radius in the Radius input field.
With a convex rounding the radius and edges merge tangentially; a concave
rounding is executed with the specified radius and the previous corner point.
6.2. Plate Editor Command
Command name: PS_PLATE_EDITOR

A special plate editor is available for processing of plates. This editor allows for modifying the contour by
adding or separating poly-lines in a fast and comfortable way. You may see the poly-line as a plate of the
same thickness and position like the plate to be processed.
When loading the function, click the plate to be modified first. Then a dialog appears, where you can enter
further indications.
Dialog Box Plate Editor:
Settings:
Boolean Operation: Here, you specify how the plate contour has to be modified by the poly-line.
Add: The part where both contours differ from each other is added to the plate.
Subtract: The part where both contours differ from each other is subtracted from
the plate.Common: Only the common part of both contours is kept.
Distance: Enter the value by which the poly-line has to be extended or decreased in all
directions regularly to obtain some space e.g.for inaccuracies of production.
By entering positive values, the poly-line is extended. The poly-line is
decreased by entering negative values.
PICK: This button permits you to determine the poly-line by clicking its corner points.
All usual AutoCAD-functions for the drawing of poly-lines are available.
TAKE OVER: This button permits you to determine the poly-line by selecting an existing poly-
line. Thus it is also possible to create radii within the contour.
6.3. Drilling Command
Command name: PS_DRILL

Shapes and plates can be provided with different drill holes. Existing drill holes of a shape can be
transferred to another shape, and oblong holes can be created as well.
The program manages drill holes in the form of Drill Hole Fields. This means that groups consisting, for
instance, of 2 x 2 holes will be drilled in one operation. In the dialog box you enter the individual hole
pitches and then insert the complete hole group.
The drilling depth is always along the z-axis of the active UCS plane. A description of the drill hole field is
given in the x/y plane of the active UCS. Although it would be possible to drill holes in the general
overview (global view), it is easier to work in one of the views.
Dialog Box: Insert Drill Holes

Settings:
Hole Field Description: Shape/X Dir:Description of drill hole field in shape direction, for plates in x
direction of
(box on the top) the UCS. Details on how to describe a drill hole field are given on the next
page.
Cross/Y Dir: Description of drill hole field perpendicular to the shape direction, for plates
(box on the top) in y direction of the UCS..
Details on how to describe a drill hole field are given on the next page.
Single Hole: When this box is activated, the drill hole description is ignored, and you can drill
individual holes into the shape..
When the box Middle has been clicked, all points on the shape center line are
put perpendicular to the shape center.
Description of Drill Hole Fields :
Drill hole fields are described by indicating Number*Pitch of the holes and
possibly Intermediate pitch (separated by a decimal point). In case a number is
= 1, you can leave out the pitch.
General form of drill hole description:

Number1*Pitch1, Intermediate Pitch1, Number2*Pitch2, Intermediate Pitch2,...
The drill hole field is always entered in shape direction (from the starting point to
the end point of insertion). In the shape field right-hand in the dialog the
resulting hole field is displayed
This hole group is entered in the drill hole description as follows:

in the box Shape / X Dir:2*60,200,1*,200,3*40
in the box Cross / Y Dir:2*100
If you want to insert a hole group with single holes in longitudinal direction, just
leave the box for perpendicular (crosswise) direction empty.
If you want to insert a hole group in the perpendicular (crosswise) direction only,
enter 1* in longitudinal direction (for one hole).
Mixed groups consisting of one and two holes in perpendicular (crosswise) direction
cannot be covered by one single drill hole field!
Marking Gauge
You can enter the predefined marking gauges of the shape by typing the letter
W instead of a pitch, e.g., for instance 2*W. If no specific marking gauge has
been defined, the program will prompt you to enter one.
Single Hole: If this field is checked, the drill hole description is ignored and you can apply
individual drill holes to the shape.
If the Middle field is checked, all points are aligned with the shape center.
Diameter: Here, the hole diameter is entered.
Free Play: Addition to the hole diameter as entered, e.g., for galvanizing.
Bore Hole Depth: If you have selected 'Pocket Hole', you enter the depth of the drilled hole.
Slotted Hole: If this field is checked, the holes are drilled as slotted holes. In the neighboring
input field, you can specify the axis distance of the two holes which are drilled
as slotted holes. In case of a slotted hole, two holes with a pitch as entered in
the box Axis_dist. will be created, and the space in between will be cut out.
Countersunk Hole: If this field is checked, the holes are drilled as countersunk holes. In the
neighboring input fields, you can specify the countersunk depth and the opening
angle of the hole.
Example of a countersunk hole
The countersunk depth is 20

mm, the opening angle is 90.
Layout: Drill Through means that the material will be completely drilled through. (If a top
flange is drilled, the bottom flange will not be drilled through.)
Drill Part Through means that the drill hole has the depth as entered in the Bore
Hole Depth field.
Welding Crack means that small holes are spot-drilled for marking add-on
pieces. Dimensioning of these small holes can be carried out automatically.
Drill Flange 1 means that the flange which is "reached first by the drill" will be
drilled.
Drill Next Flange means that the second flange which is "reached by the drill"
will be drilled. This function allows a bottom flange from the top view to be
drilled on the shape.
Drill Both Flanges means that both flanges are drilled.
Position: Specify the placement of the drill hole field. The 6 switches: Left, Middle, etc.
specify which points of the hole field displays the selected insertion point in the
lengthwise direction of the shape (or x direction for plates) or shape crosswise
direction (or y direction for plates).
With the settings Left and Top, the field extends as shown when the marked
point is clicked as the hole insertion point.
The Rotation input filed is used to indicate a rotation of the hole field by the
insertion point. If the Shape Middle field is checked, a clicked insertion point is
aligned with the shape center and then further processed. This option
eliminates having to click the shape center.
If the Show Axis field is checked, the midline, gravity line, and tracing
dimensions are displayed after clicking the shape. The axes are removed again
after the drilling has concluded.
Hole Type: The selection list offers you several Hole Types to choose from, which
determines how the drill holes appear in the detailed shop drawings. You can
choose from Hole Representation, Field Drill, Field Bolt, or Shop Bolt.
Offset: You can define a relative offset by which the actual hole insertion point to be
moved away from the clicked point. This enables you to offset the starting point
of a hole group against the shape starting point, or to insert asymmetrically
positioned hole groups.
Without Offset means that the clicked point corresponds to the insertion point.
Rectangular means that the offset data in the Distance box are assumed as x/y
values.
Polar means that the offset data in the Distance box are assumed as
distance/pitch values.
X Dist/Distance: Depending on the selection in the Offset box, this is either the x value or the
pitch of the relative offset.
Y Dist/Angle: Depending on the selection in the Offset box, this is either the y value or the
angle of the relative offset.
SINGLE You can insert the complete hole field or several single holes into one shape.
First, click the shape or the plate. Then click or type the hole field insertion
point.
When having selected single holes, you can insert different single holes until
you press the ENTER key or the right mouse button.
All holes will be drilled now.
MULTIPLE You can insert holes in several shapes at the same time, e.g., when shapes are
placed upon each other, and a hole for a through rod shall be drilled.
First, click all desired shapes or plates and then drill the holes as described in
SINGLE.
Each of the selected shapes

being hit by an imaginary beam
that starts at the inserted drill
holes (in both directions, the
beam direction is the position of
the hole axis!) will be drilled at
the point of impact, the hole size
being identical. Thus, the holes
are exactly aligned
TAKE OVER Drill holes in shapes can be taken over according to the "beam principle"
described in MULTIPLE. In this case, the entries in the dialog box are ignored.
First, click all shapes with holes to be transferred and then all shapes to take
over the hole.
Using this function, drill holes from a connecting plate may be rapidly
transferred to a shape.
Query and Modify Drill Holes
Besides the existing settings, you find an additional tab for the drill holes. When being activated, the tab
changes to white. Here, you can change the hole properties by selecting the hole group concerned using
the <</>> keys or the PICK button (in the shape, the group is marked in red).
Dialog Box: Drill Hole Modification (Select via context menu "Change PS Properties")
Settings:
Num. Drill Groups: Total number of hole groups in the shape that can be modified (a single hole
corresponds to a hole group).
Diameter: Drill hole diameters of the selected hole group (incl. addition).
Shape Direction.: Field description of the hole group in shape direction.
Shape Cross Dir.: Field description of the hole group in shape cross direction.
Max. Length: Pocket hole depth.
Start Depth: Changing this value may move the hole group to another flange. The value 0
corresponds to the insertion plane. If the starting point lies within the material,
no drilling is done any more, and the next lower material surface is searched.
Insertion Point: Shift of the hole field insertion points 7-8-9

to the selected position (the insertion point 4-5-6
corresponds to the indicated small hole). 1-2-3
Num. Drill Holes: Number of single holes in the shape.
Axis Dist.: Space between two oblong holes.
Length Countersunk
Hole: The depth of the holes at countersunk holes.
Angle Countersunk
Hole: The opening angle of the holes at countersunk holes.
DELETE The complete hole group is deleted.
RELEASE The hole group is exploded into individual single holes.
<<,>>,PICK Using this button, the desired hole group is selected.

7. Connections, Haunches, Joints
7.1. Bolt Command
Command name: PS_BOLT

The simplest form of an automatic connection with AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is to bolt components
together. For this purpose, however, the components to be bolted together must have been drilled first
(see command 'Drilling').
After all components to be bolted together have been clicked on, the program
checks whether the position of the component parts is suitable for bolting.
Matching drill holes are checked to be within tolerance; the suitability for
assembly, however, is not checked. The program then calculates the
necessary bolt length and inserts the bolts according to your definition with
respect to type and washer (if any).
The bolt data is placed in a bolt list for future integration in the parts lists.
Dialog Box: Specifying Bolts

Settings:
Bolt Type: Here, you select the bolt type (e.g., DIN 7990) for the bolted connections. The
different bolt types are filed in databases, which allows you to add self-defined
types.
Material: Here, you select the material for the bolts to be included in the bolt list.
One Hole Bolting: If this field is marked, bolts are also defined for single holes. Normally, two
opposite drill holes with their tolerances defined in Geometry Setting are
necessary for bolting.
Addition Parts: Here, you can select different kinds of washers, etc., which are added to the list
of materials. These parts, however, are not displayed in the 3D model.
Bolt Settings: In the Hole Space field, you enter the desired hole clearance of the bolted
connection, in most cases 2 mm (1/16).
In the Length Addition field, you can enter a length addition to the grip of the
bolt, which will be taken into consideration when selecting the bolts.
In the box Prestress you can indicate a possible prestress torquing for HT bolts.
Geometry Setting: In the Gap Distance field you enter the distance up to which two drill holes can
be considered as matching and the component parts concerned can be bolted
together, in most cases 2 mm (1/16).
In the Angle Diff. field you enter the angle difference of two hole axes, up to
which two drill holes can be considered to be well aligned and the component
parts concerned can be bolted together, in most cases 1.
HINT: You should not adjust this value to 0, since in some cases this
would prevent bolt fastening due to an inexact calculation, although in
practical application a connection would be possible.
INSERT Click this button to create the connections. For this purpose, you must select all
components to be connected according to the defined mode (maximum of 50
parts in one operation).
Then, the program defines the possible bolt settings and inserts the bolts into
the model.
TURN Click this button to rotate inserted bolts for mounting reasons. For this purpose,
select all bolts that are to be turned.
7.2. Plate Connection Command
Command name: PS_ENDPLATE

AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D automatically creates plate connections
such as stiff or rigid plates according to DAST (local standard), jointed
plates, etc. but also completely freely definable connections.
The program determines the type of possible connections based on the

shapes to be connected and offers these to the user as well. In addition
to the actual connection plate other components such as stiffeners,
backer plates, bolts, and even reinforcement haunches can be created
with this command and assigned to the proper component groups
directly ( see command 'Construction Groups').
An entire plate connection can thus be created with just one single command.
HINT: For users of previous versions: All possible plate connections are now contained in this
shared dialog and, e.g., you can specify a stiff connection first and subsequently process this
connection the same way you would a free plate.
Creating Plate Connections
When selecting the plate connection command you are first prompted for the shape to be connected,
which you have to click at the end to be connected. Then you have to click the supporting shape (the
shape to which you want to connect). No supporting shape is considered when pressing RETURN or the
right mouse button and you can create a simple head plate at the shape to be connected.
No further action on your part is required because the program does the rest for you. The shape to be
connected is cut to the proper length and is fitted with the connection plate. The plate and supporting
shape are drilled and bolted together and depending on your selection the additional components for
the stiffeners are attached.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL will create a plate connection with the default values of the last connection
created with this function, followed by the display of the dialog for the connection settings. To instead
create a standard connection, just switch to the standard plate dialog tab (see 'Standard plates') and
select the desired standard plate. On screen, the connection changes immediately to display the current
settings. Switch back to the dimension tab to see and dynamically adjust the current dimensions.
Important Note: Use the logical links to change the entire connection any time. Do remember,
however, that changes not carried out using this dialog (e.g., changing plates using their
properties, moving stiffeners, etc.) are lost when updating via a link. Always try to carry out any
changes or modifications with this dialog if at all possible.
Example Bolted Frame

Connection with
Reinforcement
7.2.1. Free Plate Connection Command
This dialog opens when selecting the command after the shapes
to be connected have been clicked on. You can enter the
dimensions of any freely defined plate connection. Following
specification of the plate dimensions, drill holes, and selection of
the shapes to be connected, the connection including bolts is
prepared automatically by the program.
HINT: Make use of the dialog templates (see function

'Templates') and store frequently used connections, in case
you need to recall them. However, if you are working with
many connections at once we recommend the use of a
database containing user-defined types (see 'User-
Defined Plate Connection').
This dialog tab is also the basic dialog of the other plate dialogs. Any selection from such objects as the
standard plates (see 'Standard plates') can still be changed here because any of the parameters on
which the connection is based is entered and imported in this dialog from where they can be modified
further at any time.
Dialog Box: Plate Connections Tab: Dimensions

Settings:
Plate Dimensions: Specify the basic dimensions of the connecting plate.

Width means the width of the plate (in case of I shapes: parallel to the shape
flange).
Thickness means the thickness of the plate.
Length means a fixed length of the plate independent of the shape height.
Entering the value 0 for the length, you can enter the plate length in variably in
the Offset Top/Offset Bottom fields as distance from the upper and lower edge
of the selected shape.
Gap specifies that an indicated space is left between the supporting shape and
the plate. This allows you to consider finishing tolerances.
Offset Top means the distance from the upper shape edge. Positive values
reduce the plate dimensions towards the middle. Negative values increase
the plate dimensions beyond the shape.
Offset Bottom means the distance from the lower shape edge. Positive values
reduce the plate dimensions towards the middle. Negative values increase
the plate dimensions beyond the shape.
Bolting and Welding: You can select the type of bolts (e.g., DIN 7990) to be used for the connection
using the Bolts list.
You can enter the bolt diameter for the connection in the Dm field and the
required hole diameter of the bolted connection, in most cases 2 mm (1/16) in
the Play field.
You can enter the welding seam thickness on the flange side (Af) and on the
web side (As) of the shape. Welding marks can be subsequently assigned to
the welding seams.
Connection Type: You can choose from several connection types (see 'Connection Types').
Automatic: The program makes the distinction between a spliced / butt or
normal plate connection. An angle of approx. 45 is assumed to be the critical
angle.
Splice: The connection is always a splice connection.
Normal: The connection is always a normal plate connection.
Flange: The connection has a plate welded to its flanges.
Form Group: If this field is checked, the plate and the shape to be connected are arranged to
from a group in this field. The plate is allocated to another group, if the shape is
already part of that group. The same applies to the supporting shape and the
associated stiffeners.
The bolts for the shape to be connected are also assigned to the group in With
Bolts field.
Top Edge: You can determine the position of the side defined as 'upper edge' for
asymmetrical plates. (Upper edge and lower edge as viewed from the shape to
be connected).
Drill Pattern Here, you determine the number of drill holes in the plate. The connecting plate
is entered without drill holes if the Without Drill Holes field is selected. If the field
asymmetrical is checked, you can determine the distances of the holes as you
like. Otherwise, a symmetrical distribution is determined according to the
defaults.
You determine the number of drill holes in vertical direction in the list No.
Vertical. You can select between 1 and 10 drill holes.
You determine the number of drill holes in horizontal direction (width) in the list
No. Horizontal. You can select 1, 2, or 4 drill holes. Thus, 1 to 40 hole patterns
can be created.
Example - Plate
Number vert. = 2
Number horiz. = 4
(Vertical Hole Pattern): The drill hole spacing in a vertical direction (height) is determined. Depending
on the entry, the values have different meanings. Examples are given at the
end of the command description.
You can enter the distance of the upper row of holes from the plates upper
edge in the Upside field. If this value is 0, and the value in the box Downside is
also 0, the only entry that will be used is in the Middle field.
You can enter the distance of the first and second row of holes from the upper
and lower plate edge in the Middle field. The holes will be distributed uniformly
between the two outer holes if this value is 0. The other rows of holes will be
arranged in the same manner if the number is greater than 4.
You can enter the distance of the lowest row of holes from the plates lower
edge in the box Downside. Only the entry in the Middle box will be used if the
value in the Downside and Upside field is 0. You can enter a simultaneous
shifting of all rows of holes with respect to the plate upper edge in the Offset
field. Shifting will be carried out with respect to the plate lower edge when
entering negative values. If you have selected the Asymmetrical option, the
structure of the hole pattern input changes and a list with an input field appears.
Depending on the number of holes, you can determine each distance
individually by clicking the position in the list and by specifying the distance in
the input field. Additionally, you can determine whether the distribution starts
from upper or lower plate edge, depending on the checked field upper edge or
lower edge.
(Horizontal Hole Pattern): The drill hole spacing in a horizontal direction (width) is defined here. Examples
are given at the end of the command description. The distance between the
outer left row of holes and the central left row of holes, if the number of rows is
4, is entered in the Left field. The distance between the two inner rows of holes
is entered in the Middle field. The rows of holes are generally arranged
centrally, unless they are offset by an entry in the Offset field.
The distance between the outer right row of holes and the central right row of
holes, if the number of rows is 4, is entered in the Right field. Simultaneous
shifting of all rows of holes with respect to the right plate edge is entered in the
Offset field. When entering negative values, shifting will be carried out with
respect to the left plate edge.
Options: Double Plates means that two connecting plates of the same size are created.
Backer plates specify that backer plates are added to the supporting shape.
With Stiffener means that ribs are added to the supporting shape. You can
select a stiffener variant from the Stiffener Templates list. Templates are stored
using the command 'Ribs'.
Plate Offset: Horizontal means that the complete plate connection is shifted parallel to the
flange of the connecting shape.
Vertical means that the complete plate connection is shifted parallel to the web
of the connecting shape.
Item: Here, you can assign an item number to the connecting plate which can be
analyzed and evaluated e.g. in the parts list.
SHAPE SIZE You can take over the shape dimensions as plate dimensions, so that the plate
is flush with the shape. To do this, click the shape whose dimensions you want
to take over.
CLONE You can transmit the data of an existing connection to the new connection by
clicking the existing plate connection.
Connection Types
The following picture depicts different connection types, which can be created with this function. If you
have selected the option 'Automatic' in the 'Connection Type' dialog the program will decide which type to
use based on the position of the shapes. The critical angle distinguishing between splice joint and normal
plate connection amounts to approx. 45.
If you would like the 'Flange' type, you have to set this type up explicitly; otherwise, the plate connection
will always be created at the cross-beam or web (in which case you might have to cut a notch).
Drill Hole Diagram Descriptions

Here are now a few examples to specify the hole pitches for freely definable connection plates. The result
can be changed at any time, and you can monitor the changes in the drawing in 'real time.'
Examples - Hole Spacing with Free Connections:
Plates No. 1-8 show different vertical spacing (Number horizontal = 1). Plates No. 9-10 show horizontal
spacing (Number vertical = 1). Plates No. 11-12 show a combination of both.
Except for plate No. 12, the offset is always set to the value 0.
Plate No.1 Number Vertical = 1, no other entries

Plate No.2 Number Vertical = 2, Upside = 50, Downside = 50
Plate No.3 Number Vertical = 2, Upside = 0, Downside = 0, Middle = 100
Plate No.9 Number Horizontal = 2, Middle = 100

Plate No.10 Number Horizontal = 4, Left = 50, Right = 50, Middle = 100
Plate No.11 Number Vertical = 2, Number Horizontal = 2, entries only for Middle
(horizontal and vertical)
Plate No.12 Same as plate No. 11, but shifting (horizontal and vertical) = 50
Direct Use of Plate Commands
Any of the type specifications can be called directly at any time. If you have selected the 'Splice'
connection type you can define a separation or cutting line by pressing RETURN or the right mouse button
when prompted for the Supporting Shape.
PS_ENDPLATE_NORM
PS_ENDPLATE_SPLICE
PS_ENDPLATE_FLANGE
7.2.2. Standard plate Command
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D automatically creates standard plate connections using standardized

connections used in the steel construction industry (DAST = local standard).
After you have selected the shapes as described under 'Plate Connection/Insert Plates' the possible
connections for this shape type are displayed in a list and can be further limited by entering the load to be
transferred. You can also view the base data in the list and determine if stiffeners or backer plates are
required to ensure sufficient stability levels.
After the plate has been inserted you can view your specifications in the drawing and make any desired
changes in "real time."
Dialog Box: Plate Connection Tab: Stiff Connection

Settings:
Plate List: This list displays the possible connections according to DAST.
According to DAST: Select the desired connection by clicking it. The individual list fields display the
data on which the connection is based (see 'Possible Connections'); you
might have to shift the column size to view all data.
After the selection, the connection is immediately updated with these data and
the values are entered into the DIMENSIONS dialog tab for further adjustments.
Tensile Force, Shear Specify a max. load for the connection (in kN) for the
Force, Moment: respective load type. Now the list will feature only those connections, which are
suitable for the specified loads.
Direction: Specify the position of the additional bolt

series for asymmetrical plates (Top or
Bottom, viewed from the shape to be
connected).
If the connection appears to be turned,
you can rotate it here.
Form Group: If the Group field is checked, the connection plate (and any possible haunches
or stiffeners) are assigned to a construction group together with the shape to be
connected. If the shape is already part of another component group, the
connection plate will be assigned to the same group.
The same applies to the supporting shape and the associated stiffeners.
If the With Bolts field is checked, the bolts of the shape to be connected are also
added to that group.
Stiffeners: Add additional stiffeners to the connection (e.g., select stiffeners listed in the
selection list) and specify other option settings.
If the Standard Stiffener field is checked, stiffeners are added to the support
shape. Just select a stiffener variation from the Template selection field, which
you previously saved using the command 'Stiffeners.'
Double Plates means that two large, identically sized connection plates are
created.
If the Backer Plate field is checked, additional backer plates are added to
reinforce the flange.
Without Bolts means that the assembly bolts are not created.
CLONE Click this button and the data of an existing connection are transferred to the
connection to be created now. You have to click the existing plate connection
to achieve the transfer.
Possible Connections
The selection list displays the possible stiff connections according to DAST for the selected shapes. You
can check the basic connection data and select the necessary shape reinforcements.
Meaning of the List fields:
Designation Standard designation of the connection.

Width Width of the plate (parallel to the flange of the shape to be connected).
Thickness Thickness of the plate.
Horizontal Number of drill holes in direction of the plate width
Vertical Number of drill holes in direction of the plate length
Length Length of the plate (parallel to the web of the shape to be connected).
Bolt Dia Bolt diameter used.
Bolt Utilized bolt type.
Stiffener Additional stiffeners are required.
Backer Pl. Additional backer plates are required.
TopOffset,DownOffset Plate projection including shape to be connected.
Af Thickness of welding joint at flange.
As Thickness of welding joint at web.
Tension,Shear,Transient Max. connection load.
No Connection Possible
If - according to the guidelines - no connection is defined for the selected shape, no dialog for the definition
of the connection is displayed after selection of the shapes. You will have to define the dimensions of the
connection using the command 'Free Plate Connection.'
7.2.3. Plate Connections Lateral Force
Here you can specify a plate connection according to DAST, which is subject to lateral forces. Since the
dialog and process is almost identical with the standard plates, please refer to that section for further
setting details (see 'Standard plates').
7.2.4. User-Defined Plate Connection
Just as the data for standard plates and those subject to lateral forces is recorded in databases, you can
also create a database containing user-defined plate connection and later load these stored types using a
selection list.
This serves the same purpose as storing and then loading free plates with the template function (see
function 'Templates'). However, user-defined plate connections can display a larger amount of data in a
more clearly organized structure because all parameters are visible in the view. You can also process or
export the data with any standard DBASE editor.
HINT: Take advantage of this option by creating a database with frequently utilized and maybe
company-specific connections, which are then always available to all program users within your
company.
Since the dialog and process is almost identical with the standard plates, please refer to that section for
further setting details (see 'Standard plates').
How to create the database is listed in the technical supplement ( 'Page 132') or just ask your
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D dealer.
7.2.5. Haunches and Plate Connections
Any of the previous connection types can be equipped with additional haunches and/or stiffeners, which
yields a much stronger connection. This permits the quick and easy creation of bolted frame corners and
similar items.
Dialog Box: Plate Connection Tab: Haunches

Settings:
Position: Specify the position of the haunch as well as any additional stiffeners.
If the Upper field is checked, the haunch is created on the top side of the shape
to be connected.
If the Lower field is checked, the haunch is created on the bottom side of the
shape to be connected.
If the With Stiffeners/Support Shape field is checked, stiffeners are added to the
support shape. These stiffeners are created in addition to those created
together with the connection.
If the With Stiffeners/Connection Shape field is checked, additional stiffeners
are added to the connection shape.
Shape Size: Specify the haunch plates (plates).

If the Couped Shape field is checked, the haunch is not created from individual
plates but from one cropped shape. The shape size corresponds with the
connection shape. All other shape size fields are then insignificant.
Flange Wide is the width if the haunch flange if the haunch is designed from
plates.
Flange Thickness is the thickness of the haunch flange if the haunch is
designed from plates.
Web Thick is the thickness of the haunch web plate if the haunch is designed
from plates.
Dimensions: Specify the exterior haunch dimensions. The values are explained by the
example.
Haunch Dimensions Plate
Connections:
The haunch was created with

the setting 'below' and 'stiffener
in support and connection
shape.'
7.3. Base Plate Command
Command name: PS_GROUNDPL

Create base plates according to the specifications of the standardized connections used in the steel
construction industry (DAST) using this command (with 2 holes). By indicating an additional distance, you
have also the possibility to create base plates with 4 holes.
After clicking a support and entering marginal specifications (e.g., load to be

transmitted, concrete quality, etc.), a list of suitable base plates is displayed.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D will automatically carry out the complete
processing and create the base plate from this list.
Since you have access to all plate dimensions, you can modify the defined values
any time. Inclined support connections are also possible. Please note: For the
data concerning the load to be transmitted, refer to the vertical supports!
Dialog Box: Determine Base Plates According to DAST

Settings (Plate Data):
DAST Selection
Templates: You can enter the marginal requirements needed to search for a possible base
plate. The selected supporting shape is displayed for checking in the Selected
Support Profile field.
In the Support Load field, enter the load to be transmitted (kN).
This load refers to a vertical axial load.
You can select the hole diameter for the anchor bolts in the Hole Dia. field.
The data, 23 mm - 70 mm, creates projecting plates with 2 symmetrical drill
holes. The entry Without (fit to Profile) creates a base plate without drill holes
that is flush with the shape.
You can enter the concrete quality of the base plate in the Concrete field.
Base Plates According You will find base plates for the clicked supporting shape under Selection Tem-
to DAST: plates. These are defined according to the standard DAST guidelines.
The values in the fields below are displayed and can be changed. When you
select a plate, the base plate is immediately attached; you can then directly
check the result and make modifications, if necessary (see also 'Links').
Please note: The plate width and the plate height refer to vertical supports. The
values are correspondingly increased to maintain the shape edges in the case
of inclined supports.
Plate Width: Width of the base plate (parallel to the support flange), related to a vertical
supporting shape.
Plate Height: Height of the base plate, related to a vertical supporting shape.
Plate Thickness: Thickness of the base plate.
Hole Spacing.: Center distance of the drill holes in direction of the flanges.
Distance high: If you enter a value bigger that 0, 4 holes will be created in the base plate. The
input determines the distance in direction of the web. If you enter 0, only 2 holes
will be created in direction of the flanges.
Hole Diameter: The diameter of the holes.
Lining: You can enter an additional space between the "Base Plate" (point of reference)
and lower edge base plate in this field. Once you have entered the supporting
shape from the "base plate", all length dimensions will be adjusted correctly.
See also 'Fasten Base Plates.'
Tie bolt: If 'With Anchor bolt' is selected, you can now enter text to be displayed in the
parts list in addition to the entry 'Anchor bolt.'
Enter Plate The base plate will be entered vertically to the longitudinal
in Profile Direction: axis of the support in this field.
If not, the base plate will be aligned parallel
to the x/y axis of the WCS, provided, it is a "real" support. See also 'Fasten
Base Plates.'
Shorten Connection
Profile.: The supporting shape is shortened by the plate thickness and the
grout space underneath in this field. Otherwise, the base plate is fastened to
the support.
The point of reference is determined by the shape axis in the case of inclined
supports.
With Tie bolt: If 'With Anchor bolt' is selected, the anchor bolts are displayed by symbols and
can be entered in the parts list. See also -> 'Anchor bolts.'
Form Group: The base plate and the support member are arranged to form a group in this
field. If the support member is already part of another group, the base plate is
assigned to that group.
CLONE Click this button to apply the data of an already existing base plate to a new
plate. This requires that you click the Existing Base Plate button.
Base Plate Fastening

You will be prompted to click the shape to be connected after selecting this command. It is considered to
be a "real" support, if the supporting shape is within a freely determinable tolerance angle, vertical to the
x/y plane of the WCS. In this case, the base plate is aligned parallel to this plane (if you have not selected
the option 'Insert Plate in Shape Direction').
The reference point for plate insertion is the lower end point of the shape centerline. This is independent
of the pick point of the shape selection.
Example - Base Plates (Inclined Support)
Variant 1 has been created by using the setting 'in shape direction' and without shortening the supporting shape.
Variant 2 has been created with the shortening option, with grout space underneath and by using the setting 'not in
shape direction.' The angle of inclination is within the tolerance range
You will be prompted to enter the plane of insertion if you allow for horizontal shapes (wall connections).
To do this, click two further points. The point of origin of this plane is always the end point of the shape
center line at the selected shape end.
Tolerances
You can enter modular values for the plate dimensions. This returns "meaningful" dimensions by bevel
cuts, especially in case of larger plates. Within certain limits, the program selects the dimension with the
least deviation from the exact dimension. If this value does not exist, a plate with the exact values will be
created, and a warning is displayed.
Settings (Tolerances):
Correct of Plate The dimension is rounded to the indicated modular length when the
Dimensions Plate Dimensions within Modular Tolerances field is selected.
The dimension to be shortened or lengthened on each side is entered in the
Max. Shortening and Max. Lengthening....fields (e.g., the value 1 if flush
plates are allowed to project by +/- 1 mm).
Support Recognition: You can insert plates for "no supports" if the Allow for Horizontal Shapes field is
selected. The program will prompt you to enter the insertion plane. In the Max.
Angle Deviation... field, you enter the angle of inclination (in degrees) between
the vertical and the x/y plane of the WCS up to which a shape can be
considered a support.
7.4. Web Angle Command
Command name: PS_WEB_ANGLE

This command creates steel web angles to shapes of the types IPE, HEA, HEB
and W. Two web angles will be fastened opposite of each other on the ends of the
shape to be connected when a supporting shape is not selected.
The shape to be connected is cut to length after the exact definition is entered.
The connection, including drilling and bolting, is carried out automatically by the
program.
You can also select web angle connections according to the standard DAST
guidelines.
Dialog Box: Specifying Web Angles

Settings:
Values: You can enter the spacing between the upper edge supporting shape and the
lower edge of the shape to be connected in the Gap Spacing field.
In the Position Offset field you can enter the distance by which the web angle to
be shifted from the axis of the shape to be connected upwards or to the right
(depending on the position). A negative entry will cause shifting in the opposite
direction. Selecting one of the following options permits you to make additional
specifications referring the dimension.
From Edge: The position offset is measured from the upper edge of the shape
up to the upper edge of the web angle. If the Lower Edge field has been
checked, the position offset refers to the lower edge of shape and web angle
instead of to the upper edge.
st
Up to 1 bolt: The position offset refers to the center of the first boring instead of
to the edges of the web angle.
Bolts: You can select the bolt type (e.g., DIN 7990) for the connection in this list.
You can enter the bolt diameter and the required hole tolerance (usually 2 mm)
for the connection in the Dm/Play field.
In the Offset field, you enter a shift of the bolt axes from the original position. In
st
the 1 Field, the entry refers to the shift of the axes from the center of the web
nd
angle, i.e. in longitudinal direction of the connecting shape. In the 2 Field, the
entry refers to the cross-wise shift, i.e. the web angle is shifted away from the
connecting shape (e.g. to fasten a grout space).
Weld Connect.: The connection is welded at the connecting shape. In the As
input field, you enter the welding seam thickness.
Weld Supp.: The connection is welded at the shape to be connected. In the As
input field, you enter the welding seam thickness.
Form Group and Notch: The web angle and the shape to be connected are arranged to form a group in
the Form Group field. If the shape is already part of another group, the plate is
allocated to that group.
The bolts will also be allocated to the connected shape if the With Bolts field is
selected.
Single: The main part and the web angle build an individual group each. Several
groups arise which, however, contain only one single part.
The shape is notched at the web angle if the Notch field is selected. You can
select a notching variant from those that you have stored using the command
'Notch'.
Both: A web angle is created at each side of the web.
Left or Right: A web angle is created only at the left or right side of the web.
Turn Angle: The long and short side of the web angle are exchanged so that the
long side is situated at the connecting shape.
H(kN), Hz(kN): You can select a web angle according to the standard guidelines. When the
required load is entered, a list with possible connection angles will be displayed.
Shape Class,
Shape Size: You can change the angular shape for the selected connection (the
hole dimensions remain unchanged). Only angles that are equal-sided and
unequal-sided can be selected.
Item: Here, you can assign an item number to the web angle which can be analyzed
and evaluated e.g. in the parts list.
The program enters the type name according to DAST guidelines first.
List of Standard Angles: This list contains the possible standard connections. The desired connection is
selected by clicking an entry. The basic data of the connection are displayed
(see 'Possible Connections.')
Division
Shape/Crosswise: You can determine the connecting angle according to your requirements.
No. Crosswise Long means, the number of drill holes in the long side of the
web angle (In the original position parallel to the shape to be connected.)
No. Crosswise Short means, the number of drill holes in the short side of the
web angle (In the original position crosswise to the shape to be connected).
No. Lengthwise means, the number of drill holes in both sides of the web angle
perpendicular to the shape to be connected (In the original position parallel to
the shape to be connected).
The meaning of W1, W2, W3,
E1 and E2 can be seen on the
illustration of a cut-up web angle
connection.
W1 and W2 refer to the outer

edge of the angle shape.
If you enter an Axis Distance in
addition to Number in the input
fields, the holes are drilled as
slots with the preset axis
distance.
Connecting Element: If the Flat Steel field has been checked, the web angle will be made from bent
plate steel instead of angle steel. Enter the required dimensions in the
Thickness, Length Long Side and Length Short Side input fields. The actual
length of the plate steel will be determined by the program.
CLONE You can transmit the data of an existing connection to the new connection by
clicking the existing web angle connection.
Create Web Plate Connection

First click the shape to be connected and then the supporting shape to connect the plate. Press the
ENTER key or the right mouse button, if there is no supporting shape. The web angle command retains
the last connection settings. Using this setting creates the connection. The dimensions may be adapted
and the results checked immediately in the model.
You can see the web angle connections that are possible for the selected shapes in the selection list. You
can check the basic data in this list.
Meaning of the Entries in the List:
Angle Shape Web angle shape

Bolt Dia. Bolt diameter used
Shape Direction Number of drill holes along the shape to be connected
At Right Angle Number of drill holes at right angle to the plate length
W1,W2,W3,E1,E2 See 'Crosswise/Lengthwise Division'
7.5. Shear Plate Connection
Command name: PS_SCHEARPLATE
This command creates a plate connection (shear plate connection) made

from plate steel and attached to a support shape. If you do not select a
support shape, only one or two web plates are attached to the end of the
shape to be connected.
After you have indicated the specifications the shape to be connected is
cut to fit and the connection is created by the program automatically
including all drill holes and bolt connections.
You also can select connections from an editable database. How to create the database is listed in the
technical supplement or just ask your AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D dealer.
HINT: Take advantage of the dialog templates (see function 'Templates') and save frequently
required connections as templates. These templates can then be easily loaded. However, if you
are working with a great many connections, we recommend using a database with user-defined
types.
Dialog Box: Create Shear Plates

Settings:
Values: Enter the distance to be adhered to from the outer edge of the support shape to
the outer edge of the shape to be connected using the Gap Spacing field.
The Vertical Offset field is used to enter the distance of the offset for the web
plate from the axis of the shape to be connected (towards top or to the right,
depending on position). Negative values effect an opposite offset. Selecting
one of the following options permits you to make additional specifications
referring the dimension.
From Edge: The position offset is measured from the upper edge of the shape
up to the upper edge of the web plate. If the Lower Edge field has been
checked, the position offset refers to the lower edge of shape and web plate
instead of to the upper edge.
st
Up to 1 bolt: The position offset refers to the center of the first boring instead of
to the edges of the web plate.
Bolts: Specify the bolt type for the connection (e.g., DIN 7990). You can enter the bolt
diameter and the required hole tolerance (usually 2 mm) for the connection in
the Dm/Play field.
Weld.: The connection is welded at the shape to be connected. In the As input
field, you enter the welding seam thickness.
Form Group: If this field is checked, the web plate is assigned to a construction group
together with the shape to be connected. If the shape is already part of another
component group, the web plate will be assigned to the same group.
With Bolts: If the With Bolts field is checked, the bolts of the shape to be connected are also
Notch: If this field is checked, the shape to be connected is notched at the web plate
position if needed. You can select a notch type in this list. Just select a notch
variation, which you previously saved using the command 'Notch.'
Cut Plate: If this field is checked, the plate is cut at beveled connecting shapes.
Example
Normal towards
Cut Plane: If this field is checked, the plate is not inserted in shape direction at beveled
connecting shapes but always perpendicular towards the connecting shape.
Example
H(kN), Hz(kN): Here you can limit the web plate selection from the database if you have
entered loads previously. Enter the desired loads in the input fields. Now the
selection list will feature only those connection webs, which are suitable for the
specified specifications.
Plate Thickness: Here you indicate the thickness of the web plate.
Item: Here, you can assign an item number to the web platle which can be analyzed
and evaluated e.g. in the parts list.
Left,Right,Both: Specify the web side of the shape to be connected (left or right), which is to be
used for attaching the web plate. If Both is checked, a plate is attached to both
sides of the web.
Upper Edge, Lower Edge: Specify for an asymmetrically attached plate whether it is fastened to the Upper
Edge or Lower Edge of the shape to be connected.
If the connection appears to be turned, you can rotate it here.
List of Connections: This list displays the possible connections as entered into the database. Select
the desired connection by clicking the corresponding entry.
View the basic connection data in the
individual list fields (see 'Possible Connections').
Crosswise Distribution Here you indicate your own dimensions of the plate.
/Lengthwise: No. Crosswise: The number of drill holes in the plate perpendicular (crosswise)
to the shape to be connected.
No. Lengthwise: The number of drill holes in the plate parallel to the shape to
be connected.
The meaning of the distances

W1, W2, W3, E1, and E2 are
illustrated by this picture of a
shear connection.
W1 and W2 refer to the outer

edge of the flat steel.
If you enter an Axis Distance in
addition to Number in the input
fields, the holes are drilled as
slots with the preset axis
distance.
connection to be created now. You have to click the existing shear plate
connection to achieve the transfer.
Creating the Plate Connection

For this, you have to click the shape to be connected and then the support shape. Click the connection
point or use the ENTER key or the right mouse button if you do not have a support shape).
If you select the command for the shear plates, the last settings are used to create the connection. Adjust
the dimensions in the now opening dialog and track any changes in the model.
The selection list displays the shear plate connections contained in the database. Use this list to check
and verify the basic connection data.
Designation Connection name.

Thickness Thickness of the web plate.
Material: Material descriptions of the web plate.
Dm The utilized bolt diameter.
Bolt Bolt type.
Shape Direction The number of drill holes along the shape to be connected.
Crosswise The number of drill holes in perpendicular (crosswise) direction of the shape
to be connected.
W1,W2,W3,E1,E2 See Distribution Crosswise / Distribution Lengthwise.
MaH,MaHz Max. loads for this connection.
7.6. Splice joints
Command name: PS_LASCHE

Use this command to create a web and/or flange plate joint between two shapes both of the shapes
have to be in alignment along the surfaces to be connected. If you do not
select a second shape, plates are attached to the end of the first shape to
be connected.
After you have indicated the specifications the shape to be connected is cut
to fit and the connection is created by the program automatically including
all drill holes and bolt connections.
You can also select connections from an editable database. How to create
the database is listed in the technical supplement or just ask your AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D dealer.
HINT: Take advantage of the dialog templates (see function 'Templates') and save frequently
required connections as templates. These template can then be easily loaded. However, if you are
working with a great many connections, we recommend using a database with user-defined types.
Dialog Box: Create Splice joints

Settings:
Gap Distance: Here you indicate the distance between the two shapes.
Bolts: Specify the bolt type for the connection (e.g., DIN 7990).
Dia: Specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Play: The Clearance field is used to specify the hole clearance of the desired drill
holes, which usually consists of 2 mm (1/16).
Form Group: If this field is checked, the web plate is assigned to a construction group
together with the shape to be connected. If the shape is already part of another
component group, the web plate will be assigned to the same group.
With Bolts: If the With Bolts field is checked, the bolts of the shape to be connected are also
Single Sided : If this field is checked, the splice joint is attached to the side of the second
shape to be connected in the form of a welded connection.
Diagonal: If this field is checked, opposite plates are welded if you have a connection
welded at one single side.
Plates are welded at both shapes to be connected, not only at the second
shape.
Upper: If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the upper side of the
shape.
Upper Inside: If this field is checked, an additional plate is attached to the inner upper side of
the shape.
Lower: If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the lower side of the
shape.
Lower Inside: If this field is checked, an additional plate is attached to the inner lower side of
the shape.
Left: If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the left side of the
shape.
Right: If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the right side of the
shape.
The individual list fields display the data on which the connection is based (see
'Possible Connections').
Pattern Top/Bottom: Here you indicate your own dimensions of the plates on the upper and lower
side.
No. Lengthwise: The number of drill holes in the plate parallel to the shape to
be connected (for each plate half).
No. Lengthwise: The number of drill holes in the plate perpendicular

(crosswise) to the shape to be connected (for each plate half).
The picture of a plate connections illustrates the meaning of the distances.
Pattern Left/Right: Here you indicate your own dimensions of the plates on the left and right side.
The significance of these fields matches the 'Pattern Top/Bottom' field; please
refer to these fields for further details.
Thickness Top/Bottom: Here you indicate the further specifications of the plates on the upper and lower
side.
The Plate Thickness input field is used to specify the thickness of the
connection plate.
The Vertical Offset field is used to enter the distance of the offset for the center
of the plate from the axis of the shape to be connected to the left or to the right.
Negative values effect an opposite offset.
If the Weld field is checked, the plate is designed as a weld joint. The values for
the distances are then insignificant since the holes are omitted. The thickness
of the weld joint can be entered in the As field.
Thickness Left/Right:: Here you indicate the further specifications of the plates on the left and right
side. The significance of these fields matches the 'Thickness Top/Bottom' field;
please refer to these fields for further details.
connection to be created now. You have to click the existing plate connection
to achieve the transfer.
Creating the Plate Connection

For this, you have to click the shape to be connected (first shape) and then the support shape (second
shape). Click the connection point or use the ENTER key or the right mouse button if you do not have a
second shape).
If you select the command for the splice plate, the last settings are used to create the connection. Adjust
the dimensions in the now opening dialog and track any changes in the model.
The selection list displays the plate connections contained in the database. Use this list to check and
verify the basic connection data.
Designation Connection name.

Dm The utilized bolt diameter.
Bolt Bolt type.
Shape Direction The number of drill holes along the shape to be connected.
Crosswise The number of drill holes in perpendicular (crosswise) direction of the shape
to be connected.
W1,W2,W3,E1,E2 See Distribution Top/Bottom.
Thickness Thickness of the web plate.
7.7. Haunch Command
Command name: PS_HAUNCH
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D automatically generates haunches using dimensions

or selecting boundary lines from shapes or construction lines.
For instance, after inserting a column and roof girder in the work frame and creating
a connection to roof girder, all construction lines that are necessary for a normal
haunch have been created.
This command enables the creation of tapered haunch connection, i.e. adaptation of
the upper and lower haunch flange to the support / connecting shape.
It is recommended to work in a plane of projection on the haunch.
Dialog Box: Specifying the Haunch
Settings:
Upper Flange
Bottom Train: Enter width and thickness of the haunch top chord.
Shape Bottom Chord: Enter width and thickness of the haunch bottom chord
Web Thick: Enter the thickness of the haunch web plate.
Layout: Here, you determine how to design the haunch.

As Per Lines means that you determine the haunch dimensions by clicking
The meaning of the dimensions Haunch Length, Roof Slope, Base Width, End
Width, and Projection are illustrated with the picture. If a tapered haunch is
requested, the taper width is normally the width of the connecting shape.
boundary lines in the plane of projection. To Measure means that the haunch is
Created according to the dimensions entered in the dialog field.
No top chord is created if the Bottom Chord field is selected - e.g., for the
design of frame edges.

The width of the haunch flange is adapted to the support / connecting shape
and correspondingly tapered in the Taper Layout field.
Plane: When this field is selected, all clicked points are related to the active UCS plane
of the projection. This option must be switched off if you want to work in the
projection plane.
Form Group: Top flange, bottom flange, and web plate, are arranged to form a group when
this field is selected.
Couped Shape: If this field is checked and the 'Girders' are defined as 'Haunches,' the haunch is
not made from individual plates but from a cropped shape.
The shape size corresponds with the connection shape, all other shape size
fields are then insignificant.
The input filed displayed can be used to specify the distance from the girders at
the end of the cropped shape (analog to the 'Haunch Head Width').
Stiffener Bottompoint: If this field is checked, a stiffener is attached to the base point of the haunch of
the support shape. You can select a stiffener type in the List displayed here.
Just select a stiffener variation, which you previously saved using the command
'Stiffeners.'
Stiffener Head Point: If this field is checked, a stiffener is attached to the head point of the haunch of
the shape if you also selected a haunch type for the girder. You can select a
stiffener type in the List displayed opposite. Just select a stiffener variation,
which you previously saved using the command 'Stiffeners.'
Bottom Train: If this field is checked, no upper flange is created, e.g., for the construction of
frame corners.
Construction designed as
haunchand as girder
Cone: If this field is checked, a tapered haunch is created by fitting the width of the
haunch flanges to the support and shape connections and tapering them. Use
the 'Cone Width' field to specify a cone width if you have a specific value in
mind. However, the 'Fixed Size' field may not be checked as well.
Designed as tapered haunch
Link Size: If this field is checked,

the head width and possibly the cone width are fitted to the shape to be
connected. Values in these fields are then ignored.
Turn: If the Above field is checked and the girder is defined as a haunch type, the
haunch is created on the top side of the shape.
If the connection appears to be turned, you can rotate it here.
connection to be created now. You have to click the existing haunch
connection to achieve the transfer.
Creating Haunch Connections

When using the haunch connection command, the first prompt is for the shape to be connected. Select
the shape near the end to be connected. If the ALT key is pressed while clicking the shape to be
connected, the haunch connection is created as a girder.
Then, select the supporting shape (the shape to connect to). No supporting shape is considered when
pressing RETURN or the right mouse button, and a simple haunch can be created at the shape to be
connected.
When using the haunch command, the last settings are used to create the connection. Adjust the
dimensions in the now opening dialog and track any changes in the model.
Unrestricted Haunch Positioning

Another option is to specify a user-defined position for the haunch. Just press the ESC key after the
command has been selected: The program prompts you now for the Intersecting Point of the Base
Boundary Line with the Upper Flange, which you have to
select by clicking it (consider using the virtual intersecting
point without z). Finally, click the approximate direction of
the haunch.
The haunch is now created at the specified position and
you can dynamically adjust any of the settings in the dialog.
Any shape adjustments have to be carried out manually, of
course.
Insertion of a haunch with
unrestricted positioning.
7.8. Bracing Command
Command name: PS_BRACING
This command supports you when bracings have to be created. You can add
bracing rods, drill and design the appertaining gusset plates, or have them
designed automatically.
The program always enters bracings in the active UCS plane, i.e., you should
place the UCS with its origin into the desired bracing plane and align it
parallel. Since the rods are aligned in accordance with the system lines, they
should have been created previously. In case of a cross-stay with uniformly
staggered rods, the middle of the system will be sufficient. The rods can be arranged alternately.
Dialog Box: Specifying Bracings

Settings:
UCS Location: The position of the gusset plate with respect to the plane of the bracing is
determined.
The first image shows the plate

front edge. The second image
shows the plate Center and the
third image shows the plate rear
edge.
Rod Position: You can determine the position of the rod

with respect to the bracing plane. You can check the selected position in the
Shape Window in the upper right corner of the dialog field.
Front means that the rod is flush with the front edge of the gusset plate (more
precise: in positive z direction of the UCS).
Back means that the rod is flush with the rear edge of the gusset plate (more
precise: in negative z direction of the UCS).
Both means that a rod is positioned on both sides of the gusset plate.
Centered means that the rod axis is in a centered position in the UCS plane.
Mirror: The shape can be inserted in a normal or mirrored way. You can check the
selected mode in the Shape Window in the upper right corner of the dialog box.
Rod: You can determine the position of the rod with respect to the insertion line
(system line).
You can insert the rod in the Middle, on the Gravity line, or on the Root line.
Hole: You can determine the position of the holes in the rod. You can insert the holes
in the Middle, on the Gravity line, or on the Root line.
Rotation: You can insert the rod in its normal position or rotated by +90 degrees or -90
degrees. You can check the selected mode in the Shape Window in the upper
right corner of the dialog field.
Shape Image: Schematic representation of the rod position with respect to the gusset plate.
SHAPE KEY Select the shape which will be displayed in the field Shape Window.
Number of Bolts: You can enter the number of bolts (drill holes) in shape direction of the
Shape Direction: rod on each shape end. The spacing will result from the selected bolt diameter.
Number of Bolts You can enter the number of bolts (drill holes) in cross direction of the
Transverse Direction: rod on each shape end.
Plate Thickness: Thickness of the gusset plates.
Cross Distance: The distance of the drill hole axes in the cross direction.
Bolt Type: You can select the bolt type (e.g., DIN 7990) for the bolted connections.
You can enter the bolt diameter for the connection in the field, Bolt Dia.
You can enter an addition to the bolt diameter in the field, Addition Hole Dia,
(e.g., for galvanization.)
Options: The shapes and gusset plates are not drilled if the Weld Bracing field is
selected. The dimensions of the gusset plates, however, are determined as if
drill holes were existing.
A group is formed for each rod if the Form Group field is selected.
The bolts of the bracing rod to be connected are also allocated to the group if
the With Bolts field is selected.
The edges of the gusset plate are not beveled but right-angled in the Plate
without Edge field.
BRACING You can create bracing rods and gusset plates in one operation (see
'Creating a Bracing). However, the command is not suitable for the connection
of several rods from different systems. This should be done using a single
function. You will return to the dialog field after creation.
ROD You can insert single rods that are automatically drilled. See Creating a
Bracing. You will return to the dialog field after creation.
DRILL Existing shapes are drilled on their ends, according to the definitions in the
dialog field. You must select the shapes for this purpose. You will return to the
dialog field afterwards.
PLATE AUTO A gusset plate will be created automatically.

Select Bracing Rods that have already been drilled and then click Boundary
Lines for the Plate Edges (see Creating a Bracing). The program will try to
find a suitable plate dimension by keeping the edge distances and the boundary
lines. It may be necessary to pick one point at the planned bracing end. Click
the approximate position of the gusset plate.
You will return to the dialog field afterwards.
PICK PLATE You can determine the shape of the gusset plate.
Select the drilled bracing rods that to be connected and pick a point on the
planned bracing end. Click the approximate position of the gusset plate. The
edge distances will be displayed.
You then define the shape of the plate by clicking the edge points of a polyline.
You can check the shape being created. The functions available for creating
the polyline are the same as those available for drawing a polyline using
AutoCAD. The dialog box will be restored after creating the plate.
UCS If you have not determined the UCS plane before using the command, you can
do this subsequently: the active UCS plane (and consequently the plane of the
bracing) will be determined by clicking 3 points.
You will return to the dialog field afterwards.
OPTIONS You can enter the edge distances of the different hole sizes. The following
dialog will be displayed:
Dialog Box: Specifying Edge Distances
The distances for the bolt diameters M12 - M30 have the following meaning:
Edge - 1 Hole Distance of the outermost hole axis in the

bracing rod to the rod front edge.
Hole - Hole Spacing of the hole axes in longitudinal direction.
Hole - Plate Distance of the outermost hole axis in the gusset
plate to the plate edge.
Rod - Limit Edges Distance of the outermost edge of the rod
to the clicked limit edge for the rod.
Shortening of Bracing
Rods Automatic shortening of the calculated rod length
Creating a Bracing
Let's start out from the fact that you want to design a simple roof bracing. The diagonals are to intersect
without the gusset plate in the middle.
Select the command for bracing and select the Plate Middle for the UCS
position.
Determine the position of the shape and the settings for bolts, plate thickness,
etc. Since the two rods are to intersect, select the Front Rod Position
beforehand.
Then click the BRACING button.
The program will prompt you to enter the system

line of the bracing rod. Clicke of the two system
lines, e.g., the one leading from down below on the left to the top on the
right.
You must determine the limit edges of the bracing rod (i.e., the edges
from which the outermost rod edge is to have the distance as defined in
Options).
Click the inner web line of the roof girder as shown on the right. Repeat
this on the other rod end. If you have clicked the wrong line, you can
cancel this by entering the letter z (zurck = back) When you have
selected both limit edges, confirm this by pressing the ENTER key or by
using the right mouse button. A dialog field will be displayed, which shows exactly the calculated rod
length. You can round the value in the Desired Rod Length field.
The rod is now displayed with drill holes. You must now
determine the gusset plates.
The program will prompt you to enter the boundary line
for the gusset plate. You can influence the shape by
selecting these lines. Some variants are shown on the
left side. You may need construction lines which have
either been created beforehand or which can be
"shown" using two points (see AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D Line Selection). You can confirm by pressing the ENTER key or by clicking the right
mouse button. The next gusset plate can be created afterwards.
The first bracing rod is complete. The second rod is created in the same manner
with the exception that you select the Rod Position Rear (to avoid intersecting
rods).
If you want to create a bracing with a gusset plate in the point of intersection, do
not stagger the rods. Open, shorten, and drill the rods manually at the point of
intersection. Create a single gusset plate with the function for the bracing
(PLATE AUTO or PICKPLATE button).
7.9. Purlin Connection Command
Command name: PS_PURLIN_CONN
This command permits the connection of purlins with roof girders. Various kinds of
connection are possible. The connection can be made either as standard screwed
connection, or as connection with a purlin socket made out of a bent flat steel or by
means of a plate resp. a shape.
To select the suitable connections for the different shape sizes (e.g. the correct size
of the purlin socket), the assignments can be managed in a data base. When the
command is loaded, the preset connections will be displayed in a list where they
can be selected.
Please refer to the technical notes for more detailed information about how to lay
out this database or you can ask your AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D distributor.
Dialog Box: Determination of Purlin Connection (Bolted):

Settings:
Holes: No. Crosswise: The number of drill holes transversely towards the purlin shape
is specified in this input field. In the Distance Crosswise input field, you can
enter the axis distance at two or more holes.
No. Lengthwise: The number of drill holes parallel towards the purlin shape is
specified in this input field. In the Distance Lengthwise input field, you can enter
the axis distance at two or more holes.
Bolts: Specify the bolt type for the connection (e.g., DIN 7990) in the Bolt list. You can
enter the bolt diameter in the Dm field.
The required hole tolerance for the connection is specified in the Play field.
Options: The Offset field is used to enter the lengthwise offset for the screwing. Positive
values shift the holes in purlin shape direction, negative values effect an
opposite offset.
View the basic connection data in the individual list fields.
Example:
Purlin bolted at roof girder

Dialog Box: Determination of Purlin Connection (Plate):
Settings:
Holes: Here, you determine the dimensions of the plate as well as the holes of the
connection.
Length: The length of the plate in purlin shape direction.
Height: The height of the plate in transverse purlin shape direction.
Thickness: Here you enter the thickness of the connection plate.
This illustration of a purlin

connection shows the meaning
of the other distances.
If you enter the value 0 for w2,
only one hole will be created in
purlin shape direction.
enter the bolt diameter in the Dm field.
Options: If the Form Group field is checked, the plate will be assigned to a group together
with the girder. If the girder belongs already to another group, the plate will be
assigned to this other group, too.
If the With Bolts field is checked, the bolts, too, will be assigned to the girder of
the group.
If the Other Side field is checked, the plate will be fixed at the opposite side of
the purlin.
If the Weld Seam field is checked, the plate will be welded at the girder. In the
Af input field, you can enter the weld seam thickness.
The Offset field is used to enter the lengthwise offset for the screwing. Positive
opposite offset.
Example:
Purlin with connection plate at

roof girder
Dialog Box: Determination of Purlin Connection (Purlin Socket):
Settings:
Holes: Here, you determine the dimensions of the purlin socket as well as the holes of
the connection.
The following illustration shows the meaning of the distances.
Bolts: Specify the

bolt type for the connection (e.g., DIN
7990) in the Bolt list. You can enter the
bolt diameter for the connection
between girder and purlin socket in the
Dm field. You can enter the bolt
diameter for the connection between
purlin socket and purlin in the Dm Side
field.
Options: If the Form Group field is checked, the purlin socket will be assigned to a group
together with the girder. If the girder belongs already to another group, the
purlin socket will be assigned to this other group, too.
the group.
If the Other Side field is checked, the purlin socket will be fixed at the opposite
side of the purlin.
Special Shapes:
In the Backer Plate fields you can determine the dimensions of backer plates
between girder and purlin socket. If you enter the value 0, no backer plates are
created.
opposite offset.
Example:
Purlin with purlin socket at roof

girder
Dialog Box: Determination of Purlin Connection (Shape):
Settings:
Layout: Here, you determine the dimensions of the shape as well as the holes of the
connection.
Length means the shape length in purlin shape direction.
In the Number input field you enter the number of holes in purlin shape
direction. In w3 input field, you can indicate the axis distance at two or more
holes.
Base Holes: You enter the distance between the holes in the girder and the
outer edge of the purlin.
Side Holes: You enter the distance between the holes in the purlin and the
upper edge of the girder.
enter the bolt diameter for the connection between girder and shape the Dm
field. You can enter the bolt diameter for the connection between shape and
purlin in the Dm Side field.The required hole tolerance for the connection is
specified in the Play field.
Options: If the Form Group field is checked, the shape will be assigned to a group
together with the girder. If the girder belongs already to another group, the
shape will be assigned to this other group, too.
the group.
If the Other Side field is checked, the shape will be fixed at the opposite side of
the purlin.
you enter the value 0, no backer plates are created.
opposite offset.
Shape Type, Shape

Class, Shape Size: You can select the shape of the connection. Special shapes can be used as
well.
Example:
Purlin with shape at roof girder

8. Construction Groups, Positions, Bills of Materials
8.1. Groups Command
Command name: PS_GROUP

Various single components, bolts and special parts, can be combined to form groups, (i.e., a support with
welded end plates and stiffener).
Certain functions apply to the complete group, even if you only select part of the group (i.e., the function
'Copy'). The group structure is taken into account for the parts lists and when the work frame is
automatically transformed into 2D workshop drawings. Many of the settings can be done separately for
material groups and single components.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D material groups consist of a main part and the associated accessory parts.
You can choose any assignment, i.e., an assignment applying to defined functions (i.e., the command
'Stiffener'). Automatic assignment is possible also.
These material groups consist of those parts that are delivered to the site in a preassembled condition.
Such a combination is recommended but not mandatory. You can decide how to best combine the parts.
The main dialog box has a selection of functions. Select a function by clicking the desired button. Most of
the functions can be selected by their own button or by entering PS_GROUP and the parameter as
indicated. Certain material groups are selected automatically in order to allow for swift working. Press the
ESC key or the right mouse button to end the command
Dialog Box: Group Administration

Creation of Groups
Parts can be combined to form groups and detach such groups by using the functions described here.
It is also possible to store material groups and to take them over into other drawings. The structure will
remain unchanged. Please note: In this case you need special functions. The AutoCAD standard
commands for blocks cannot be used!
Create Group: BNEW
You can assign parts to material groups by using this function.

Click the main part of the material group and then select the parts to be
assigned.
The parts to be assigned can also be selected in a field. The main part that
may have been selected twice and other construction lines are ignored in this
case. Only steel or special parts can be selected for a group. The parts new
selection is ignored if it already belongs to a group.
Subsequent adding of parts is also possible, see 'Group Parts.'
Dissolve Groups: BDEL
A group can be detached by using this function.

To do so, click any part of the group.
Removal of single parts from the group is also possible, see
'Group Parts.'
Export Group: A group can be exported and stored in a file as can external block (like an
AutoCAD 'WBLOCK'). It can be inserted into another drawing by using Import
Groups. The group structure will remain unchanged. The procedure is the
same as the AutoCAD command "Wblock." When prompted, select objects by
clicking any part of the group.
Import Group: A stored group can be inserted into your drawing by using this function. The
existing group structure is maintained, when the field Explode Blocks after
Insertion has been clicked, or if you explode the imported block
using PS_EXPLODE (command 'Explode').
Do not use the AutoCAD command for this task!
Take Main Part Info: The data of the main part is accepted as group data for the parts lists.
Subsequent modification of this data is possible,
see 'Edit and Control.'
Explode Blocks The group is automatically exploded when being imported.

after Insertion: The structure of the group remains unchanged.
Selectable If you mark this Field, you can select the whole Group by selecting only one
Part of the Group.
Its necessary to have the AutoCAD Group Selection Mode active. You can
change this Mode by Ctrl+A.
If you want to move the whole Group with AutoCAD Command Move, its
enaught to select only one Part.
If this Field is unmarked, you need to select all Parts explicitly to manipulate
them.
All Groups generated by AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL3D during a connection
have this feature enabled.
Group Parts
Subsequent adding of parts to a group or removal from a group is possible.
Add to Group: BINSERT
Parts are added to a group by using of this function.

The complete group will be selected when you click any part of the group.
Further Accessory Parts can be added by clicking them.
Remove from Group: BREMOVE
Parts are removed from a group by using this function.

The complete group will be selected when you click any part of the group.
Click the parts to be removed.
Edit and Control

These functions allow for checking of the created group, for carrying out settings, and for modifying group
data for the parts lists.
Edit Group Data: BEDIT
This function shows the group data .

The following dialog is displayed after clicking the group:
You can enter the data of the selected group for the parts lists in the left fields.
The position in the field Posnum has been taken over from the main part,
provided the "Take Main Part Info" field was selected. Subsequent modification
of the position number is possible.
You can see the outer dimensions and the total weight of the group on the right.
This field can also be selected by using the AutoCAD command 'Change
Properties,' when you select a part that belongs to the group (additional tab
'Group').
Check if Equal: Groups of the same position are checked for equality in this function.
Select Main Parts of the group to be checked.
If the program finds groups with the same position number but with
different structure, indices are added to the position numbers.
This will differentiate them.
In case of automatic positioning equal shapes are given equal position

numbers. Groups may have equal positions, although they have different
accessory parts if these shapes are the main parts and 'Take Main Part Info'
was selected.
Check Groups: BCHECK
This function checks whether all the groups have a main part. When a group
without a main part is detected, this group is deleted.
Groups without a main part may occur when the main part was deleted and the
group has not been detached.
Count Groups: All groups in the drawing are counted and displayed in the Number of Groups in
Drawing field.
Change Mode: You decide whether a group is to be loaded completely when selecting a part of
it or whether the parts shall remain independent with this function. Click any
part of the group. The mode will change according to your selection, and the
current status will be displayed in the command line.
Delete Groups: You can delete all parts of a group with this function.
Click any part of the group to do this.
Display Groups: Use this function to show all hidden component groups. You can also use the
command 'Regenerate.'
Hide Groups: You can hide all parts of a group by using this function.
Click any part of the group to do this.
By using the command 'Regenerate,' you can recall the parts.
Mark Orphans: If this field is checked, all valid groups are hidden according to the specifications
when checking a group. Parts that belong to no group are marked in color. Use
the command 'Global Settings/Colors' to specify what colors to apply.
Colored markings are removed once you assign the parts to a group or when
you select the command 'Regenerate.'
Find Groups
Hiding other groups can be used to search for groups. Enter the position numbers of the groups to be
searched in the field Search Numbers and click the button SEARCH GROUPS.
Select the parts to be searched (in most cases, you will select all of the parts in a field) and confirm your
selection by pressing the ENTER key or the right mouse button. Only those groups whose position
numbers you have entered will remain visible.
By using the command 'Regenerate,' you can recall the other groups.
Several position numbers can be entered at the same time, provided they are separated by a decimal
point. Complete position areas must be separated by a hyphen. If you search the positions No. 5 and 7
or 17 through 28, you enter the value 5,7,17-28 in the Search Numbers field.
8.2. Positioning Command
Command name: PS_POS

Positioning of the existing parts is one of the last steps before final detailing of the 3D work frame for
workshop drawings.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D can do this automatically for you. It searches parts of the same type and
defines their number in the work frame. Of course, you can also assign position numbers manually. In the
first step before detailing, only the number of pieces (quantity) and their position numbers must be defined.
This data record is the basis for the parts lists, which can then be generated and printed (see command
'Parts lists').
Later, when preparing the 2D parts, the position flags with the user-defined layout are attached to single
parts and groups.
Dialog Box: Positioning Adjustments

Settings:
Position Numbers: Here, you set the initial values of the position numbers.
The Actual No. field displays the last position assigned. To start with, enter the
value 0 at numerical position numbers if you want to start counting at 1.
In the Next No. field you enter the number to be assigned to the first part to be
positioned.
In the Step Width field you enter automatic incrementing of the position
numbers (normally by one step).
Construction: Here, you enter the type of the position number.

Numerical means that the position numbers are composed of numbers only.
Alphanum means that the position numbers are composed of letters only. The
order then is A, B, ..., Z, AA, AB,.... etc.
Mixed means that the position numbers are composed of a numerical and an
alphanumerical part. The numerical part is following the alphanumerical part,
the order is A1, A2,..., A9, B1, B2, etc. The number of numerical positions can
be preset under -> Limits.
LIMITS: By clicking this button, you can preset the alphanumerical positioning in the
dialog that appears.
If the Without I,O field is checked, the letters I and O are not used because they
are similar to the numbers 0 and 1.
In the Number of Position Numbers input field, you preset the number of
positions for the numerical part at mixed position numbers.
Posnum: Here, you determine where to position the parts and where to enter them in the
parts lists information.
Posnum. means that the position number is entered into the field on the parts
lists reserved for position numbers. This is the typical setting.
Shipping Num. means that the position number is entered into the field
reserved for shipping numbers. This enables you to position groups having
separate shipping numbers.
3D-Elements means that you position all steel parts of your work frame. This is
the typical setting.
2D-Elements means that you use existing position flags for positioning. This
allows new positioning of detailed drawings.
Treat Parts as: Here, you determine the setting of the position flags. Since the position flags
can be set differently for the different elements (e.g., text size etc.) (see
'Position Flags'), you have rapid access to the stored settings.
Single Parts means that the position flag corresponds to the setting for single
parts.
Groups means that the position flag corresponds to the setting for groups.
Group Parts means that the position flag corresponds to the setting for main or
accessory parts of the group, depending on the part to be positioned.
Short Position means that the position flag corresponds to the setting for short
positions.
From above, it can be seen that it is possible to position single parts using
settings for groups.
EDIT By clicking this button, existing position numbers can be changed.

To do this, select all parts you want to process. The following dialog field will be
displayed:
All selected parts including their data are displayed in the list.
If you want to change a position number, click a part in the list and enter new
position number in field, New Pos. Then click the EDIT button.
The position number will be changed and in the New Pos .field, the next position
will be set automatically as a suggested value (in accordance with entered
increment step). This allows several position numbers to be changed swiftly.
SEARCH By clicking this button, positions entered in the field, Search Numbers will be
searched.
See 'Search Positions'.
COUNT By clicking this button, parts with identical position number are counted, and the
result is entered in the data for the parts lists (see also command 'Shapes /
Change Properties / Data').
You should use this function when the position numbers have been changed
subsequently and you want to extract the parts from context menu "Change PS
Properties." When generating a parts lists, this function is carried out
automatically.
POSFLAG Opens the dialog for adjusting the settings of position flags. See 'Position
Flags.'
OPTIONS Opens the dialog for further positioning adjustments.

See 'Other Settings.'
DISPLAY By clicking this button, the position flags are attached automatically in
accordance with the settings of the parts.
For this purpose, select the required parts.
Since the program displays the position flags in the current UCS plane, you
should use this function in a view field.
LAST By clicking this button, the program searches for the last number that has been
assigned.
For this purpose, select the parts where the number to be searched (normally
all). Upon confirmation of the selection, the highest number found will be
displayed in the Actual No. field.
DELETE By clicking this button, all position numbers assigned are deleted. For this
purpose, select the parts with the position numbers to be deleted.
If all parts are to be assigned new position numbers, you can overwrite the
existing ones after having clicked All, without need of deleting them.
All, Only Void, Here, you determine which parts to be positioned.

Only Changed: When clicking the All button, all selected parts will be positioned.
When clicking the Only Void button, only those selected parts will be positioned
that have not yet been assigned a position number (e.g., new parts).
When clicking the Only Changed button, only those selected parts will be
positioned that have been changed. Thus, after detailing changed parts can be
assigned new position numbers, if necessary
The parts are identified using "Modification Tags," which will be deleted when
the part concerned is detailed. This means that parts are assigned new position
numbers that have active change tags (query via command 'Shapes /
Change Properties / Data').
Search Numbers: Here, you enter the position numbers to be searched.

See 'Search Positions.'
Scale 1/x: Here, you enter the scale for the display of position texts etc. Scale should
correspond to the scale of detail.
If you have defined a default scale (see command 'Default Scale'), it will be
adopted automatically.
AUTOMATIC By clicking this button, position numbers for the different parts are assigned.
For this purpose, select the parts to be positioned. They will be checked for
equality and assigned numbers as per your definition. You have the possibility
of influencing the order of the shape selection, see 'Other Settings' (selected
using the OPTIONS button).
After completion of positioning, the following dialog field containing the position
number of each part and other information on the parts lists will be displayed:
ATTACH By clicking this button, position flags can be set individually, and the parts can
be positioned manually.
For this purpose, select the part.
If the parts are not yet assigned a position number, such a number is given in
the Next No. field and the value displayed in this field is incremented in the field
Step Width. Thus you can position manually by using your own sequence.
You can then place the position flag, which is already shown to you "sticking to
the crosshairs" for you to check.
FIX By clicking this button, the currently assigned positions are entered in a
separate data field InitialPos, from where they can be extracted using the
context menu "Change PS Properties" (see command 'Shapes / Change
Properties / Data').7
After making any changes, you can check the previous position of the part
concerned and prepare modified bills of materials, if necessary.
Find Positions
Hiding the other ones can be used to find various positions. For this purpose, enter the position numbers
of parts to be searched in the field Search Numbers and press the SEARCH button.
Then, select the parts to which the search is to be confined (in most cases, you will select all parts in a
display field) and confirm your selection by pressing the ENTER key or right mouse button. Only parts with
the position numbers, which you have indicated, will be visible.
Using the command 'Regenerate' you can recall the other parts.
Several position numbers can be entered at the same time, provided a comma separates them. Complete
position areas must be separated by a hyphen. If you search for instance the positions No. 5 and 7 or 17
through 28, you enter in the field Search Numbers: 5,7,17-28 .
Position Flags
Position flags can be configured differently for each type of parts, i.e., you can select a style at your
discretion.
When clicking the Style button, the following dialog will be displayed:
Dialog Box: Specifying Position Flags
Settings:
Settings for: You can define the type of parts to which displayed settings are to apply. If you
click another part, settings on the right side will change accordingly.
Length for Groups: In case you have selected 'Groups,' you can decide on whether the length of the
main part or of complete group is be defined as length (if desired, see
DISPLAY).
Text Layout: In the Prefix input field, you can enter a text which is set in front of the position
number in the position flag.
Size: You can define the text size for general lettering (Textsize) and for position
numbers (Numsize). For printing, the AutoCAD text sizes are scaled according
to selected scale.
Text Type: Here, you define the type of shape designation in case of length indication.
If U100...160. has been clicked, the designation is as follows
IPE270... 7890.
If U100 160 has been clicked, the designation is as follows
IPE270 7890.
If U100x160 has been clicked, the designation is as follows
IPE270x7890.
Please note, however, that this representation only refers to shapes. The plate
designations are determined by the program via format templates. These format
templates are fixed in the global settings of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D (see
command -> Global Settings / Plates).
Lineform: Here, you define the kind of line to be used.
If None is clicked, no line will be displayed.
If Line is clicked, only one line will be displayed.
If Arrow is clicked, a line with an arrow will be displayed
If Point is clicked a line with a point will be displayed.
Bubbleform: Here, you define the kind of position number.

If None is clicked, only the number is displayed.
If Round is clicked, the number is displayed in an oval.
If Rectangular is clicked, the number is displayed in a field.
If Hexagonal is clicked, the number is displayed in a hexagon.
If On Line is clicked, the number is displayed on the construction line.
The different lines and bubbles shown hereafter can be combined with each
other:
Direction: Here, you determine the direction of the construction line with respect
to the position text. If Shape is clicked, the direction is in parallel to shape.
If Line is clicked, you will be prompted to enter a reference line by clicking.
Text will be aligned accordingly.
If Horizon. is clicked, the direction is horizontal.
If Vertic. is clicked, the direction is vertical.
Layout: Here, you determine which information to be displayed.

If In Part List is clicked, manual positioning of the position number is entered
into the parts lists (This button is usually activated).
If Total Number is clicked, the number of parts is displayed, e.g., 17 x IPE 270.
If Element Name is clicked, the designation is displayed (e.g., the shape
designation).
If Comment is clicked, the comments of the parts lists are displayed.
If Length/Scale is clicked, the length in the selected text type is displayed.
If Posnumber is clicked, the position number is displayed.
If Material is clicked, the material designation is displayed.
If Item No. Is clicked, any existing item number is displayed.
If Orig. Posnumber is clicked, the fixed (former) position number is displayed.
Example - Positioning
In case of the lower position flag,

all options have been selected.
HINT: If you click a position flag by using the context menu Change PS Properties, you can
change the properties of this position flag. The setting options being identical with the parameters
described herein, no further explanation is given.
Other Settings
When you start automatic positioning, the position numbers are assigned according to criteria to be
selected by you. For instance, you can determine the order of number assignment, tolerances for
considering two parts as "equal," etc.
When clicking the OPTIONS button, the following dialog will open:
Dialog Box: Specifying Automatic Positioning Adjustment

Settings:
Select: These parts are considered in case of automatic positioning.

Select the parts (shapes, special shapes, plates, bolts and other special parts)
that are to be numbered in one operation.
For the entry Other, see also command 'Special Shapes / Any Parts lists.'
First Criterion: Here, you determine the order of positioning.

If Sorted is clicked, the selected parts are sorted according to part type (shapes,
plates etc.), following the indicated order. Enter 1 for the part type that is to be
positioned first, 2 for the next part type, etc. The dialog field shows an example:
first all shapes are sorted, then special shapes, and then other special parts are
sorted.
If there are several parts of one type, they are sorted according to the settings
applying to criterion No. 2.
Second Criterion: Here, you determine a secondary order.

If Sorted is clicked, sorting is made within each part type having been sorted
according to criterion No. 1, following the defined order.
If you deal with more than one shape, they are first sorted (in the example)
according to length. In case of equal length, they are sorted according to
weight, etc. Afterwards, the same procedure is applied to special shapes, etc.
Sorting according to criterion No. 2 is only possible with criterion No. 1 being
active.
Comparison Options: Overwrite means that existing position numbers will be overwritten when
assigning new ones (this is the normal case, limitations such as 'Only Void' can
be defined in the main dialog).
If Check for Equal Parts is clicked, the parts are checked for equality. If they
are identical, they are assigned the same position number. Parts are
considered identical when deviations with respect to dimensions and drill
diameter are within the values given as reference tolerances.
If Check for Equal Groups is clicked, the groups are checked for equality.
Groups are considered identical when identical parts are arranged in the same
mounting position - single parts are only compared using their position number
(i.e., if parts are identical but have different position numbers, the groups will
also be assigned different position numbers).
Flat, Wideflat as Plates means that for positioning, flats (which are actually of
the 'shape' type) are considered as plates. Therefore, in a parts lists sorted
according to criterion No. 1, they are listed together with plates.
First Set Main Parts, then Acc. Parts means that first, all main parts of groups
are positioned (and sorted according to the sorting criteria within the groups),
followed by the accessory parts (also sorted according to the sorting criteria).
This can be deemed as an additional, even higher ranking sorting criterion. If
you click this button after having entered a position number in Start Acc. Parts,
positioning of the accessory parts will start at the defined position number. You
may for instance start with 1 for Main Parts and with 100 for Accessory Parts.
Treat Different When the group is assigned the position of the main part (normal case), it may
Groups as: happen that two different groups having the same main part are assigned
identical position numbers. In such cases, the program will check whether or
not the groups are really identical. If not, it will change the group position
number.
25 25.1 means that the changed group positions are identified by the index
.1, etc., following their position number (i.e., 100.1 , 100.2 , ...).
25 25A means that the changed group positions are identified by the index A,
etc., following their position number (i.e. 100A, 100B, ...).
25 MAX+1 means that positioning of the changed group positions is
continued after the highest position currently assigned.
Group Option: If Takeover Main Part Group is clicked, the position of the main part is taken
over as group position. If necessary, the group position is changed afterwards
(see Differentiation Groups).
If this is not requested, the group positions will start at the position entered in
Start Groups at.
Group Prefix: Here, an explanatory text can be entered before the group position. It is
possible to differentiate between support beams, girders and other groups, the
differentiation always being related to the main part of the group.
In Columns, you enter the designation for all vertical shapes. In the attribute
field Position Tolerance Degree, you enter an angle within which the shape is
still considered to be vertical.
In Girders, you enter the designation for all horizontal shapes. In the attribute
field Position Tolerance Degree, you enter an angle within which the shape is
still considered to be horizontal.
Vertical and horizontal are always related to the work frame, i.e., to the x/y
plane of the WCS.
In Other, you enter the designation for all other groups.
If Use Family Classes Prefix is checked, the family classes prefix is set in front if
the component part belongs to a family class and a prefix is planned. (see >
Family Classes command).
Comparison Tolerance: Here, you determine the tolerance for recognition of identical parts. Thus, you
can positively exclude that e.g., rounding errors in the case of bevel cuts lead to
different parts.
Min. Line Length means that additional lines up to the specified length are not
considered for a comparison.
Len Tol. means that length deviations do not result in a different part.
Hole Tol. means that deviations of the drill hole axis up to the specified length
do not result in a different part.
Direct Command Use

The functions for attaching the position flags can also be selected directly. In this case, the settings in the
dialog field will apply.
For details on the functions, see description of main dialog field.
ATTACH PS_POS_SNG
(Single Parts)
ATTACH PS_POS_BGR
(Group)
ATTACH PS_POS_BGT
(Group Parts)
ATTACH PS_POS_SHT
(Short Position)
ATTACH PS_POS_BLT
(Bolt Position)
ATTACH PS_POS_MNT
(Mounting Position)
8.3. Compare Parts Command
Command name: PS_POS_DIFF

Use this command to compare two parts regarding their different properties such as length, material,
surface, etc.
This command can be used to determine why the program distinguished between two positioned parts,
which appear to be identical.
After clicking the two parts to be compared, a text windows opens where you can view information about
the two compared parts.
Example:
Shape Comparison
Compare Element Types 0 <-> 0
Result = Equal
Compare Part Name HE 160 A <-> HE 160 A
Result = Equal
Compare Catalog HEA.DBF <-> HEA.DBF
Result = Equal
Compare Comment1 galvanized <->
Result = *** Unequal ***
Compare Comment2 <->
Result = Equal
Compare Item No. <->
Result = Equal
Compare Part Length 758.043 <-> 859.422
Compare Part Width 160.000 <-> 160.000
Result = Equal
Compare Part Height 152.000 <-> 152.000
Result = Equal
Compare Weight 23.044 <-> 26.126
Compare Materials 0 <-> 0
Result = Equal
Compare Group Status Result = Equal
Compare User EED Result = Equal
Compare Drill Holes Result = Equal
Compare Geometry Result = *** Unequal ***
8.4. Find Parts Command
Command name: PS_SEARCH

Use this command to search for parts and components within a model, which meet certain requirements.
You can define several conditions, which have to be meet at the same time. If these conditions are met,
the part is either marked or all parts not meeting the requirements are hidden.
Dialog Box: Search Parts

Settings:
Fields: This list displays the search terms available to you by clicking them. See also
'Define Search Condition'
Operator: Select the respective condition operator between Search Term and Comparison
Value.
Compare Value: Here you indicate the value that has to be filled or names you can also indicate
an asterisk (*) for any other characters such as HE* for HEA, HEAA, HEB, etc.
Mark: If this field is selected, all parts satisfying the search condition are marked in
color. Use the command 'Global Settings/Colors' to specify what colors to
apply.
Hide: If this field is selected, all parts not satisfying the search condition are hidden.
The hidden parts become visible again using the command 'Regenerate.'
Condition List: This list displays the current search conditions linked with AND.
ADD Click this button to add a search condition formed from the selected Search
Term, Operator, and Comparison Value to the condition list.
Delete By clicking this button, you can remove a search condition from the list. This
requires that you select the corresponding entry in the Condition List.
SEARCH PARTS Click this button to start the search. First, you have to select all objects to be
included in the search, then the result will be highlighted or hidden, depending
on your choice.
Define Search Condition

A search condition always consists of the search term (e.g., length), the condition operator (e.g., >= for
"greater than or equal"), and a comparison value (e.g., 2000).
For example, if you would like to find all IPE shapes with a length between 1000 and 3000 millimeters, you
need to define the following search condition.
NAME = IPE* (for IPE80, IPE100, etc.)

(and) LENGTH >= 1000 (Length greater than or equal 1000)
(and) LENGTH <= 3000 (Length smaller than or equal 3000)
Enter the following comparison values for the part types:
0 Standard Shapes
1 Special Shapes
2 Poly-Plates
3 Bolts
4 Special Parts
5 Construction Groups
6 Roof-Wall Shapes
7 Combo Shapes
8-11 Arc Shapes (8=Standard,9=Special,10=Roof,11=Combo)
20 Position Flag
21 Welding Symbols
25 Height Level Settings
26-29 Bent Shapes (26=Standard,27=Special,28=Roof,29=Combo)
Placeholders when searching for such descriptions as name, comment, etc.:
* Any other characters (blank spaces as well)

? Any characters in this specific position
# Any numerical character in this specific position (0-9)
@ Any alphabetical character in this specific position (aA-zZ)
, Parameter separator to indicate two options (HEA*,HEB)
This allows you to specify an OR operation separated by the comma.
8.5. Create Parts List Command
Command name: PS_PARTLIST

After having positioned a model or a detailed workshop drawing, a parts list can be created based on the
part data.
The creation of parts lists by AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is divided into two sections, i.e., the actual
creation of the list of materials on the basis of the parts, and the processing of the list of materials for a
printout. By separating these two functions, the data of the parts lists is also available to other programs.
For creating the parts lists, a file is written in the XBASE format as a *.dbf file. This database format is
compatible with many other applications. You can import, further process and read out the file (in this
case, using AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D would finish the work on the parts lists by using AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D). As a matter of fact, AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D also provides the most important
functions for processing and reading out of the data according to your requirements, see command
'Processing Parts List.'
In fact, you need no further programs but you have the possibility of using them. This is the reason for
separating the two functions.
When creating a parts list, you first select the parts to be processed, preferably parts of a group or, in
addition, independent single parts.
You can decide whether or not parts of your selection are to be included in the list, either collectively via
the filter function during creation of the parts lists or individually for each part. If the Select button has not
been clicked in the context menu "Change PS Properties," the part will not be included in the parts lists,
even though you have selected it.
Since further processing and printing of the parts list is carried out with an extra function, you can create all
required parts lists and store them under different names.
Dialog Box: Creating Parts List
Settings:
Options: If Pos Check is clicked, only those selected parts will be taken over into the
parts lists that have a valid position number.
If Only Group Parts is clicked, only those selected parts will be taken over into
the parts lists that are assigned to a group.
Bolts: If Without Posnum is clicked, bolts will be included in the parts lists, even if they
have no position number.
Washers extra, nuts extra, U-washer extra, I-washer extra means that the
additional parts for the bolts are separately specified in the list of materials.
Part Selection: Here, you select the parts for which a parts lists is to be created.
3D parts means that you select the parts from the work frame.
2D positions flags means that the parts lists will be deducted from the position
flags of a detailed workshop drawing. From modified 2D drawings you can
generate new bills of materials.
File: The file for the list of materials is stored in the file displayed in the Name field,
i.e., in the XBASE format.
By clicking the FILE button you can set the directory in the same manner as you
use to do under Windows.
WITH BOLTS: By clicking this button, you start part selection. The selected bolts will be
considered as well.
WITHOUT BOLTS: By clicking this button, you start part selection. Bolts will no be considered,
even though they have been selected.
MOUNTING LIST By clicking this button, you start part selection. Only the main parts of groups
including bolts will be considered.
Importing the Parts

If you select the command for the first time, a display field with drawing information will be displayed. You
should complete it already, since in this case the information on drawing numbers will be known for all
entries in the parts list (see 'Drawing Information').
After having set the filters and selected the function concerned, the program will check whether or not the
specified file for the parts lists already exists. If the file already exists, you are given a warning, and you
can decide whether to overwrite or to cancel the function.
Then you select the parts to be imported. You can select all parts, since only the defined type of parts will
be imported. You also have the possibility of manually excluding parts. For checking purposes, all parts
imported into the parts lists are hidden. Using the command 'Regenerate,' you can recall the other
parts.
HINT: If a part is not imported and should have been, use the context menu option Change PS
Properties to check if the Takeover button was not clicked.
Afterwards, you can further process the parts lists using the command 'Process Parts Lists' or repeat
the above for other parts lists.
8.6. Process Parts List Command
Command name: PS_CREATE_PARTLIST)

After you have created one or several parts lists using the command 'Create Parts Lists' you can further
process the bills by using this command. The files of the parts list can be loaded, modified, formatted, and
printed using this command.
When you select the command, the main dialog box for the processing of parts lists will be displayed
beforehand without any entry. Click the button FILE. In the selection, which will be displayed, click the
OPEN FILE button. Select the *.dbf file you want to process. Directory and name of the file of the parts
list should be known to you (from the command 'Create Parts Lists').
The dialog box will be filled as shown below with - possibly unsorted - data of the parts list. In the list, each
part is stored individually, combination of equal positions will be carried out at the time of printout.
You can open several files at the same time. The opened files will be displayed in the list Files on the left
side of the dialog field. By clicking a file name, this file will be your current work file. The parts contained
in the work file are displayed on the right side of the dialog field.
The list of parts gives a survey of the entries. By clicking an entry twice, another dialog box will be
displayed, which contains all data available with respect to the entry concerned. This data can be
processed in the dialog field. When closing the dialog field, they are imported (and immediately stored in
the file) into the data record by clicking the OK button.
Here, we would like to point out a special feature. The actual print output and list formatting is performed
by a utility program called "List & Label" (combit GmbH). This form generator makes it possible to freely
design the formatting and layout of any parts list, add company logos, and preview the parts lists. You do
not need any special knowledge about this utility since its normal operation is smoothly integrated into
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D's program environment. However, if you would like to customize the
enclosed parts list forms to your individual needs, please read the online help of the "List & Label"
designer, which will explain the customization of existing and creation of new forms in easy to understand
steps. Of course, you can also obtain a printed documentation from your dealer.
Hints for users of previous versions: We recommend reading this part of the documentation in its
entirety since the part list output has undergone some significant changes.
The following sections will describe how to generate and output a parts list first before discussing the
individual options of the parts list processing method.
Parts List Output

In the FILE menu click the menu option OPEN FILE and select the *.dbf files you want to process. The
directory and the file name should be known to you (have been previously defined with the command
'Create Parts List').
The dialog box now fills with the parts list data. Each part (even construction group descriptions) is listed
individually and unsorted; equal positions are not combined until the time of output.
In the SETTINGS menu click the menu option SET PARTS LIST HEADER and then enter the data for the
parts list header. If you have defined order data previously (command 'Drawing Information'), this data
can be imported into the parts list header.
Finally, click the OUTPUT menu and select the parts list variation (e.g., parts list of individual parts), which
you would like to print. Depending on the settings, the program now prompts you for the layout for the
parts list formatting and can then generate a print preview. All or specific pages are printed from within this
preview.
Preview
Here, you can see an overview about the most important functions required for printout and navigation
within the preview. As the actual printout is completely taken over by the additional application List &
Label, please refer to the online help of this program for more detailed information.
The function bar of the print

preview List and Label
Other Output Targets
You can, however, also directly print the parts list without preview or you can convert it into other formats
like e.g. the Rich-Text Format. To determine the output target, select in the output dialog of List & Label
under Output on... the desired target in the selection list and click on START afterwards to output the parts
list.
Output Dialog of List & Label

Parts List Processing Main Window

If you select this command, the main window for the parts list processing will open first without any
entries. This dialog has its own program menu offering you most of the utilized commands for this
command.
If you have selected one or several files for processing (menu 'File'), the window will show the following
information. The left column displays the currently open files. Clicking a file name makes this file your
current working file and all components of that file mostly unsorted are listed in the right list of the
dialog.
Dialog Box: Processing Parts Lists and Their Entries
The component parts list offers only a draft display of the entries. By double-clicking an entry, another
dialog opens listing all parts lists data for this entry. You can modify any data at this point, which are
saved in the corresponding file immediately once you exit the window with the OK button. This means
you are not working with just a working temporary buffer copy but with the actual file!
Function Selection Menu Option FILE

OPEN FILE By clicking this button, you can open a file of a parts lists. Only files that have
been opened can be processed. You can open several files at the same time.
The file names are displayed in the File list of the main dialog field. When
being clicked, the selected file becomes the current working file.
CLOSE FILE The file is closed and removed from the File list.
DELETE FILE You can delete a stored file.
EXPORT DATA You can store the current work file under another name, e.g., for copying.
IMPORT DATA By clicking this button, you can select a file which is then attached to the current
work file.
This function can be used for combining bills of materials. Please note that no
compatibility check is carried out (e.g., different shapes with the same position
number).
SORT FILE By clicking this button, you can sort the current work file according to two layers
of a parts lists in an ascending or descending order.
A further dialog box will be displayed, where you can select a primary and a
secondary layer. The data will first be sorted according to the contents of the
primary layer and then, in case of equal contents, according to the contents of
the secondary layer.
CANCEL The parts list processing is terminated.
Function Selection Menu Option DATA RECORDS

Settings:
ADD By clicking this button, you can manually add a new data record to the end of
the file. An empty dialog box will be displayed, where the data can be entered.
DELETE By clicking this button, the entry selected in the part list of the main dialog box
will be deleted.
The data of the parts lists will be displayed once again for checking and will only
be deleted when exiting the field using 'OK.
ADD FROM By clicking this option, you can add the data of a second parts list
FILE file to the current working file. You have to select an additional file.
Please note that the content of the current file is permanently changed
when using this option!
Function Selection Menu Option SETTINGS

Settings:
LIST DEFINITION Click this option to edit an existing print layout or create a new one.
The print layout specifies which parts list data to print in what format. You can
freely design your layout and also add text and logos. The following dialog box
opens where you can edit the template:
Now you will see a list with the existing form layouts in the form of templates as
well as a description and preview of the form. If you would like to edit a form
just double-click the file name and the utility program "List & Label" (see intro to
this chapter) opens. A detailed description of the functionality would extend
beyond the scope of this manual. Please see the online help of this utility
program for further details.
If you would like to create a new form, please enter a new file name, which will
return an empty form ready for editing.
SET By clicking this option, you can specify the header of your parts list
PARTS LIST HEADER or edit it. The program will give you first the opportunity to import data from the
drawing information (see command 'Drawing Information') into the parts list
header.
Then the following dialog box opens:
Now you can enter the data for your parts list header, which will be saved
automatically until they are modified.
Please note that only those data field can be output that are also specified in
the currently selected print form (see 'List Definition').
FILTER Click this entry to set the filter conditions if you want to output a file with filtered
data (see 'Output/Filtered Parts List with Individual Parts').
Only parts meeting the filter condition are output in the parts lists. For further
details please read the section concerning the command 'Find Parts.'
PRESELECTION
PARTS LIST NAMES By clicking this button, you can preset standard print templates for single part,
group and bolt lists.
A dialog opens where you enter the print template files to be used as standard
selection. You can also select these files by a File Selection Dialog. See also -
>List Definition.
Function Selection Menu Option OUTPUT

Settings:
GROUP LIST Click this entry to output a construction group list.

If you have imported parts using the 'Assembly List,' you should select this
output format. If you used the command 'Create Parts List' to import parts
that do not belong to a group, these parts are added to the list.
After selecting the command, you have the option to change the current
Windows system or default printer.
The data are now formatted according to the selected standard template (see -
>Preselection Parts List Names) and, if desired, presented in a preview before.
You can now print the list. See also 'Parts List Output.'
Please note that the selected form also fits a construction group list. Of course,
it is possible to print a group list with a list form for individual parts but his output
might not meet your expectations.
Also remember that only those parts can be printed, which have been
defined/imported previously (command 'Create Parts List').
INDIVIDUAL PART LIST Click this entry to output a list featuring individual parts. The remainder of the
process is the same. See 'Construction Group List'.
BOLT LIST Click this entry to output a bolt list. The remainder of the process is the same.
See 'Construction Group List'.
INDIVIDUAL PART LIST Click this entry to output a list featuring individual parts, which
WITH FILTER only those parts that match the current filter conditions. Use the command
'List Definition/Filter' to set these conditions. The remainder of the process is
the same. See 'Construction Group List'.
FREE LIST: By clicking on one of these three entries, the corresponding parts list will be
output. The proceeding is identical with the group list. The only difference is that
you have to select a format template here instead of using the set standard
template.
The following figure shows you an example of a group list displayed as preview in List & Label.
9. Detailing, Processing, Modifying
9.1. Drawing Information Command
Command name: PS_DWG_INFO

When using this command, you can add drawing information to your drawing. This information will be
directly taken over into the parts list. By this way it is also possible to fill in the title block of 2D-drawing
when having entered a drawing border by means of drawing border command.
HINT: Always enter the order/drawing number and the modification index, if present, since this
information is evaluated during the 2D detailing process. You can later query the detail center to
find out, which drawing contains the parts and will receive the file path as well as the probably
more useful drawing number (see processing).
Dialog box: Drawing Information:

Settings:
All Text Fields: Here, you enter general information on the project and on the drawing. Since
these fields are self-explanatory, they are not explained in detail.
Block Name: Here, you select a block using the button SELECT for entering data in its block
attributes via the entry fields, provided you have assigned such entry fields to
the variables of the block attributes (see Assign).
When the drawing border for the 2-D work shop drawing has been entered as
block using the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D command Drawing borders,
you can select the block of the drawing borders. The entries may either be
taken over into the title block (export), or the entries can be taken from the title
block into the dialog (import).
EXPORT When clicking this button, the data of the entry fields are retrieved into the block
attributes of the selected block.
IMPORT When clicking this button, the block attributes of the selected block are retrieved
into the entry fields.
ASSIGN Here, you define the variables assigned to the block attributes of the different
entry fields. An identical Dialog Box will be displayed, where the variable
names of the block attributes are entered.
CURRENT DATE When you have selected the Prepared On, Checked On, or Released On fields
and click this button, the current date will be entered.
9.2. Global Scale Command
Command name: PS_SCALE

Like AutoCAD, AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D works in drawing units according to the scaleless
method, a natural scale of 1:1 being assumed (i.e. a drawing unit corresponds to one millimeter (or inch)
natural size).
Any detailing with respect to the 2-D shop plans, however, is prepared to a scale you entered beforehand.
In order to ensure uniform sizes of dimensions, texts and position marks that have been entered in the
original size (mm) and thus a uniform aspect of your drawings, you must inform the program on the basic
scale (plot scale) of the drawing. This is the global scale.
When the program needs a scale and no special scale is entered, the global scale will be adopted.
When using the command, the following prompt is displayed in the command line:
Previous AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D 3-D scale = 1.0000

Please enter the new default scale 1 : ?
The current scale is also displayed. You can select a new scaling factor. When you enter e.g., the value
10, the default scale 1:10 will apply.
Do not confuse the global scale with the length scaling. The global scale refers to the later printout of the
drawings and scales text sizes, symbol sizes, etc.
However, if you would like to use scale subsequently and if you have reduced the shapes according to
scale, you usually plot using a scale of 1:1 (global scale=1) and work with a length scaling. Enter both
values when dimensioning manually.
9.3. The New AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL Detailing
If you have worked with previous versions of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D (R 14 and less) you will
probably think of the new AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Detail Center as the most innovative and most
obvious new feature of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D for AutoCAD 2000. We therefore started this
chapter with a recommendation to the "old hands" among our users:
Hints for users of previous versions: Take your time reading the chapter about detailing and
processing and work through it at least once in its entirety even if a few items might look familiar
to you. A large part of the development work leading to this new update was spent on replacing
the old 2D detailing feature with a more flexible and much more powerful version.
This brought with it a change in some of the program dialogs as well as a few of the work
processes, which means that familiar items might not be where you expect them to be. However,
once you finished reading the following chapters and have used this new version a few times, you
will notice that AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D for AutoCAD 2000 has made huge strides towards
the goal of providing workshop plans that are as perfect as possible while delivering ease of use,
the highest possible level of flexibility, and shorter work times.
We did try to adhere to the well-known basic 2D detailing principles whenever and wherever it was
practical to make your transition to this new version as smooth as possible.
What is the Detail Center (1)

In AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D for AutoCAD 2000, users control the complete 2D drawing and plan
generation from within the detail center from a first overview of the components to the workshop drawing
with multiple changes and manipulations. Think of the detail center as a program within the program
because it offers vastly more possibilities and options than one can see at first glance.
When you open the center for the first time, you will see a clearly organized dialog box with just a few
setting options. You really do not need anything else at this point if you have customized the program
already because right now you "just" want to derive your workshop plans from the model. However, if you
feel the urge, you can push into the innermost depths of the drawing derivation at any time. You can set a
great variety of options, request information, monitor and check drawings.
The philosophy behind this development is that you should be able to obtain the same result in a variety of
different ways, that you can change many elements and options but that you do not have to!
The highest possible level of flexibility for you as the user during the final phase of the design that is the
detail center.
9.3.1. The 2D Detailing
Once you have created the model, finished editing of the model, have positioned all of the necessary
components, and may have issued a (preliminary) parts list, the Finishing or Detailing of the 3D
components can commence.
Detailing 3D Models
Now the program generates the usual 2D views of the components for the workshop plans using the
model, which means that the program will disassemble the model into its components, analyses the
geometry of all the individual parts, and ascertains any existing but invisible edges. Then depending on
the requirements or your selections - the shape is displayed in several views and dimensioned and the
position flag is attached.
All of this takes place in a split second and in the background. Once the program has finished with one
component, this component is deposited in a library in the form of a block clearly organized according to
the individual construction groups and design sections. After this procedure has concluded you can use
the program to help you with the layout of the parts on your drawing sheets. From here on, you can treat
the parts as if they were the usual drawings generated with a CAD program but AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D offers you a few extra functions, which facilitate your work.
Intervention Options
You do not have to worry that you are going to be at the mercy of the program and that from now on all
your drawings will reflect the wishes of the software designers. A vast number of parameters help you to
specify the appearance of your mapped design. These parameters can be saved as data records and re-
imported depending on the type of drawing (overview, life-size, 1:10 workshop details, etc.).
This saves you time by being able to detail several parts at once applying one of these styles that might
already be enough to satisfy the requirements of your assignment. However, you can also detail small
groups of components one after the other - or even a single part. You always have access to the
smallest detail.
Basic Detailing Principle
The program distinguishes between two basic detailing methods: Automatic and Manual detailing.
Automatic detailing takes place within the open model, and you tell the program to detail a certain part
using a certain style. You have previously defined or selected this suitable style. The rest is out of your
hands (for now). The result is a block with the views as interpreted by the program according to your
specifications.
Manual detailing requires that you determine the respective model section yourself. You are working
within a work frame and may use the auxiliary functions of the program to attach and assign dimension
chains, position flags, height indicators, etc. You can also use such standard AutoCAD elements as lines,
texts, etc. The program only displays the invisible edges correctly and saves the details as a block
nothing more. This does indeed offer you the greatest level of influence on the appearance of the details
but you have to carry out each step manually.
The following chapters discuss the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D detail center and all of the tasks
described shortly in the text.
9.3.2. Detailing with the Detail Center
Command name: PS_DETCENTER

What is the Detail Center (2)
In AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D for AutoCAD 2000, users control the complete 2D drawing and plan
generation from within the detail center from a first overview of the components to the workshop drawing
with multiple changes and manipulations. Think of the detail center as a program within the program
because it offers vastly more possibilities and options than one can see at first glance.
The detail center is accessible via an AutoCAD link or a dockable dialog, which you can change in size.
Double-clicking on the header line toggles between the freely moveable and the docked status of the
dialog.
Most of the work within the detail center is carried out using the context menus of the right mouse button or
using drag & drop, where you drag an entry onto another entry. You will also work with tree lists that
resemble Windows Explorer trees. Since these functions are similar to standard Windows functions, they
will NOT be described here.
General Dialog Info
Most of the dialogs that can be selected from within the detail center are non-modal dialogs. These
dialogs are not always closed once a function has been selected but can remain open.
This has the advantage of saving you a few mouse clicks and you can adapt these dialogs to the current
situation, which means you are always informed about the status of the work. You can change settings
and watch the changes immediately on the screen just as you can do with many of the AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D commands. All dialogs of the detail center are synchronized with one another as much
as possible.
Since this means that it does not take very long to accumulate a great many open dialogs on the screen,
the detail center will here support your work as well. Any non-required dialogs are hidden whenever
necessary. They are exchanged with others if the command association changes; dependent subordinate
dialogs are closed automatically if you close a parent dialog.
Detail Center Interface
The following page will give you an overview over the work area of the detail center. This chapter includes
an introduction and explains some of the basic detailing terms. The individual function areas are described
later in special chapters.
The detail center is divided into three main work levels. Usually, your building part or component will pass
through all three levels until it is visible on the workshop plan in the form of a detail. However, your work in
the different levels is limited to only a few mouse clicks, if all the basic settings of detailing are adapted to
your requirements.
If even these works seem to be too awkward and involved for you, because you do not need the flexibility
of the detail center, you can use the detail center express! (see ->'Detail Center Express!) . This part of
the program once again combines the remaining steps until a workshop plan is created. Detailing is
worked through according to a pre-determined pattern. Thus, "detailing by one single mouse click"
became a reality.
Level 1: Component Overview
Here you will obtain an overview of the parts of the model and their functional associations and
relationships. You can view construction groups, single parts or whole areas of the model all clearly
structured in a tree format. This is the place where you manage and change detail styles and link your
components with these styles as well as manage the modification mechanism. In addition, detail center
express! is started here.
Level 2: Display Views Overview
The second work level offers you an overview of the component or model views created by the program.
You can add or remove views, display a pre-view, and fine-tune the detail style.
In this overview you decide what exactly is to be processed as a detail block and start the actual detailing
process.
Level 3: Detail Block Overview (or Import)
The third and last level features the detailed parts, which are located on your hard drive in the form of
detail blocks. You receive an overview of the detail blocks of the current model (or other models) and
decide which parts to import or integrate into which drawing.Placing the parts on a drawing sheet finishes
the workshop plan, unless you would like to carry out a few adjustments manually.
Work Tools
Each of the three levels offers access to a window with work tools using the function button bar. These
tools are assigned to the corresponding area. In order to keep the display area of the construction parts
lists as large as possible, many of the infrequently used functions and settings have been delegated to
these subordinate dialogs.
The content of the windows is exchanged when you switch to a different level where you have opened a
window as well, which means you do not have to close the window. See also 'General Dialog Info.'
Information Window
There is also an information window, which will be displayed if you double-click on one of the components
list fields. This information window is assigned to all three work levels and shows the current status of the
entry. Depending on the list, this window displays the name and type of the part, data of detailing,
insertion location, current status, and much more.
If you change to a different work level and click on a different entry, you will see its status as well. See
also 'General Dialog Info.'
Context Menu
A supplement to every level is a level-specific Context Menu accessible through the right mouse button,
which lists only those functions that are significant to the respective list. You will probably use the context
menus quite often because they represent the fastest way to access a command.
Detail Styles
The detail styles are the cornerstone of the entire detailing process. They describe how a parts is to look
as a workshop detail or how the model is to appear as an overview. The content of the styles is described
in detail in the chapter 'Detailing Styles.' The management and modification of a style is described in
detail in the chapter 'Component Overview.'
Just a preliminary note: A component without detail style cannot be processed and is ignored by the
program when it comes to detailing!
Preview
The detailing of a selected part can be previewed from within the views overview or directly from within the
model. This will create a small AutoCAD drawing displaying the exact result of the detail style settings
applied to this part. The small drawing shows how the part will be detailed. This window and its drawing
can be zoomed or queried for information because it is an independent AutoCAD drawing.
Since you can now open this part's detail style, you can track the effects of different style settings in "real
time." We call this fine-tuning of the detail style. If you open the preview for another part you do not have
to close this window first. The content is updated automatically.
After viewing the detail, the window must be closed manually. While the preview is open, most of the
functions of the detail center are inaccessible.
Please remember:
The preview might be hidden behind some other drawing because so many windows can be open
simultaneously. Also consider the speed of your computer when viewing a great many details such as
construction groups or entire overviews. Do not become impatient if your computer seems to be busy
calculating for what seems like a long time. Even fast computers need a little computation time, but some
of the latest computers will surprise you with the speed of the update.
General Information Scale and Dimension Styles

There are two options for detailing a part when working with the detail center: Either the part keeps its
original size and the surrounding text (e.g., dimensions, labels, etc.) is scaled to fit the part or the part is
scaled and the text keeps its original size. This is to support both of the methods typical for AutoCAD.
Scales
The first method allows for a simple - and unscaled - processing of the drawing and does not generate the
scale until the time of plotting. Components can also be inserted (unlabeled!) into other plans easily and
comfortably. The disadvantage of this method is that this involves some thinking, to keep different scales
and the same text sizes within one drawing and still have to copy parts from other drawings.
This is where the second method is more practical: You always plot using the sale 1:1, always use the
same text size, and scale the drawings to fit the plotting scales just as you would do when drawing by
hand. This allows you easy management of different scales within one drawing.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D permits both methods when detailing, but you have to stick to one or the
other method within one drawing. Because the dimensioning styles are the problem.
Dimensioning Styles
You define certain AutoCAD dimensioning styles in the model, which you can use within the detail styles
for dimensioning. When detailing, the program creates a copy of the style, and from your settings
determines the required text and lengths scaling. This style is assigned a new name indicating the length
scaling, which is used in the detail block. Although the program does set the dimension text into the
dimension permanently (e.g., to evaluate contractions), you do want to receive an AutoCAD associate
dimensioning after the detailing has been concluded; thus the copy. This also keeps your original style
intact and you do not need to create separate styles for each individual scale.
If you want to work with the first method using a scale of 1:10 you will obtain a text scaling =10 and a
length scaling=1. The name could be, e.g., PS_STD_1. Process a detail using a scale of 1:20 the same
happens with a text scaling=20. The name, however, is once again PS_STD_1. No problems occurred up
to now. Now insert both details into a drawing and the first one will "win out" because the name is
identical. However, this is typical for AutoCAD and AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D has no intention of
changing that. If you use the second method you do not have this problem due to the now active length
scaling (the example would list PS_STD_10 and PS_STD_20), however, you will encounter the same
effect if you change the basic style in the model during the detailing process and want to insert both of the
details.
If you have problems with the dimensioning styles you can be assured that this is due to not being
consequent in this case.
HINT: This is the reason you should make sure that your prototype file (into which you want to
import the details) does not contain any dimensioning styles (if possible) and that the basic styles
with the same name are also identical in different models if you want to mix together the details of
different models. Do not change the size by only changing the scale (e.g., when manually
dimensioning, see command 'Dimensioning') but rather define a new style with a new name.
This is the way it should be when using AutoCAD "pure" because there is a good reason for it: If
you rescale the parts manually, you are simply exchanging the dimensioning style and all is well
again.
9.3.3. Intelligent 2D-Details
If you have inserted the results of the detailing into a drawing and want to further process this drawing
manually, you have to observe a few things described in the following section:
Intelligent Details
The result of the detailing process is a detail, as you would draw it with standard AutoCAD. You can see
centerlines, visible and hidden edges, holes, etc. and the part is still not a true "flat line graphic." Intelligent
details are still displayed as three-dimensional details when viewing the page containing individual parts or
construction groups at a slant. However, when you print the part it appears completely two-dimensional.
The advantage is that you can subsequently add cuts (see command 'Manual Cut') or dimensions while
taking any possible shape shortening into account (see 'Shape Shortening').
If you want to change the geometry subsequently, that is in the detailed part, you have to import the
changes with the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D functions if you still require the intelligent features.
However, if you want to dissolve the detail in its entirety, you have to "explode" the component like a block.
This gives you a group, which can be ungrouped to reach the lines.
Of course, the consequence is that all of the intelligence is lost. Thus, omit this if at all possible.
Overviews and manual details are an exception those are already non-intelligent line depictions.
Shape Shortening
During the detailing you can select whether you want to shorten any parts that are especially long.
Contracted sections are then attached to those sections of a component that do not show any
manipulations in a longer stretch and thus are actually of no interest. This gives you the opportunity to
display the sections that are important for the detailing in an optimal size (because you can select larger
scales) or show more components on a given page.
The picture below clearly illustrates the difference. Both shapes are detailed with the same scale and
scaled to the same length.
Difference Between Original Shape and Shortened Shape
The problem of shortening is the subsequent dimensioning with AutoCAD. However, if you work with the
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D dimensioning you can consider any shortening at a later time because
your work is object-related. See also 'Dimensioning.'
This requires, however, that the components are not dissolved down to the lines after detailing because
then this property is lost!
Pick Helpers
The intelligent components of groups have the disadvantage that the individual parts of a detailed
construction group are inaccessible if you want to manipulate them subsequently. It would also not help to
activate or deactivate the group using the AutoCAD group.
This is why AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D features the "Pick Helpers," which you might view as a grip
variation. If you do not have any part selected in the drawing and you access the context menu using the
right mouse button, you will see the option AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D SETTINGS and the entry Pick
Helpers.
Use this entry to toggle the pick helpers on and off. Small little triangles now appear on the components,
which you can now use to select and manipulate the parts of a group.
Direct Use: PS_PICKHELPER

9.3.4. Detailing Style
The detailing style offers you some decisive influence over the style of the detailing because it is here that
you determine what is to be dimensioned, how to dimension it, what texts to include, whether to attach
position flags, and so much more.
Over 200 parameters are available to specify the appearance of your drawing. You can save and load
these styles individually and even import or export them from third parties. Since it is possible to manage
entire parameter records you can create specific styles for specific detailing tasks (e.g., for overviews,
workshop plans, life-sized displays, etc.) and just select them later.
Your main task consists of defining the suitable styles once. The program offers the option to immediately
check each change using a preview feature (see 'Detail Center/Preview') - until details look exactly like
you want them to be.
This chapter will discuss the setting options first with an example of a detailed component at the end of the
chapter. The chapters describing the detailing process also describe how to work with styles.
Saving Styles
Normally, the detailing styles are saved together with the drawing. This means that you always have to
save your model if the modifications of detailing styles are to be kept permanently.
In addition, there is however the possibility to write a detailing style as text file on the hard drive and to re-
import it from there. This permits you to exchange, update or even transfer the detailing styles of different
models. Furthermore, you can create a collection of detailing styles, and in the model use only a selection
of those styles which are required for that moment.
General Info
If you double-click on a detail style, a dialog with several tabs opens up, in which the individual parameters
are organized according to different areas.
Some of the tabs have tabs themselves, which are used for special settings. These are usually
infrequently used settings and are thus "removed by a few extra mouse clicks." You do not have to take
care to close all these dialogs because the program closes them automatically when you select a different
tab. See also 'Detail Center/General Dialog Info.'
This picture shows the 'Dimensioning' detailing style tab with the 'Individual Part Dimensioning' subordinate
tab showing another subordinate tab, the 'Individual Part Dimensioning Style variants' tab.
Global Settings
This is the tab for global default settings ranking higher than the other tabs. If, for instance, dimensioning
is deactivated, no dimensioning will be carried out , independent of the setting in the dimensioning tab.
Please note: Any activated function will correspond to the setting in the tab concerned.
Dialog Box: Detailing Style, Tab: GLOBAL SETTINGS:
Settings:
Display: Use the Scale 1: input field to specify the scale to be applied to your details.
Depending on the settings under 'Do not Scale Construction Components' either
the component or the size of the text is being scaled. See also 'Detail
Center/General Info about Scale and Dimensioning Styles.'
Use the ground input field to enter the height level which corresponds to height
z=0 (world coordinates) of x-y-plane of your model. Thus it is possible to display
correct height measures in detailing of construction groups and overviews.
If the Dont Scale Parts Construction Components field is checked, all parts
retain their original size and the text is scaled for output.
If the Create only 2D geometries field is checked, the details are changed to
pure AutoCAD line graphics. Intelligent characteristics of the 2D-details (see
also -> ,Intelligent 2D details") then will not be available any more.
If the With Dimensions field is checked, dimensioning texts and lines are scaled
according to the settings entered in the DIMENSIONING tab. If in addition the
US- style field is checked, additional American depictions will be taken into
account at dimensioning.
If the With Pos Flags field is checked, position flags are attached according to
the settings entered in the Position Flags tab.
If the With Weld Flags field is checked, welding symbols are attached according
to the settings entered in the Welding Symbols tab.
If the With Markings field is checked, label texts are attached according to the
settings entered in the Markings tab.
Projection Method: If the Align Horizontally field is checked, the parts are aligned horizontally when
detailed.
If the Align Vertically field is checked, the parts are aligned vertically when
detailed.
If the Align As Is field is marked, all parts are aligned by AutoCAD during
detailing according to their WCS position, which means that a slanted support
remains slanted.
If the Acc. Din field is checked, the different view distribution is according to
DIN.
If the American field is checked, the different view distribution is according to
American standards.
If the Align to main part field is checked, the different views of individual parts
are displayed according to the views of the corresponding construction groups,
if existing. To give you an example: The left view of a stiffener is the view on the
plate (normally this would be the plan view), as the left view of the construction
group would display the stiffener in this way. If in addition Only First View field is
checked, only the first view of the construction part is displayed
correspondingly. All other views then are displayed according to the standards
related to this modified view.
Hatch: Enter an AutoCAD hatching pattern to be used for cross-section hatching.

The Size field is used to specify the hatching scale, e.g., the line distance for
line hatching.
Enter the angle of the hatching lines in the Angle field.
Update Preview If Style If this field is checked, every changed setting causes the
Changes immediate update of the preview if open. See also 'Detail Center/Preview.'
Deactivate this option first to see how long it takes for your computer to process
the components when handling extensive construction group details with many
setting changes. Or close the preview first.
Display Field: Shows a detailing style description, which you can indicate when creating a new
style.
SAVE CHANGES
ON HARD DISK Click on this button to save your modifications permanently as a text file on your
hard disk. An existing file will be overwritten.
Please note however, that the model drawing has to be saved as well if
you want to keep the modification of the current drawing. Saving on hard
disk means a copy which doesn't refer any more to your drawing.
Construction Component Display and View Selection

These dialog tabs offer the opportunity to specify the display type of the component parts (centerlines, drill
holes, hidden edges, etc.) and which views are displayed.
Dialog Box Detailing Style, LAYOUT tab:
Settings:
Output: If the Centerlines field is checked, the centerlines previously selected in the tab
CENTERLINES are depicted. Otherwise, no centerlines are displayed.
If the Visible Parts field is checked, all visible lines are displayed. This field
should always be checked.
If the Invisible Parts field is checked, all invisible lines will be displayed in the
form of dashed lines.
Outside left: 3-D view,

right: the two detailing modes
If the 2D Bolts field is checked, the put in bolts and nuts are depicted by a bolt
symbol.
If the 2D WeldMint field is checked, the welding joints imported to the model are
depicted.
If the 2D Elevation Symbols field is checked, the elevation symbols imported to
the model are depicted.
If the Real Sections field is checked, the profile cross-cuts are depicted with
their exact radii otherwise, the simplified depiction in the form of straight lines
is selected.
If the Display with Arcs field is checked, arcs and circles are depicted as such
AutoCAD elements otherwise, they are approximated using many small
continuous lines. The generation of actually curved lines will slightly affect on
the overall processing speed.
If the Allow Shortenings field is checked, profiles are "compressed" in areas

without detailing and a shortening symbol is attached if the settings in the
INDIVIDUAL PART tab permit the shortening of a part. See also 'Detail
Center/Profile Shortening.'
If the Plate Grid Direction field is checked, a symbol for the lengthwise direction
of the grid is attached if the plates feature grids (see function 'Insert Plates.').
Then enter the size of the symbol in the Symbol Size input field.
Views: Here you select which views to generate during the detailing process. You may
delete or add additional views using the Detail Center.
Use the Min. Distance field to indicate the distance of the views (incl.
dimensions and text) if several views of a part are to be generated within one
detail block.
The Section Area field permits you to indicate a visual depth up to which the
subordinate parts are seized at construction group display. This filter can be
switched on separately for the different views to limit the depth only at left and
right views.
If the Automatic Selection field is checked, the program automatically generates
the required views according to the existing detailing processes of the
component part.
If the Default field is checked, you may choose the views to be generated from
the six existing basic views. If SF field is checked as well, the visual depth of
this view is limited to the value which was entered under "Cut Area". Please
note, however, that unlike cut areas at views (see ->'overviews') nevertheless
the complete component part will be displayed.
If the Cut field is checked, a cut is made in this view frame for any model view
(which you can generate using the function 'Object View'). Use this frame to
specify position, cut depth, and depicted parts. See also 'Detail Center/Model
Cuts.'
Dialog Box Detailing Style, CENTERLINE Tab:
Settings:
Display at Here you select the shape types of the normal shapes to be used when
Norm Shapes: detailing the centerline. If the corresponding Shape Type is checked, its
appropriate centerline is depicted.
Display at Here you select the shape types of the special shapes to be used when
User Shapes: detailing the centerline. If the corresponding Shape Group is checked, the
appropriate centerlines of the shapes are depicted.
Centerline : Here you specify the amount of projection the centerline extends beyond the
Offset end of the shape.
Dialog Box Detailing Style, HOLES Tab:
Settings:
Centerlines and Axes: Here, you specify the display of the hole axes.
If the Show Hole Axes field is checked, a hole view will display the axis. Enter
the extension of the axis beyond the shape edges into the Offset field.
If the Display Centerline Cross field is checked, a top view of the hole will
display the hole axes. Enter the extension of the axis beyond the hole diameter
into the Offset field.
If the Rotate by 45 field is checked, the axes are rotated by 45 to prevent
dimension line overlaps.
Hole Display: If the Real Holes field is checked, the holes are depicted according to their
diameter as either circular holes or hidden edges. Otherwise, only the axes are
displayed if these are chosen for display.
Top view and front view of a

work piece with real drill holes
If the Normal field is checked, a single circle is drawn for real holes shown in a
top view.
If the Filled field is checked, a single, filled circle is drawn for real holes shown
in a top view.
If the Hidden Holes without Circle field is checked, the hidden (invisible) holes
are displayed without a hole circle using a dotted line (as long as you did select
'Real Holes) and only the axes are displayed if you selected these for the
depiction. However, if you selected 'Old Standard' the axes are always
displayed.
If the According to Old Standard field is checked, the holes are depicted in a top
view with the steel construction symbol specifying the diameter. Enter the size
of this symbol in the Symbol Size input field.
Special Settings for Single Parts, Construction Groups and Overviews

In addition to the general display specifications of the previous dialog boxes and tabs you can also specify
special settings for single parts, construction groups and overviews.
Dialog Box Detailing Style, S INGLE PARTS Tab:
Settings:
Add Shape Section: Determination whether the cross section shall be added at single parts detailing
to the corresponding views.
Normal Shapes, User Shapes, Roof-Wall Shapes or Combined Shapes: the
cross sections of the parts concerned are added.
At Right Side: the cross section will be added on the right side.
At Left Side: the cross section will be added on the left side.
If the at endplates field is checked, the connection shape is displayed.
Automatic Specify default settings for the automatic shortening of long

Shortening: parts. See also 'Detail Center/Shape Shortening.'
Single Line: The shortening symbol is a simple straight line.
ZigZag Single Line: The shortening symbol is a serrated, wave-like line.

Double Line: The shortening symbol is a straight double line with the gap set in
the Distance input field.
ZigZag Double Line: The shortening symbol is a serrated, wave-shaped double
line with the gap set in the Distance input field.
Min. Shape: Shortenings are to be attached starting at this length. You can
use your page optimally by displaying the shapes as long as possible.
Min. Shortening: The shape has to be shortened by at least this value to even
activate any shortening.
Max. Number: Maximal number of shortenings for the shape.
Edge: Shortenings cannot start in the edge or margin area but can only start this
indicated distance from the edge. This prevents shortening a shape without
detailing too much.
Dialog Box Detailing Style, CONSTRUCTION GROUPS Tab:
Settings:
End Plates: If the Display End Plates field is checked, an end plate detail with connection
profile is displayed on the respective side of the construction group if a head or
base plate exists.
If the Seen from Inside field is checked, the connection profile is shown in a cut
form in case of projected head plates.
If the Seen from Outside field is checked, the connection profile is shown
invisibly in case of projected head plates.
Associated Parts: If the Display Connecting Neighbor Parts field is checked, all those parts
bordering immediately on the construction group are displayed as well.
If the Display Only in Section... field is checked, only the associated,
neighboring parts displayed as cross-section are depicted.
If the Display Only Symbolic Display field is checked, associated parts are
displayed in the form of simplified symbols (outer dimensions).
Display Group If this field is selected, individual parts of a construction group are displayed
Parts with Single Detail using their own detail style if they are associated with a style. Otherwise, they
Style: are displayed using the detail style of the group.
Display Zero Point If this field is checked, the zero point reference of coordinate dimensioning of a
Reference: group is displayed as reference point or at American dimensioning option as
symbol for "Running dimension". (See also subordinate dialog ->
"Dimensioning").
In the Symbol Size input field, you can indicate the size of the reference point
resp. of the symbol.
Dialog Box Detailing Style OVERVIEWS Tab:
Display Filter: Here you select the parts to be considered for overviews. Normally, it is
specified that all fields are checked. If you generate automatic views within work
frames you can here use the filter to eliminate parts in case of large overviews.
Use the Min. Part Size input field to enter the distance of the most distant and
farthest removed, opposing corners and thus no longer select smaller parts. If
the corner distance is smaller than the indicated value, the part will not be
recorded. This setting is unimportant if the value 0 has been entered here. None
of the parts are then filtered with this function.
A min. part size setting of > 10

means this part is no longer
displayed.
... If the Shapes field has been checked, all shapes and special shapes are
considered during the selection process.
If the Poly-Plates field has been checked, all desired plates profiles are
considered during the selection process. Stiffeners and bracing plates, however,
will be handled in a separate process.
If the Stiffeners field has been checked, all stiffener plates are considered
during the selection process.
If the Bracing Plates field has been checked, all bracing plates of the groups are
considered during the selection process.
If the Web Angles field has been checked, all web angles are considered during
the selection process.
If the End Plates field has been checked, all end plates, splice, and base plates
are considered during the selection process.
If the Special Parts field has been checked, all special parts (e.g. ACIS parts)
are considered during the selection process.
Distinguishing between the different component parts is of course possible only
if these have been generated with the associated functions as well. A web angle
generated as a manually drilled angular steel would otherwise be interpreted as
a normal profile.
If the Only Parts Inside Frame field has been checked, only those parts are
considered during the selection process which are completely or at least by half
within the work frame.
This permits you to make a specific selection of the area - otherwise all parts
being situated within the work frame are displayed (i.e. in the way you would
really see it).
Clip Plane Distances : Normally, the clip plane distances assigned to the work frames are used as
basis at generation of the overviews (See also -> 'Clip Plane' command ). It is,
however, also possible to set an independent default here.
If the From Work Frame field has been checked, the defaults of the work frames
are adopted.
If the Default field has been checked, you can set deviating clip plane distances
of the overview in the front and back input fields.
In the For Axes input field, you enter the maximum distance of a perpendicular
work frame towards the current view. This is the distance the work frame is
allowed to have to be evaluated there as construction axis for display and
dimensioning.
If the Axes only within field has been checked, only those axes will be displayed
at a display of construction axes which are situated within the construction
displayed in this view. See also -> 'Construction Axes'.
Display Mode: Here you select how the parts will be displayed in the overview.
If the Standard field has been checked, the overview is displayed as standard
2D-depiction where all hidden edges are correctly determined.
If the Sketch Drawing field has been checked, the construction components
are only hinted at as sketch drawing. It is not absolutely necessary that this
sketch drawing has to be seen from the beginning till the end of a component
part. It is possible that only the center line is displayed (See also ->'Shape
Characteristics' command).
If the Parts as Objects field has been checked, the component parts are
displayed as intelligent 2D-objects (See also ->'Intelligent 2D Details'). At this
mode, however, the hidden edges are only displayed correctly in relation to the
corresponding part. Hidden edges which are created due to other components
cannot be calculated.
This mode is suitable if you want to attach position flags later. By means of
shape characteristics, it is also possible to indicate individual depictions per
component part if an exact display of hidden edges is not so important e.g in
overviews for discussions.
If the System Lines field has been checked, only the centerlines of shapes are
displayed as static system, plates and similar component parts are not
displayed.
If the Turn View field has been checked, the view is displayed from the
opposite perspective. This permits to look at the inside and at the outside of
gable walls.
Example for Construction Axes in Overviews:
The figure below shows the connections between current view and construction axes. In the current view
(gray) of work area 1 the construction axes A, B and C would be displayed. The corresponding work
frames contain the information about axis description and text display.
As, however, the construction axis C is situated outside the displayed construction, it could be hidden with
the "Axes only within" option. The axes of the small work area 2 would only be displayed if the smallest
distance of the corresponding relevant work frames was smaller than the preset value of the clip plane
distance "For Axes".
If different values have been indicated for the left and right axis description, the value is used which is next
to the current view.
Dimensioning Settings
Here you can indicate all of the settings for the dimensioning of the components. Since this is a rather
complex area, the settings are distributed among several subordinate dialogs within this tab, which,
however, can all be opened simultaneously for a clear overview.
Dialog Box Detailing Style, DIMENSIONING Tab:
Settings:
Dimension Chains: Here you select all basic settings for all dimension chains.
If the Normal Dimension field has been checked, all customary linear dimension
chains are attached.
If the Coordinate Dimensioning field has been checked, dimension chains with
coordinate dimensioning are attached.
I f the Both Together field has been checked, linear dimension chains and
dimension chains with coordinate dimensioning are attached at the same time.
You have the option to exclude certain construction groups from coordinate
dimensioning.
Head Plate detailed with

Coordinate Dimensioning.
The overall dimension was
automatically attached as
standard dimension chain.
If the Assoc. Dimensioning field has been checked, dimensioning is created as

really associative dimensioning without text overwriting as far as possible. In
case of manual manipulations dimensioning is adapted to the correct value.

If the With Text Optimization field has been checked, the program will position
the dimensioning texts in a better way according to the settings in the
subordinate dialog OPTIMIZATION. Optimization can be switched off if later you
want to displace the dimensions manually according to another method or if
overlaps are not expected (calculator speed is increased).
If the Complete Line (hor.) field has been checked, always complete dimension
chains lengthways to the component part are built. The missing dimensions are
added to the overall length.
If the Complete Line (vert.) field has been checked, always complete dimension
chains transversely to the component part are built. The missing dimensions are
added to the overall width.
Divide Hole Rows means: At hole dimensioning each individual hole diameter
gets its own dimension chain and the diameter is indicated on the dimension
line.
Center Punch/Weld Mark Extra means: Small welding cracks will be assigned
their own incremental dimensioning line. This is a minor option if 'Divide Hole
Rows' has been selected because here a distinction is made between
diameters anyway.
Diameter on Line means: At hole dimensioning the hole diameter is indicated on
the dimension construction line. This is a minor option if 'Divide Hole Rows'
has been selected because the hole diameter is indicated on the dimension
line.
If the Label Dimension Lines field has been checked, the things located by
dimension chain (stiffeners, holes, etc.) are written as text to the dimension line.
In the Text Size input field, you enter the text height in mm.
Dimstyle Normal
Dimension: Select the AutoCAD dimensioning style for the usual linear dimensioning, which
is going to control all properties (e.g., text color, size, etc.). For radii and angles
the corresponding subordinate style of an AutoCAD dimensioning style can
additionally be used.
Left Selection List: Choose the desired basic style from the available styles.
Right Selection List/Small/Large: Indicate two additional styles to be assigned
as style variant to different dimension chains (see 'Style variants').
If you have selected the option 'Auto,' a smaller (0.7) and larger factor (1.4)
copy is generated as text from the basic style.
Style variants allow you to emphasize overall dimensions or use smaller texts
when space is limited.
Dimstyles This style selection is similar to the style selection for standard dimension-
Coordinate Dimension: ing. As Single Dim. Chain: Only one shared coordinate dimension chain is
attached per dimension chain block (on the top, bottom, left, or right from
component).
Distances: Dimension: Enter the smallest distance to be dimensioned. If this distance is

smaller than the value, it is added to the next dimension.
Help Lines: Enter the length of the dimension construction lines if you selected
'Fixed Construction Line Length.' Otherwise, enter the distance from the start of
the construction line up to the previous dimension chain. In this case, entering
the value 0 will not cut the construction lines at the previous dimension chain
but are extended to the point to be dimensioned.
st
To 1 Dimension Chain: Enter the distance from the outer limit of the
st
component up to the 1 dimension line. If you selected the option 'First Position
Flags' in the FLAGS dialog tab, this field contains the distance from the
outermost position flag.
Between Dimension Chains: Enter the distance between the individual
dimension lines.
If the Fixed Support Line Length field has been checked, you can preset the
length of the support line in the Distances/Support Lines input field. If this field
has not been checked, the dimension chains are cut at each other with the
distance indicated in the Distances/Support Lines input field.
Single Parts: Click on this button to open the dialog for the special dimension settings for single parts.
Group: Click on this button to open the dialog for the special dimension settings for construction
groups.
Overview: Click on this button to open the dialog for the special dimension settings for overviews.
Optimization: Click on this button to open the dialog for the optimizing settings.
Dialog Box Detailing Style, DIMENSIONING/SINGLE PARTS Tab:
This subordinate dialog is used to enter the settings specifying how a single part is to be dimensioned in
which style (standard, small, large).
Settings:
General Info: If the Coord. Dimensioning if Main Part from field has been checked, the single
part (if it is the main part) is displayed with coord. Dimensioning within a
component group dimensioning.
At a mixed dimensioning of main and secondary parts within the component
group dimensioning coordinate dimensioning can be limited to weld dimensions
of secondary parts only by means of this setting.
If the Coord. Dimensioning in Transv. Direction field has been checked,
coordinate dimensioning is also displayed in transversal direction (e.g. at hole
groups).
If the System Distances field has been checked, the distances of the ends of
the component parts are dimensioned related to the system points of the
construction (these are the theoretical intersection points between the
center axes of connected shape and the corresponding support shapes).
In the Offset Axis input field, you can preset the offset of the hole axes if
'Display Axes' command was checked for vertical drill holes.
Dimensions: If the Length field is checked, the length of the single part is dimensioned.
If the Width/Height field is checked, the width and height of the single part is
dimensioned (depending on the view).
Cope/Notches: Notches or other outside polycuts of the single part are
dimensioned.
Inner Contour: Inside polycuts of the component part are dimensioned (e.g.
penetrations).
Radius: Circle radii of component contours are dimensioned.
If defined, the subordinate radius style of the selected AutoCAD-dimensioning

style is used. If the With Center Points field is checked, too, the center points of
radii are dimensioned in a separate linear dimension chain.
Cut Angle: All angles are dimensioned which were created by line cuts or
polycuts. If defined, the subordinate angle style of the selected AutoCAD-
dimensioning style is used.
Display Field: Shows an abbreviation to be assigned to the style 'Small' or
'Large' via the style variants.
List of Abbreviations:
The abbreviations consist of the name of the dimension chain as well as the dimension
chain style (in brackets) and the style variant. For example: Lng(Lin/GR) represents the
length dimension for standard linear dimensions in the variant 'Large.'
Lng Length
Brt Width/Height
Klink Notch
Angle Angle
BoSkLng Vertical drill holes, lengthwise
BoSkBrt Vertical drill holes, perpendicular (crosswise)
BoParLng Parallel drill holes, lengthwise
BoRiss Weld cracks
Lin Standard dimensioning
Coo Coordinate dimensioning
KL Style variant 'Small'
GR Style variant 'Large'
Vertical Drill Holes: If the In Long.Direction field is checked, vertical drill holes are dimensioned
lengthwise of the component part. Vertical drill holes mean the drill holes
vertical to the screen.
If the At Transv. Direction field is checked, vertical drill holes are dimensioned
crosswise of the component part.
Divide Hole Groups: New dimension chains within the component part are
created in case of modified transversal distances. Otherwise, a common
dimension chain is positioned beside the component part. The dimensions of
the first and last hole group, however, are drawn to the outside if they are near
enough at the end of the component part.
Dimension near by Holes: The dimensions of the first and last hole group are
not drawn to the outside at 'Divide Hole Groups' setting. They are also
positioned near by the hole group. This setting is for example reasonable if
apart from the component part additional dimensions for secondary parts of
component groups are to be expected.
Display Axis: Common axis lines are displayed within the hole groups if the
'Divide Hole Groups' setting has been checked
As Back Pitch: Symmetric hole distances around the center line are summed up
to a common measure.
Only Visible Holes: Only those holes are dimensioned which are visible in the
corresponding view. At a top view for example, the holes of the shape's bottom
flange are not dimensioned (they would even not be dimensioned if they were
visible due to gaps).
Divide Flanges: Hidden vertical holes are provided with a separate
dimensioning chain unless excluded from dimensioning by 'Only Visible Holes'
command.
Hole Diameter: The hole diameter is written beside the hole groups. If the value
does not change, the diameter is only indicated once per hole line or complete
hole group. Text Size indicates the text size which is used, Distance indicates
the distance of labeling from the edge of the hole. Positive values signify a
labeling on the right above the center, negative values signify a labeling on the
right below the center.
In the New Dim. at input field, you enter the distance from one hole group resp.
drill hole dimensioning to the other at which a new (redundant) dimensioning
has to be carried out. This permits a clearer dimensioning of far away positioned
identical hole screen dimensions as the dimension chains resp. the indications
of diameters are repeated.
Parallel Drill Holes: If the In Long. Direction field is checked, parallel drill holes are dimensioned
lengthwise of the component part. Parallel drill holes mean the drill holes
parallel to the screen.
If the With W-Dimension field is checked, you enter the root dimensions
including the diameter of the parallel drill holes. Continuous constant root
dimensions are displayed as a group. Text Size indicates the text size which is
used, Distance indicates the distance of labeling from the farthest end of the
hole . Positive values signify a labeling outside the component part, negative
values signify a labeling inside the component part.
In the New Dim. at input field, you enter the distance from one root dimension to
the other at which a new (redundant) dimensioning has to be carried out. This
permits a clearer dimensioning of far away positioned identical root dimensions
as the indications are repeated.
Meaning of the
Information on
Geometry and Drill
STYLE VARIANTS: Click on this button to open the dialog for the style variants. You can then
assign a different syle variant to the individual dimension chains. See also
subordinate dialog Style Variants.
Dialog Box Detailing Style, DIMENSIONING/CONSTRUCTION GROUP Tab:
This subordinate dialog is used to enter the settings specifying how a construction group is to be
dimensioned and in which style (standard, small, large). In addition, it is possible to preset an order of the
dimension chains in the input fields of the corresponding component parts.
Settings:
General Info: If the Total W field is checked, the overall length of the construction group is
dimensioned.
If the Total Width field is checked, the overall width or height of the construction
group is dimensioned.
If the Dimension Main Part field is checked, the main part is dimensioned with
the most important dimensions like a single part.
Dimension Subparts: the position of the secondary parts is dimensioned.
Main Parts First: If main part dimensioning is activated, the inner dimension
chains of the construction group view are the dimension chains of the main part.
Subparts First: The inner dimension chains of the construction group view are
the dimension chains of the subparts if activated.
System Points: The reference points of the main part (see -> 'Shape
Characteristics' command) are dimensioned related to the ends of the
component group.
Parallel Holes (Copy): If you generate several views of a group at one time, the
parallel holes (hole diagrams) are dimensioned only for the first view.
Subparts only 1x: If several views of the group are displayed, subparts are only
dimensioned 1x per dimension in the most suitable view.
Otherwise the subparts are dimensioned redundantly in each view.
If the Complete Line (hor.) field has been checked, all dimension chains are
completed lengthways to the overall length of the group.
If the Complete Line (vert.) field has been checked, all dimension chains are
completed transversely to the overall width of the group
Coord. Dimensioning in Transv. Direction: The coord. dimensioning for
subparts is also displayed in transversal direction if they are dimensioned with
coordinate dimensions.
chain style (in brackets) and the style variant. For example: Total(Lin/GR) represents
dimensions for standard linear dimensions in the variant 'Large.'
Total Length and width or height of group
NbProf Shapes as subparts
NbPoly Standard plates as subparts
NbRip Stiffeners as subparts
NbKopf End and base plates as subparts
Subpart Shapes: No Dimension: No dimensioning of the standard shapes in a construction group.

At Edges: Dimensioning of the standard shapes based on the outer shape
edges.
Shape Center: Dimensioning of the standard shapes based on their geometric
center.
At Holes: Dimensioning of the standard shapes based on holes in the shape; if
there are no holes, dimensioning is based on the outer edges.
Holes/Edges: Dimensioning of the standard shapes based on the outer edges
and holes.
Flats as PolyPlates: Flats (e.g. fishplates) are included in the dimension chains
of the polyplates and not dimensioned as shapes.
Diagonals: Diagonal shapes are dimensioned over the longest length. If the
System Distances field has been checked as well, the distances related to the
system points of the diagonal will be dimensioned additionally. If the System
Overall Dimension field has been checked as well, the distance from one
system point to the other will be dimensioned.
Only One Hole: Dimensioning of the shape is only based on the farthest hole at
dimensioning at holes or at holes/edges.
Diagonal Dimensioning
The diagonal is dimensioned

including system points and system
overall dimension.
Only Outer Edges: Dimensioning of the shape is based on the edge at the very
front at dimensioning at edges or dimensioning at holes/edges.
Coordinate Dimensioning: Standard shapes are dimensioned with coordinates
as well if the dimension chain 'Holes/Edges' has been selected. You can thus
exclude certain parts from the coordinate dimensioning if the dimensioning
methods are mixed.
Input Field: You can indicate the position of the generated dimension chain
related to the other subpart dimension chains, if these are on the same side of
the component part.
Subpart Polyplates: No Dimension: No dimensioning of plates in a group (e.g., gusset plates)

At Edges: Dimensioning of plates based on the outer plate edges.
At Plate Center: Dimensioning of the plates based on their geometric center.
At Holes: Dimensioning of the plates based on holes in the plate; if there are no
holes, dimensioning is based on the outer edges.
Holes/Edges: Dimensioning of the plates based on the outer edges and holes.
Only One Hole: Dimensioning of the plate is only based on the farthest hole at
dimensioning at holes or at holes/edges.
Only Outer Edges: Dimensioning of the plate is based on the edge at the very
front at dimensioning at edges or dimensioning at holes/edges.
Coordinate Dimensioning: Standard plates are dimensioned with coordinates as
well if the dimension chain 'Holes/Edges' has been selected. You can thus
exclude certain parts from the coordinate dimensioning if the dimensioning
methods are mixed.
the component part.
Subpart Stiffener: Please note that a separation of the stiffeners from other plates is only possible
if these have been created using the stiffener command (see command
'Stiffeners') or as an option when creating plate connections.
No Dimension: No dimensioning of the stiffeners in a construction group.
At Stiffener Center: Dimensioning of the stiffener based on the at Stiffener
Center field value.
At Edges: Dimensioning of stiffeners based on the outer stiffener edges.
Only Outer Edges: Dimensioning of the stiffeners is only based on their first
outer edge in shape direction at dimensioning at holes.
Coordinate Dimensioning: Stiffeners are dimensioned with coordinates as well
if the dimension chain 'Holes/Edges' has been selected. You can thus exclude
certain parts from the coordinate dimensioning if the dimensioning methods are
mixed.
the component part.
Subpart EndPlates: Please note that a separation of the end and base plate from the other shapes
is only possible if these have been created using the corresponding command
(see command 'Plate Connections' and command 'Base Plates').
No Dimension: No dimensioning of the end plates in a group
At Edges: Dimensioning of end plates based on the outer end plates edges.
At Holes: Dimensioning of the end plates based on holes in the plate; if there
are no holes, dimensioning is based on the outer edges.
Also Bent Plates: The details of the group with bent or folded end plate details
are dimensioned as well.
Only one Length Dim: The length dimension chains of end plates are collected
if they can be situated on different sides of the component part.
Coordinate Dimensioning: End plates are dimensioned with coordinates as well

if the dimension chain 'Holes/Edges' has been selected. You can thus exclude
mixed.
the component part.
APPLY DIMEN- Click on this button to apply the indicated order of the dimension chains. It is not
SIONING ORDER: possible to use the same order number several times.
STYLE VARIANTS Click on this button to open the dialog for the style variants and you can then
assign a different style variant to the individual dimension chains. See also
'Style Variants'.
Dialog Box Detailing Style, DIMENSIONING/OVERVIEW Tab:
This subordinate dialog is used to enter the settings specifying how an overview is to be dimensioned and
in which style (standard, small, large).
Settings:
General Info: If the Total Dimensions field is checked, the overall length and width or height of
the overview are dimensioned. Any possible construction axes situated outside
will be taken into consideration at calculation of dimensions.
If the Work Frame Axes field is checked, the existing construction axes (work
frame axes) of the view are dimensioned. Please note, however, that the axes
are only displayed, if the corresponding option has been selected in LABEL
Tab.
If the Outer Edge Steel field is checked, the outside dimensions of the steel
construction are dimensioned and related to the possibly existing outer
construction axes.
Diagonals: Diagonal shapes are dimensioned over the longest length. If the
System Distances field has been checked as well, the distances related to the
system points of the diagonal will be dimensioned additionally. If the System
Overall Dimension field has been checked as well, the distance from one
system point to the other will be dimensioned.
If the Merge Dim. Lines field is checked, similar dimension chains in horizontal
and vertical direction are collected in one dimension chain (e.g. all horizontal
shapes and vertical dimensioned cross-sections. Even dimension chains
situated on different sides are collected in one common dimension chain.
Add Elevation: The elevation is taken into account at coordinate dimensions in
vertical direction (see GLOBAL Tab).
Min. Shape: Here you enter the minimum length of the component part from
which the parts are dimensioned, if these are visible in one of the complete
views. Parts which are smaller than the indicated value are not taken into
account.
Min.Cross-Section: Here, you enter the minimum dimensions of the component
part from which on the parts are still dimensioned, if these are visible as cross-
section. Parts which are smaller than the indicated value are not taken into
account
chain style (in brackets) and the style variant. For example: Total(Lin/GR) represents
dimensions for standard linear dimensions in the variant 'Large.'
Total Length and width or height of group

HorAchs Horizontal Shapes (outer edge)
HorAk Horizontal Shapes (axis dim.)
VerAchs Vertical Shapes (outer edge)
VerAK Vertical Shapes (axis dim.)
QuerAchs Cross-Sections (outer edge)
QuerAK Cross-Sections (axis dim.)
Horizontal Shapes: No Dimension: No dimensioning of the horizontal shapes in the overview.

(vertical dim. chain) At Edges: Dimensioning of the horizontal shapes based on the outer edges.
Shape Center: Dimensioning of the horizontal shapes based on their axis
(geometric center).
At PlateEdges: Dimensioning of the horizontal shapes based on their outer
edges and axes in two separate dimension chains.
Top of Steel: Dimensioning of the horizontal shapes based on their upper edge.
Coordinate Dimensioning: Horizontal shapes are dimensioned with coordinates
as well if the dimension chain 'Both' has been selected. You can thus exclude
mixed.
Vertical Column: No Dimension: No dimensioning of the vertical shapes in the overview.

(horizontal dim.chain) At Edges: Dimensioning of the vertical shapes based on the outer edges.
Shape Center: Dimensioning of the vertical shapes based on their axis
(geometric center).
At PlateEdges: Dimensioning of the vertical shapes based on their outer edges
and axes in two separate dimension chains.
Coordinate Dimensioning: Vertical shapes are dimensioned with coordinates as
well if the dimension chain 'Both' has been selected. You can thus exclude
mixed.
Cross-Section horizontal: No Dimension: No dimensioning of the shapes visible as cross-sections in

horizontal direction of the overview.
At Edges: Dimensioning of the shapes visible as cross-sections in horizontal
direction based on the outer edges.
Shape Center: Dimensioning of the shapes visible as cross-sections in
horizontal direction based on their axis (geometric center).
At PlateEdges: Dimensioning of the shapes visible as cross-sections in
horizontal direction based on their outer edges and axes in two separate
dimension chains.
Coordinate Dimensioning: Shapes visible as cross-sections in horizontal
direction are dimensioned with coordinates as well if the dimension chain 'Both'
has been selected. You can thus exclude certain parts from the coordinate
dimensioning if the dimensioning methods are mixed.
Cross-Section vertical: No Dimension: No dimensioning of the shapes visible as cross-sections in

vertical direction of the overview.
At Edges: Dimensioning of the shapes visible as cross-sections in vertical
direction based on the outer edges.
Shape Center: Dimensioning of the shapes visible as cross-sections in vertical
direction based on their axis (geometric center).
At PlateEdges: Dimensioning of the shapes visible as cross-sections in vertical
direction based on their outer edges and axes in two separate dimension
chains.
Coordinate Dimensioning: Shapes visible as cross-sections in vertical direction
are dimensioned with coordinates as well if the dimension chain 'Both' has been
selected. You can thus exclude certain parts from the coordinate dimensioning
if the dimensioning methods are mixed.
STYLE VARIANTS Click on this button to open the dialog for the style variants and you can then
assign a different style variant to the individual dimension chains. See also
'Style Variants'.
In the following figure, you will see an example for dimensioning a view including construction axes
display. The first dimension chain from the top is showing the dimensioning of the shapes related to the
construction axes. The second dimension chain is showing the dimensioning of the construction axes and
the third is showing the dimensioning of outer edge steel (2600). The overall dimension (3000) is
measured over the outsi
de axes.
The construction axes 1 and 3 could be hidden in the overviews settings and would not be dimensioned in
this case (see also OVERVIEW tab).
Example:
Dimensioning of a view in
longitudinal direction including
construction axes
Dialog Box Detailing Style, DIMENSIONING/OPTIMIZING Tab:
In this subordinate dialog you specify how to perform an optimized dimension text placement. Optimizing
according to the settings under 'Optimizing Methods' is always performed when two dimension texts
overlap.
Settings:
Textposition Min text distance inside dimlines: Enter a value indicating how close together
dimension texts may be without triggering the collision alarm. If the distance of
a dimension text to its neighboring text is smaller than the indicated value, the
text is moved according to the specifications.
Min. text distance between dimlines: Enter a value indicating how close together
the dimension texts of different dimlines may be without triggering the collision
alarm. If this distance is smaller than the indicated value, the dimline is moved
to the suitable distance.
Min. Edge Distance for Dimensioning: Enter a minimum distance between the
dimensioning of the hole group or subpart and the end of the component part
which is admissible before it is moved outside.
Max. distance similar dim .lines: Enter the maximum distance up to which
subparts dim. lines are collected transversely in groups.
Diagonal Recognition: If the Exclude Flat Steel field is checked, shapes of

flat steel are not recognized as system diagonal and excluded from diagonal
dimensioning. You can thus prevent that e.g. a top chord of a haunch is
dimensioned as diagonal.
Min. Angle for Recognition: Here, you enter the angle the shape must at least
have towards main dimensioning direction to be recognized as diagonal. This
option permits you to prevent that e.g. a roof girder is dimensioned as diagonal.
Text Style: Don't Display Inch Signs: The inch signs are suppressed at dimensioning in the
imperial system.
Change Text Size automatically: The dimension chain is changed to the
dimensioning style variant "Small" if it does not already have this style.
Group of similar dimension, from ... : Several consecutive identical are
combined into one shared dimension. The neighboring input field specifies the
number of identical dimensions combined in this group.
Optimization Methods: No alternating Dim. texts: The text remains in its original
height on the dim. line.
Alternate Dim. Text Only Above Dim. Line: The text is moved only above the
neighboring text.
Alternate Dim.Text Above and Below Dim. Line: The text is also moved below
the dimension line.
Move Dim. Text Along Dim Lines: The text is moved across the construction lines if it does
not fit in between (even if otherwise not colliding with any other dimension).
Avoid Text between Dim. Lines: The text is supposed to be colliding and
optimized if it does not fit in between (even if in reality not colliding with any
other dimension).
Move Outer Dim Text: The outer dimensions can be moved beside the dim. line.
Move Inner Dimensions: A dimension text can be shifted inside of another
dimension if the required space exists.
Optimized Coordinate
Dimensions: The AutoCAD dimensioning style of coordinate dimensioning is changed to get
a dimensioning which can be optimized among each other and to the linear
dimensions. Otherwise, the AutoCAD-setting is used and it is not possible to
carry out a special optimization.
Collect Dim. Lines until: Dimension lines with few dimensions
(e.g. one single hole) are integrated into another dimension chain. The
neighboring input field specifies the quantity limit for combining dimensions
The picture below shows the different optimization settings:

Dialog Box Detailing Style, DIMENSIONING STYLE VARIANTS Tab:
This subordinate dialog can be accessed via the dimension settings for individual parts of the settings for
groups. Here, you can assign a style variant to (almost) any dimension chain, separately for standard
linear dimensioning as well as the coordinate dimensioning.
Settings:
Selection Dimensioning: Click on the desired dimension chain to which you want to assign a style
variant. The 'Variant' display field will display the abbreviation assigned to that
dimension chain. These abbreviations will also be listed in the display of the
individual parts or groups dimensioning dialogs.
Variant: Assign a style variant to the selected dimension chain.

The Display Field will display the currently selected dimension chains in the
form of an abbreviation.
If you click on 'Small,' the dimension chain receives the style defined by you in
the basic dialog for the corresponding dimension chain type (standard or
coordinate dimensioning), which defines 'Small.'
Click on Standard to cancel any style variant allocation.
If you click on 'Large,' the dimension chain receives the style defined by you in
the basic dialog for the corresponding dimension chain type (standard or
coordinate dimensioning), which defines 'Large.'
The allocation of style variants yields a more clearly structured dimensioning. Outer dimensions can be
emphasized with larger text and different dimension ranges can be colored. You could also use dimension
chains with tolerance specifications for hole dimensions or, in case you anticipate many "tight" dimensions,
you could also work with smaller text. There are many ways to use this option to your advantage.
HINT: If you want to vary only the text sizes, you can also use the setting "Auto" because this will
automatically adjust the necessary text sizes (factor 0.7 or 1.4). However, if you would also like to
change colors or pre-select other text sizes, you have to pre-select a different AutoCAD
dimensioning style.
Position Flag and Welding Symbol Settings

Use this dialog tab to specify if and what type of position flag or welding symbol to attach to the
construction parts. Use one of the templates, which you have created with the command
'Positioning/Position Flags' and the command 'Welding Symbol.'
Dialog Box Detailing Style POSITION FLAGS Tab:
Settings:
General Info: Here the general default settings for the creation of position flags are specified.
Flag at Original: In case of several views of a detail, a position flag is attached
to the first view.
Flag at Copy: In case of several views of a detail, a position flag is attached to
all other views.
Always Number in Model: Always indicate of the overall number of parts in
position flag style. Otherwise, at grouped flags, indication of the number of
parts recorded with this flag.
At construction groups having one single position flag at a group of two parts,
with two stiffeners one behind the other in front view each, the number 4 would
be displayed.
No Cross-Sections: Positions flags are not attached to component parts which
are visible as cross-sections.
Position outside: The position flags are moved outside at construction groups
and overviews. Otherwise, they are attached near the component parts.
Align Horizontal: All position flags are aligned horizontally. Otherwise they are
aligned in the direction of the corresponding component part.
Position flags first: The position flags are attached before dimensioning. In the
neighboring input field, you can specify the distance from the outer limit of the
component part.
Only Position Number: Only the position number is specified.
Only Shipping Number: Only the shipping number is specified.

Both Numbers: The position number and the shipping number are specified, if
existing. Both numbers are divided by a dividing mark which can be preset in
the input field Divider.
Display Position Flags: Here the default settings for the creation of position flags are specified.
Please note: The possible position flag styles refer to the template selected in
the position flags template list.
Main Parts: A position flag is attached to the main parts of construction groups.
Use the Selection List to choose the desired style of the position flag which was
specified with the command Positioning/Position Flags. If the field Only 1x per
Position is checked, a position flag is only attached to one part of identical main
parts of construction groups at overviews.
Subparts: A position flag is attached to the subparts of construction groups. Use
the Selection List to choose the desired style of the position flag which was
Position is checked, a position flag is only attached to one part of identical
subparts at construction groups and overviews.
Bolts: A position flag is attached to the bolts of construction groups at their
detailing. Use the Selection List to choose the desired style of the position flag
which was specified with the command Positioning/Position Flags. If the field
Always Guide Lines is checked, a guide line is drawn from the position flag to
each bolt if these are positioned as a group.
Use the Group to input field to specify a maximum distance up to which identical
bolts are combined as group and up to which the number is added.
Single Parts: A position flag is attached to the single parts at detailing Use the
Selection List to choose the desired style of the position flag which was
Position is checked, a position flag is only attached to one part of identical
single parts at overviews.
Group Position Flags: A common position flag is attached to identical positions

(divided into construction groups and single parts). If the field Always Guide
Lines is checked, a guide line is drawn from the position flag to each part.
Use the Group to input field to specify a maximum distance up to which identical
positions are combined as group and up to which the number is added.
The settings in the field 'Always Number in Model' specify how many parts can
be indicated in the position flag.
In the Position Flags Template selection list, you select the template previously
saved with the command -> Positioning/Position Flags. All position flag styles
are the styles of the corresponding template
Use the AutoCAD-Text Style selection list to choose the text style to be used for
displaying the text entries for the position flags.
Dialog Box Detailing Style WELDING SYMBOLS Tab:
Settings:
Welding Symbols: Enter the default values for creating welding symbols.
At groups: The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in
group views.
Folded Plate: The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed
in group views for folded end plates.
At End Plates: The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed
in single parts views for end plates, if the connection shape is shown, too.
In the Welding Flag Templates selection list, you choose the welding symbol
template previously saved with the command Welding Symbol .
Use the AutoCAD-Text Style selection list to choose the text style to be used for
displaying the text entries for the welding symbols.
Label Settings
Use this dialog tab to specify the text of the label to attach to your details. For example, you can thus
display the position number of the single parts as text instead of in a position flag.
Dialog Box Detailing Style LABEL Tab:
Settings:
Text: If the View Description field is checked, the name of the view is shown below
the detail drawing.
If the Display Scale field is checked, the scale is shown below the detail
drawing.
If you selected 'View Description' and 'DisplayScale', both are used to create an
entry in the form of "Front View (M1:10).
Number: The total construction part quantity is displayed as well. The quantity
is only valid after positioning.
Shape Description: The name of the component is shown below the detail
drawing.
Shape Length: The length of the component is shown below the detail drawing.
Material: The type of material of the component is shown below the detail
drawing.
I f you selected 'Shape Name,' 'Shape Length,' and 'Material,' all are used to
create an entry in the form of "HE 200 B...7800 RST-37-2."
Position Number: The position number is displayed as well. You can also
indicate a text in the neighboring input field, which will precede the position
number.
Note: Comments are displayed, which have been previously assigned to the
part with "Change Properties."
Change Note: The revision status of this construction part is displayed as well.
Dimension at Shape: The part name and material are displayed in overviews.
Text Sizes: Normal Text: Enter the text size for the label.
Scale Text: Enter the text size for the position number, views, and scale text.
Text at Shape: Enter the text size for the text label on shapes in overviews.
Use the AutoCAD Text Style selection list to choose the text style with which to
display the text entries.
Overviews: Description at Shape: At overviews, the name and the material are written at the
corresponding component part.
Show Construction Axes: The axes descriptions of the work frames
perpendicular towards the current view are displayed. Text sizes and display
form are adopted from the work frame properties (see -> Work Frame /
Properties).
As Axis Line: The actual axis is also displayed in the corresponding view. In the
length input field (%) you can preset the relative length of the axis line.
Normally, the axis line is running towards the outer edges of the display (=
100%). If you enter a value bigger than 100, the lines will be extended over this
edge. If you enter a value between 1 and 100, the line will only partly be
displayed from the bottom resp. from the left, e.g. to hint only at it in views.
In Distance input field, you enter the distance of axes label towards the last
outer dimension chain.
Axislabels
Language: Standard: The drawing is exclusively labeled in the corresponding original

language of the program.
One Language: The drawing is labeled in the language chosen as First
Language in the corresponding selection list.
Two Languages: The drawing is labeled in the two languages chosen as First
Language and Second Language in the corresponding selection lists. The two
terms are put out separately, divided by oblique stroke, e.g. "Ansicht A / view
A". The selection 'Standard' as language corresponds to the original language
of the program.
The translation of the terms is based on a translation data base (see also -
>'Automatic Translation' ). If the corresponding term is not defined there, the
original language of the program is used instead. If there are identical terms at
bi-lingual labeling, only one term will be displayed.
Example - Detailing of a Single Part

The picture below displays the example of detailing a single part with optimized settings. The example is
based on the following main settings:
Front and top view are processed in one detail

The parallel holes are created with the 'Separate Hole Tracks' option
The 'Separated Hole Tracks' option is activated
The 'shape Shortening with Zigzag Double-Line' option is activated
The 'Combine Same Dimensions' option is activated; min. = 3 mm
A comprehensive label text is selected but no position flags
Length and width were specified with the variant 'Large' (style selection: "Auto")
The effects of the settings can be seen in this detail; no further revisions were required:
Detailing Example
9.3.5. Component Overview
When selecting the detail center command, this tab will always be active first, and the current drawing is
"scanned" by the detail center.
All model parts are searched according to predefined criteria (see Work Tools/Component Overview')
and then displayed. This might take some time when large models are involved. All detail styles are also
searched and displayed.
HINT: If you need only a section of a model, use the visibility classes to hide the unneeded parts
(see command 'Visibility Classes'). Any parts hidden with the visibility class command are not
recognized by the detail center. Please note however that these parts are then no longer
recognized by any of the details!
First, a description of the individual areas of this level and of the functions available here. Many of the
described functions can be selected via the context menu using the right mouse button. Check the context
menu first to see if your entry is listed there if the documentation fails to mention it.
Function Bar
This is the function bar of the component overview. Since this component overview constitutes the starting
page of the detail center, the functions described here also apply to the other work levels.
Settings:
BUTTON (1) Click on this button to open the dialog for the work tools. You can then specify
additional settings for the component overview. See 'Work
Tools/Construction Group List'.
BUTTON (2) Click on this button to search the selected drawing once more.
This is required if you activated a different drawing in the MDI environment or if
changes were made to the current drawing (e.g., new position).
BUTTON (3) Click on this button to start the Detail Center Express. A complete detailing is
carried out according to the preset pattern. See -> 'Detail Center Express!'.
BUTTON (4) Click on this button to link the components selected in the parts list with the
detail style selected in the detail style list. If the components already have a
style, this style is overwritten unless the part is write-protected. See
'Assigning Detail Styles'.
BUTTON (5) Click on this button to separate the components selected in the parts list from
the detail style selected in the detail style list (only not write-protected parts).
See 'Separating Detail Styles'.
BUTTON (6) By clicking on this button, you can link model parts with a detail style. This
requires that you select a detail style first.
After selecting the command, you can pick on the model parts to be linked or
select them in a window. All not write-protected parts are then assigned this
style.
BUTTON (7) By clicking on this button, you can hide the parts selected in the parts list. If you
click on this button again before a new selection is made, hiding of the parts will
be canceled.
If you apply this command to the entry "Model", all hidden parts will be visible
again.
Visibility only refers to the list. Please don't confuse this command with the
visibility classes ! This command permits you to hide not required components
temporarily for assignment of a style - not visible parts cannot be detailed.
BUTTON (8) Click on this button to write-protect the parts selected in the parts list, if they are
not protected up to then. If, on the contrary, you select protected entries, write-
protection will be canceled with this command.
WORK LEVELS (9) Switch to a different work level by clicking on the corresponding tab. Any open
dialog is updated accordingly.
ACTION BUTTON (10) Click on this button to import all parts selected in the parts list into the view list
and determine the views pre-selected in the detail style.
Component views can be generated only for parts linked with a detail style.
TITLE BAR (11) If you double-click on this area, the dialog switches from docked to free-moving.
Alternatively, you can also grab the dialog and "pull it out" while keeping the left
mouse button depressed.
SEPARATOR (12) Use this separator to enlarge the docked dialog. The drawing next to it will
decrease in size accordingly.
Detail Style List

This list displays all available detail styles. The selection consists of the styles saved in the drawing as
well as the style files saved on the hard drive.
View and Modify Detail Styles
Double-click on the desired list entry to open the dialog for the detail styles (see chapter 'Detail Styles)
where you can modify the entries. Alternatively, you can also use the context menu option 'EDIT DETAIL
STYLE.'
Modifications apply only to the current session. If you want to save your changes permanently, you have
to save the model or export the detail style to the hard drive by means of the detail style dialog . See also-
> ' Detail style / Saving of Detail styles'.
Clicking on another list entry while the detail style dialog is open updates the display of the detail style
dialog.
Copy Detail Styles
Select the detail style you want to copy from the list. Then select the context menu option 'COPY DETAIL
STYLE.'
You are now prompted for a new name. Then you can also specify a description, which will appear in the
detail style dialog for better differentiation.
The new detail style is now displayed in the list and can be edited directly if the detail style dialog is open.
Delete Detail Styles
Select the detail style you want to delete from the list. Then use the context menu option 'DELETE
DETAIL STYLE.' The detail style is now deleted from the list and the drawing. You can also delete the
style from the hard drive.
These deleted detail styles are then no longer available for later sessions!
Set and Remove Default Detail Styles
Some detailing functions such as manual detailing require a default detail style. Use the context menu to
set or remove a default detail style. Just select the desired style, followed by the corresponding function in
the context menu.
The current default detail style is identified with an asterisk (*).
Load Detail Styles
At first loading of the detail center, only those detail styles are displayed in the list which were saved in the
drawing.
You can, however, load additional style files (e.g. the defaults of certain customers), when you start
detailing. If you then save the drawing, these additional styles will be permanently available in the drawing
and will be displayed at the next loading. To load an additional style select the context menu option LOAD
DETAIL STYLE. Now, you can select a style file by the file selection dialog.
If you directly want to load all existing style files from the standard folder, then you select the entry LOAD
ALL DETAIL STYLES instead.
This additional loading of styles is reasonable if you require a great number of different styles in your
company all in all, but only a part of them has to be used per order. If you load a detail style existing in the
model, the existing style will be overwritten.
Additional Control Switches

Here are few more switches, which you will need frequently.
Recursive Processing: Any processing applied to a parent entry in the component parts list (e.g.,
assign style) is also applied to all subordinate entries. Otherwise, only this entry
is processed or all equal entries, if this option is activated in the model. See
also 'Assigning Detail Styles.'
Apply Active Filters: The component parts list is filtered according to the settings of the work tools.
Otherwise, all existing parts are shown.
If you use filters, you can create quick part overviews.
Component Parts List

This list is the primary working list of the detail center because it displays all parts of a model for current
status verification. Display and sorting of the list depends on the work tools settings and if the "Apply
Active Filter' option is activated. See also 'Work Tools/Component Overview.
Status Indicator
Depending on the component status, the entries feature small pictures. Only entries with such pictures
consist of parts that can be processed. All other entries are only parent sorting entries.
The pictures give you a quick overview over their part type.
Component Part Types in the Detail Center
Parts without any special status have gray pictures.

Entries with a detail style are marked with a picture containing a checkmark.
Already processed entries whose detail still matches the original part in the model have a green picture.
Already processed entries whose original part has been changed already are colored red. This tells you
that you have to reprocess this part. The modification mechanism will help you with this. See chapter
'Drawing Modification.''
If the position number of the part features an asterisk (*), you are dealing with the main part of the
associated group.
Double-click on the desired list entry to open an info window, which lists the status and other properties of
the part in plain text. You can also use the context menu option 'SHOW INFO.'
Multiple Selection and Drag&Drop
Use the SHIFT and CTRL keys to select multiple entries. This is a Windows-specific function, which will
not be explained here.
Many operations can also be carried out using drag&drop. For example, by dragging a component list
entry on a detail style, you can link the two.
Sorting
Sorting of the component parts list always depends on the work tools settings. The numerical sorting of
position within the sorting according to groups, part types etc. is always carried out in three steps:
At first, sorting is effected according to the main position number. This number again is sorted according to
an existing position index. If additional prefixes are available, these are sorted in the last step. Position
numbers which only consist of letters, are displayed at the beginning in an alphabetical order. If the filter
'Display Each Part only 1x' is checked, only those positions are assumed to be identical which only differ in
their part prefix.
Standard
sorting: Pos AA with Filter:Pos AA
Pos BC Pos BC
Pos 1-1 Pos 1-1
Pos 1-2 Pos 1-2
Pos TR 1-2 (lapses)
Pos 2-2 Pos 2-2
Pos ST2-3 Pos ST2-3
Pos TR2-3 (lapses)
Pos 2-4 Pos 2-4
Assigning Detail Styles

Views and thus details can be created from every component part with a style. Which parts to process can
already be determined by the style allocation.
Associate a Style
In the list, select the parts and then use drag&drop to pull them onto the detail style and you are finished!
However, you can also highlight the parts and then push button (4) in the function bar, or you select the
parts and use the context menu to select the option 'LINK WITH DETAIL STYLE.'
As you can see, there are many ways to assign a style.
If you want to select parts from the model, you have to select a detail style first. Then press button (6),
followed by picking the parts in the model. However, you can assign only single parts with this method.
Recursive Association
If a single part has a detail style, this part is detailed with this style in the form of a single part detail. If,
however, a construction group has a detail style, this style becomes the detail style for the entire
construction group detailing.
If you want to generate only group details, the associated single parts do not really require their own detail
style because the group style also applies to the parts within that group.
Use the recursive or non-recursive association to assign styles to the parts you want to detail. If the
'Recursive Processing' field is checked and you assign a style to a group, this style also applies to the
single parts of that group. If you drag the entire model on top of the detail style, all groups and all single
parts are assigned the same style.
If you have an optimized style and are in a hurry, you can assign a detail style to all parts and all groups of
the model.
Entries that cannot accept a style (e.g., all sorting entries such as model, part type, etc. ) pass the
association along to their subordinate entries, even if the "Recursive" option is deactivated.
This example shows a few association variants.

'Recursive' activated: If you assign style "A" to the model, every entry is linked with this style. 'Recursive'
deactivated: Only the entries Outline, Complete Plan View, BG 100, and BG 101 are linked with this style
because they are located hierarchically immediately underneath the model. Since the model itself is only a
sorting entry, it passes the association along to its subordinate entries.
'Recursive' activated: If you assign style "B" to the BG 101, every single part of this group is linked with this
style as well. 'Recursive' deactivated: Only the construction group is assigned style "B."
Write-Protection
Use the button (8) of the function bar to write-protect certain entries. These entries are highlighted and
cannot be overwritten with a new style. You have to remove the write-protection before change or delete
the style of such an entry.
Read the description of the function bar about how to use the write-protection.
The combination of recursive processing and write-protection facilitates assigning different styles to groups
and single parts: Deactivate recursive and active write-protection and drag the "model" entry on the group
style. Only the groups are assigned a style (due to the recursive setting) and are then saved. Activate
recursive and drag the "model" entry on the single part style. The style association is passed on to all
parts but the groups themselves are write-protected.
There are a great many additional variants not described in this document.
Separate Detail Styles

Select the parts in the list and then use drag&drop to pull them towards the top and away from the detail
center and you are finished!
However, you can also highlight the parts and then push button (5) in the function bar, or you select the
parts and use the context menu to select the option SEPARATE FROM DETAIL STYLE.'
As you can see, there are many ways to remove a style link.
Remember that parts without a detail style cannot be processed unless the parts belong to a group and
you want to detail only the group views.
Import for Detailing

All parts with a detail style can be imported for detailing, which means that the corresponding views are
created. The import for detailing concludes your work in this work level and you can switch to the next
level.
Create Views
To import parts into the view list just drag the desired parts on the action button (10) using drag&drop.
The button will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go of the mouse button and the
parts are transferred. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse.
If you have checked the 'Import Directly to Views' option in the work tools, you do not need to do anything
else because the style association also transfers the parts. If you separate parts from their style, they are
also removed from the view list.
Automatic Sorting
If the part is located in the view list already, the entries are adjusted accordingly. If the associated group is
in the view list, the single part is then also assigned to this group.
Component Overview Work Tools
Settings:
Display Order: Select the sorting type of the model part in the parts list. You can sort in a first
level and then use a second level to sort again. A third sorting usually consists
of single parts.
Entries that do not meet a criterion are always appended to the top of the
respective level.
For example, if you sort according to area classes (see command 'Area
Classes') and then sort according to construction groups, the existing area
classes are listed directly underneath the model. All entries of an area class
then contain the groups of that class (association is determined according to the
main part if the group belongs to several classes). Each group then lists its
single parts.
The examples described under 'Assigning Detail Style' can also be very
nicely sorted with this sorting method. Another variant to solve the same
problem the detail center offers the utmost in flexibility.
Display Filter: Specify the filter to be used in the display of the parts list.
If the Display Only Group Parts field is checked, only parts belonging to a group
are displayed. Model views are still displayed as well, if selected. This filter is
only activated, if in component overview the 'Apply Active Filter' field has been
checked.
If the Don't Display Work Frames field has been checked, model views will not
be displayed. This filter is only activated, if in component overview the 'Apply
Active Filter' field has been checked.
If the ' Only One Entry per Part ' field id is checked, each position is displayed
only once (also within a group). This filter is only activated, if in component
overview the 'Apply Active Filter' field has been checked.
You can thus limit the list if you have many identical positions of which you only
have to detail one part, of course.
Show Position Number: The position number is displayed in addition to the part
name.
Show Shipping Number: The shipping number or the US- mark number is
displayed in addition to the part name.
Behavior after Specify what is to happen if a detail style is assigned to a part.

Detail Style Linking: If the Lock against overwrite' field is checked, the entry is protected at once and
is shown in bold. The entry can then no longer be modified.
If the 'Hide from Browser Part List' field is checked, the entry is hidden
immediately so that the parts list shows only the parts without association.
Remember: When hiding a group the single parts of that group are hidden as
well even if they do not have any style yet.
To show all parts, click on the "model" entry in the parts list and then on the
button for visibility in the function bar.
If the 'Send to Browser View List' field is checked, the part is transferred to the
views list at once and then is available for detailing.
Synchronize Detail If this field is checked, the detail style is always synchronized with the currently
Styles with Selection: selected part if the detail style dialog is open.
You can then view the settings. This is an additional option for the component
parts list. The views list always features this option as active.
Synchronize Display If this field is checked, the detail center is always updated with the currently
with Document: selected drawing. Since this might take some time, you should deactivate this
option for large models and update manually using button (2) on the function
bar.
Moreover, it would make little sense to update the lists if all you want to do is
look up something in a different drawing.
Show Selection The clicked on part of the list (entire groups too) is emphasized in the model.
in Model: Switch to a different entry and the highlighting also switches to that part.
Hide in Model after If this field is checked, some parts are hidden in the model after detailing.
Detailing: You can, e.g. at part after part detailing, see directly from the model which parts
still have to be detailed. The parts can be made visible again with the command
->'Regenerate'.
Restore Changes if When a drawing is updated, the program tries to restore changes which were
Updated: made later in the details. Otherwise, the detail is displayed as completely new
detailed. See also -> 'Modification Management'.
Output: Displays the path for the details. A sub-folder with the model name is created.
You can also double-click on the field to change the path.
However, we do not recommend changing the path unless absolutely
necessary!
9.3.6. Views Overview
If you have imported all of the parts for detailing, the generated views are displayed in this work level, the
views list. Since most of the important points have already been discussed under 'Component
Overview,' here are just a few new features.
The picture below shows the typical appearance of some parts after the preparations for detailing have
been concluded:
Action Status
Tools
Model View
Part View
Function Bar
ACTION BUTTON Click on this button to detail all parts selected in the views list in the form of
detail blocks, which are then saved to the hard drive. Since this takes some
time, the status indicator will show you whether the detail center is currently
busy.
Details can be created only from parts that are listed in views.
WORK TOOLS Click on this button to open the dialog for the work tools. You can then specify
additional settings for the component overview. See 'Work Tools/Views
Overview'.
View List
Here you will see all views of the imported parts in the form of entries, which can be checked for their
current status. The display and sorting of the list depends on the settings of the work tools. See also
'Work Tools/Views Overview.'
Status
The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please refer to that section for
further details. If the view has already been detailed it is marked with a checkmark.
Preview
Before detailing you can display a preview of the detail or of a single view. Detailing will take place as it is
displayed there.
If you choose only one view you will see exactly that view in the preview. However, if you select the entire
component or group, you will see all existing views of the part in an order determined by the program.
To activate the preview just select the corresponding entry and then select PREVIEW via the context
menu. After some computing time displayed by the status indicator, a drawing window opens containing
the possible detailing as a preview. See also 'Detail Center/Preview.'
If the detail style dialog and the preview are open, you can now change the different detail style settings
and check the effects of the modifications. If the detail style is not yet open, you can open the dialog via
the context menu. The correct detail style belonging to this view is then already selected.
Add and Remove New Views
Should you notice that the views displayed are too few or show an unfavorable line of vision on the part,
you can add or remove any view.
Just drag the view to be removed towards the top and away from the detail center using drag&drop. If you
select an entire component, the entire component will be removed; if you select the "model" entry, all
generated views are removed.
To add a view to a component just select the corresponding part and then select ADD VIEW via the
context menu. A dialog will open where you can add views. See 'Manual and Other Views'.
Detailing
To start the detailing just drag the desired parts onto the action button using drag&drop. The button will
then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go of the mouse button and the parts are
transferred. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse or select the
DETAILING entry via the context menu.
If you want to detail everything just click on the "model" entry. Since the process of detailing (almost)
always refers to the entry of a component, the views of this part are detailed in a shared detail block.
However, if you want to detail one very specific view or detail several views individually, because perhaps
you don't agree with the position, you cannot select them all at once but have to choose them one by one.
A detail block with the date and time of the detailing is created and saved on your hard drive every time the
detailing process is activated. Every variation of the same type is thus still accessible later during the
insertion process. The status indicator now shows you how many component parts have been selected for
detailing (Display e.g. working on 21 of 56) and how much of them has been processed at that time. This
gives you an approximate overview how much time the detailing process will take.
Note: You must save the model after the detailing has finished, since the modification management
requires information that has to be written to the drawing. If you do not save the model, this
information is lost.
Hints for users of previous versions: You did not have to save the model in previous program
versions but must so now or you will lose information that is required by your drawing.
Work Tools - Views Overview
Settings:
Display Order: The sorting settings are identical with the sorting of the component parts list;
please refer to that section for further details.
Display Filter: If the 'Display Only Not Created Views' field is checked, only views not yet
detailed are displayed.
If the 'Display Only Created Views 'field is checked, only views already detailed
are displayed.
Manual and Other Views

You have the option to add additional views to a part or to create manual details from entire model areas.
Since the manual details are actually free views, they too are controlled via this dialog.
The following dialog opens when you use the context menu to select the command. Since this is also a
non-modal dialog (see 'Detail Center/General Dialog Info') you can change your selection in the views
list at any time.
Settings:
Given Views: This list displays the views available for adding to the part. Already existing
views are highlighted and cannot be selected.
The input field above can be used to change the names for free views.
PICK VIEW Click on this button to define the view by picking in the model. See 'Standard
View or '.
ADD TO Click on this button to add the selected view of the views list to the
DETAIL detail center. See 'Standard View or '.
MANUAL DETAIL By clicking on this button, you can create a manual detail. See 'Manual
Detail'.
Add Standard or Free View
If you want to add one of the six basic views, just select the corresponding view from the list and click on
the ADD TO DETAIL button. The view is added to the views list in the detail center at once.
To add one of the free views just select the desired free view ('View A-A to Cut C-C') from the list. The
input field above can be used to change the name. Now click on the PICK VIEW button to specify the
UCS (origin, x- and y-axis) to pick any view or use the ESC key to import the current view on screen. If
you want to import the view on the screen the part has to be already in this object view. Then click on the
ADD TO DETAIL button and the view is added to the views list of the detail center at once.
The thus added views are treated during detailing just like directly created views and automatically further
processed.
Manual Detail from the Model
To create a manual detail from the model (select the "model" entry in the detail center's views list), a
default detail style has to be specified, because the model itself does not have a style.
If you did not specify a default style yet, you can do this at any time from within the component overview
(see 'Detail Style List/Default Detail Style').
Now click on the MANUAL DETAIL button and enter a name for the detail in the then opening input field.
Now pick any view by specifying the UCS (origin, x and y axis) or use the ESC key to import the current
view on screen. If you want to import the view on the screen, the parts have to be already in this view.
You are then prompted to select the parts, which are to be processed for the manual detail.
A window similar to the preview opens, which displays the parts as 3D objects for now. You can now add
manipulations, dimension manually, attach position flags or lines, texts, etc. for which you require the
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D properties of the objects.
Then you click on the temporary CREATE 2D button and the projection calculation is carried out. Of
course, you can continue to work in this window, but you will not have the intelligent properties of the
components available.
Once you have finished your additions, save the window without renaming it. If you do rename it, the
unique allocation for the detail center is no longer active.
Manual Detail from Components
You can also create a manual detail from construction groups or single parts. This requires that you select
the component in the views list, but you don't have to specify a default style or select parts (since the parts
have a detail style). The rest is the same as for the manual detail from the model.
9.3.7. Detail Block Overview (Insert)
If you have detailed all of the parts you can then insert the generated detail blocks into the workshop plans.
You will see the saved detail blocks in this last work level, the insert list. Since most of the important
points have already been discussed under 'Component Overview,' here are just a few new features.
The picture below shows the typical appearance of some parts after detailing:
Action Button Extra Folder
Tools
List of Details
Folder
List of Details
Function Bar
ACTION BUTTON Click on this button to insert all parts selected in the detail list in the form of
detail blocks into the current drawing.
WORK TOOLS Click on this button to open the dialog for the work tools. You can then specify
additional settings for the component overview. See 'Work Tools/Insert
Overview.'
EXTRA FOLDER Click on this button to add additional folders to the list of the detail folders, from
where details or other AutoCAD blocks can then also be inserted.
List of Detail Folder

The default setting fills this list with the folder names, which are located in the detail folder of AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D.
New details are always saved to a folder. The name of that folder corresponds with the associated model
drawing. Users should leave this structure as it is. However, add additional folders so that you can access
to other directories outside of the detail path created by AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D.
Add Detail Library
To add a detail library, click on the button for the extra folder or use the context menu to select the ADD
DETAIL LIBRARY option. You can then select an additional folder (Windows BROWSE function), which is
added to the list.
Delete Detail Library
To delete a detail library, click on the desired list entry and use the context menu to select the DELETE
DETAIL LIBRARY option.
All detail blocks including the folder are then deleted. For further information please read the comments in
the section 'Drawing Synchronization.'
List of Details
Here you will see all of the generated detail blocks as their own entries with date and time when they were
created and you can check their current status. The display and sorting of the list depends on the settings
of the work tools. See also 'Work Tools/Detail Overview.'
Status
The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please refer to that section for
further details. If the detail block has already been inserted, the entry is marked with a checkmark.
Preview
Before inserting the detail block, you can display a preview.

To activate the preview, just select the corresponding entry and then select DETAIL BLOCK PREVIEW via
the context menu. A drawing window opens displaying the result of the detailing in the form of a preview.
See also 'Detail Center/Preview.'
Insert Detail Blocks

To insert detail blocks just drag the desired details onto the action button using drag&drop. The button will
then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go of the mouse button and you can start
inserting blocks. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse.
Every inserted detail block first appears in the current target drawing in its origin and can then be moved to
the desired position within the drawing ("sticking to the checkmark"). You can open several drawings and
click on a drawing to set it as the active one before inserting the blocks. Any details will then be displayed
there.
You can track the parts you have just inserted if you have opened the info window. You can ignore this
part insert or cancel the entire insertion process.
Target Drawing
In order to activate the modification mechanism the program has to know, into which drawing you are
inserting the details. Thus, you cannot insert parts until the drawing has been saved.
You should refrain from making any subsequent drawing name or folder changes as well.
Although the detail center has a verification function for "lost" drawings or details, you will save yourself a
lot of time and effort by just leaving the plans where they are. The location for saving the plans should
thus be considered beforehand.
The comments about the scale and dimensioning style (see Detail Center/General Scale and
Dimensioning Style Info') make it clear that you should use an empty AutoCAD drawing as prototype file.
Revisions
Once the details have been inserted into the drawing you can manually revise the drawing. Please
remember that the single parts and groups are intelligent details. For further information please read the
comments in the chapter 'Intelligent Details.'
Ideally, you should optimize the detail style of the detailing in such a way as to eliminate any revisions.
Only then the modification mechanism can function correctly, since subsequent changes in the details are
otherwise lost if you select the modification function.
US-Mark-Numbering
During insertion, you can issue component part numbers according to a US drawing standard. These
marks (mostly consisting of sheet number, component part code and a continuous index) serve for
identification of the workshop drawings of the parts within the model and within the parts lists.
As in practice, each of these marks has an individual structure, they are based on a definition file
describing the structure and value range of the marks. In the work tools, you can select the current
definition file to be used under 'US-Marks'.
At first insertion, a small dialog opens if the 'US-Mark-Numbering' option

has been activated. This dialog can be docked beside the detail center. The
active fields depend on the default settings in the definition file.
For each new inserted detail a component part index is counted up
according to definition file. However, this index can be changed at any time.
The resulting number (e.g. a1) will now be entered in the model into the field
shipping number of shape characteristics and in the 2D-drawing into the
field shipping number of position flag. The position flag display is changed to
'Shipping Number'. (see also function ->Positioning).
Click on the button NEW DRAWING to count up the index for the drawing
number and the component part index will be reset to its start value. Thus,
you can continue insertion in another drawing sheet.
Drawing Synchronization
When you are inserting the detail blocks, the insert information is saved to special files of the detail library.
After all, it could be that you did not open the model when inserting blocks and opening the drawing in the
background can be quite frustrating because very large models especially require a long computing time
for this operation.
Every time you open the model, the model drawing is compared and synchronized with these data. You
should thus never delete these files until the synchronization process is finished and you have saved the
model. The modification mechanism cannot function reliably if the program lacks the information telling it
which part has been inserted into which drawing.
Your work is better protected, if you do not delete the blocks and folders until after the assignment is
completed.
Work Tools - Detail Block Overview
Settings:
Display Order: The sorting settings are identical with the sorting of the component parts list;
please refer to that section for further details.
Display Filter: If the 'Display Only Not Inserted Blocks' field is checked, only details not yet
inserted are displayed. Thus, double insertion will be avoided.
If the 'Display Only Inserted Blocks'' field is checked, only details already
inserted are displayed.
Display Only Newest Blocks: Only the newest created blocks of each
component part are displayed.
If the ' Only One Entry per Part ' field id checked, each position is displayed only
once (also within a group). You can thus limit the list if you have many identical
positions detailed of which you only have to insert one part, of course.
Show Position Number: The position number is displayed in addition to the part
name.
Show Shipping Number: The shipping number or the US- mark number is
displayed in addition to the part name.
Delete Block after

Insertion: If this field has been checked, each inserted block will be deleted on the hard
drive immediately after insertion.
However, this is only possible if the model drawing is open at the same time as
the program has to make some entries here. Please remember that the model
drawing has to be saved afterwards.
Your work is better protected, if you do not delete the blocks and folders until
after the assignment is completed.
US-Mark Numbering: If the field Use US-mark numbering has been checked, you can issue mark
numbers as they are usually used in the USA at insertion.
Click on the button FILE to select a definition file for the component part
numbers containing the format description. In the Pattern field, a short
description of the file will be displayed.
Concerning the US-Mark Numbering, please also refer to the description in
chapter ->Insert/US-Mark-Numbering.
9.3.8. Automatic Translation
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D permits a multilingual labeling of drawings which is controlled by a

translation data base. This data base can be freely edited so that it is possible to add any language you
like. The form of the translated terms (e.g. only as abbreviation) can also be adapted to the corresponding
requirements.
Before you can work with the translation data base, it has of course to contain the currently used terms.
For this reason, the model can be searched automatically for new terms of the object properties (like
name, note, etc.).
Edit Data Base

Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the detail center (see ->Component Parts
Overview') and click on the EDIT TRANSLATION entry. The following dialog opens:
Dialog Box for Translation Data Base:
Settings:
List: Here, you can see the terms of the data base which have to be translated. If you
click on one of these terms, it will be displayed in the Original Text field and you
can add or revise the translation.
Please note that only those terms are displayed which are existing in the data
base at the very moment. Therefore you have to update the data base after
having modified the model.
Language: Here, you select the language which has to be translated.
Original Text: Here, the current entry from the list will be displayed the translation of which you
can edit.
Translation: Here, you can enter the translation of the currently selected term. Click on the
INSERT button and the entry is accepted as translation into the selected
language.
If the term has already been translated into the selected language before, the
translation will be displayed. Click on the MODIFY button and the translation will
be modified correspondingly.
Display All Entries: If this field has been checked, all entries available in the data base are
displayed in the list of the terms which have to be translated.
Only Unknown Entries: Only those entries are displayed in the list of which a translation into the
selected language is not yet available.
Select File: Here, you see the path of the translation data base. Click on File button to
modify the data base.
LANGUAGE Click on this button to add a new language to the data base. .
FILE Click on this button to modify the translation data base.
INSERT Click on this button to add the entry in the Translation input field as translation
of the Original Text entry in the selected language.
MODIFY Click on this button to replace the current translation in the Translation input
field as translation of the Original Text entry in the selected language.
DELETE Click on this button to delete the current translation of the Original Text entry in
the selected language.
Update Data Base

After having modified the model, you should search the model for new terms for the translation data base.
These terms are taken from the object properties so that own comments or component part names for the
position flags etc., which were inserted there, can be translated. The program tries to synchronize the
entries with those of the shape data base of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D so that not modified shape
names are not displayed in the translation.
Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the detail center (see -> Component Parts
Overview) to search in the model. Click on the ENLARGE TRANSLATION FROM MODEL entry. The
model is searched for new terms and these are imported.
9.3.9. Transfer Drawing Paths
This function permits you to transfer the drawing numbers saved in the drawing data base or the file paths
of the workshop drawings to the component parts properties of the model drawing.
Thus it is possible to display the drawing numbers of the processed details in the position flags of an
overview. In addition, it would also be possible to export the parts data via AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
standard interface (see function ->'Data Import / Export') and to have them evaluated by foreign programs.
Start Transfer
Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the detail center (see -> Component Parts
Overview) to click on the TRANSFER DRAWING PATHS entry. Then you still have the possibility to verify
the drawing data base of the model, if in the meantime you moved some details or modified the drawing
numbers (see also -> 'Drawing Verification').
After the drawing verification was finished (or if you don't want this option) the following dialog opens:
Dialog Box for Drawing Data Transfer:
Settings:
File Selection: Here you specify which data have to be transferred into the component parts
properties. In addition, you can still add any extra text.
If the Drawing Number field has been checked, the drawing number of the
corresponding 2D-drawing will be transferred.
Only File Name: Only the file name of the 2D-drawing is transferred (without
specification of the path
Full Path: The complete path including the drawing name of the 2D-drawing will
be transferred.
Only Text: Only the text of the 'Prefix' and 'Postfix' fields will be transferred.
In the Prefix input field, you can specify a text which has to be placed in front of
the real data.
In the Postfix input field, you can specify a text which has to be placed behind
the real data.
Target: Here you specify into which property fields of the parts the data have to be
transferred.
Note 1: The data are transferred into the note field 1 of the parts properties.
Note 2: The data are transferred into the note field 2 of the parts properties.
Only Group Links: Only the data of the corresponding group are transferred to
each part in the model; e.g. detailed stiffeners are marked with the reference to
the corresponding group drawing.
All Equal Position Numbers: The data are transferred to all component parts
having the equal position number (separated according to single part and
group) and this even if only the workshop drawing to one of these positions
exists.
Remove before: In all component parts, the contents of the selected property
field are removed before transfer is started.
In general, all existing entries are overwritten, this would, however, permit to
transfer and display the drawing numbers of all parts first and then only the
drawing paths of the groups (the drawing numbers of the single parts would
thus be deleted again).
Now, click on the OK button and the current entries of the drawing data base are transferred according to
your defaults in the component parts properties.
9.3.10. Drawing Verification
Each time when you insert some details in a drawing, a dependence of the component part on the
workshop drawing and vice versa will be saved in the drawing data base of the model drawing. These
saved dependences later permit an automatic update of the workshop drawing (see also ->'Modification
Management') or the transfer of drawing numbers to the component parts properties of the model (see also
->'Transfer Drawing Paths').
These links are the reason for your having to enter a valid drawing name of the destination drawings
before insertion of details. It is also the reason for your having to save the model after insertion.
Nevertheless it may be that you have to modify the physical position of the 2D-drawings after the complete
detailing was finished. This is the case if you have to save them in an assembly folder of the order in the
network. In addition, it may be that you want to move some details from one drawing to the other in order
to add some completions or just because there is not enough place in the drawing any more.
However, if the model has saved the wrong dependences, and the Detail Center thus cannot function
completely as it should, you can correct this subsequently. This correction partly is carried out
automatically, partly by means of your manual support. It is divided into the two areas Drawing Path
Verification and Detail Verification.
Start of Verification
Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center (see ->Component Parts
Overview) and click on the CHECK DEPENDENCES entry. After the note that this function may require
some time and that if need be you can cancel the function, the following dialog opens:
Dialog Box for Drawing Verification (Paths):
At first it is verified whether all paths of workshop drawings saved in the drawing data base still exist. Then,
the drawings which were not found are displayed in the dialog. Now, you have the possibility to set the
paths or drawing names anew.
Settings:
CHANGE PATH Click on this button to change the path of all displayed drawings at the same
time and start a new search. Then, the list either contains the remaining
drawings which are still lacking or the verification function changes to detail
verification.
If you only changed the physical position of the plans on the hard drive, you
don't have to make any further corrections.
DRAWING Click on this button to change the path and/or file name of a certain drawing
selected before in the displayed list.
If a drawing was renamed or if a certain drawing was saved on another physical
place, you can thus make the necessary corrections.
IGNORE Click on this button to ignore the selected drawing during the following
verification. Thus you can also remove deleted drawings.
Please note, however, that you cannot add further drawings. If therefore you
copied and renamed a drawing, please assign the new name to it instead of
ignoring the drawing .
After verification of paths was finished, and any necessary corrections were made, the program passes on
to the verification of the details contained. It is now verified whether all details are contained in the original
or now modified drawings.
Dialog Box for Drawing Verification (Details):
All the details which were not found are now displayed in the list. You have thus the possibility to link any
moved details anew or to remove deleted details.
Settings:
Current Search Path: The current search path used for the 'Search Detail' option is displayed in this
field. You can modify the path by clicking on the right button beside the display.
DRAWING Click on this button to specify the new drawing where a certain detail is which
was selected before in the list. Then, it is verified at once whether the detail is
really situated on the new drawing.
SEARCH DETAIL Click on this button to search for any details not found in the drawings of the
current search path. For this purpose, each drawing will be opened in the
background and searched for all listed details individually.
Please note that each file having the extension *.dwg will be opened as it could
be a workshop drawing. This means that also any existing AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D-models or other AutoCAD-drawings will be opened. You
should therefore take care that only 2D-plans with details are in the list to avoid
unnecessary waiting periods.
IGNORE Click on this button to ignore the selected detail; the original entry is kept. Thus
you can also remove deleted details as you can remove the detail hints from the
drawing data base after end of verification.
Please note, however, that you cannot add further details. If therefore you
moved a detail, please assign the new drawing to it instead of ignoring the
detail.
End of Verification
After the verification has been finished, the assignment is structured anew and the drawing data base is
updated. You still have the possibility now to remove the ignored detail hints from the drawing data base. If
you refrain from doing this, the original entries of these details will be kept and you can repeat the
verification at a later moment.
9.3.11. Direct Detailing
The AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D detail center can also be used to detail parts directly from within the
model or display a preview of the detail. This means dimensions of construction groups can be checked,
or only a few selected parts within a complex building can be detailed.
Perhaps area classes have not been used, but it is now desired to detail a special truss. Large models
pose the problem of being able to identify this part directly.
The detail center offers a few helpful tools, but the following method is even easier:
To detail a component part directly from within the model, select a default detail style first, so that parts
without a detail style can be detailed.
Now highlight the parts to be detailed within the model and then select the context menu via the right
mouse button. Depending on the parts selected, a preview can be created from a single part or a group or
these parts or groups can be detailed directly. Select the desired function from the context menu.
A group can be detailed or displayed in the preview whenever the main part of the group has been
selected.
Direct Detailing
If you want to work with direct detailing you will be prompted to specify if all of the selected parts without a
detail style are to be linked with the default style first. If you confirm this question these parts will be
highlighted in the detail center as well since the linking is permanent. If you answer no to the question only
those parts are detailed, which already have a detail style.
The parts will then be directly detailed or the preview is displayed.
Direct Detailing with Insertion
If additionally valid and saved 2D-workshop drawings are open, the parts can even be inserted into the
drawings directly after detailing.
In the context menu, a list of the valid drawings will be displayed in a subordinate tab of the corresponding
detailing selection (respectively 'Detail Library', not insert). If such a drawing is selected, you will directly
reach the insertion mode for the selected drawing after detailing has been finished. The parts can be
placed there.
9.3.12. Modification Management
The modification mechanism is one of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D's special detail center features.
Once the model has been detailed and any resulting detail blocks have been distributed to the different
workshop plans, the detailing or processing is considered finished.
The next time you load the model most of the entries will appear in green this color signifies that the
detailing of these parts matches the original parts of the model.
However, if you have changed parts of the model they will be shown in red. This tells you that the detail
blocks (and thus maybe the workshop drawings as well) are no longer current and have to be updated.
The program performs this update.
Open A Drawing from Within the Detail Center

Just click on a part in the component list of the detail center (see 'Component Overview') to have a
quick look at a certain workshop drawing.
Now select the context menu and use the OPEN 2D DRAWING option to automatically open the drawing
containing this detail presuming it has been inserted.
The info window for this component will already show if it was inserted or not.
Update Drawings
Any parts highlighted in red can be updated automatically. Select a specific component or a parent and
only the parts contained in these are updated. If you select the "model" entry all parts that have changed
are updated.
Selecting the context menu after having selected the part, use the UPDATE IN 2D DRAWING entry to
activate the modification mechanism.
One by one, all of the affected drawings are opened in the background, the parts are newly detailed and
inserted directly into the original drawing position, replacing the old ones. Should you have one of these
drawings open at the time, you can watch this replacement happen "live" right in front of you.
Depending on the settings in the work tools of component overview, modifications of the details which you
carried out later will be adopted again. This is of course only possible to a limited extent (at the very
moment, moving of position flags and of dimension texts as well as modifications of sketch display at
overviews are adopted).
This procedure might take some time to complete; then all plans are once again current and the latest
detail blocks are ready for insertion. Use the 'Display Only Latest Blocks' option for the insertion to place
the details (see 'Detail Block Overview').
You should remember, however, that the modification mechanism functions optimally only if the tips and
notes from the previous chapters are observed. You should, therefore, work through those chapters very
diligently.
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D will reward you with effective tools to process your assignments efficiently.
Reset Modifications
Before the first detailing takes place, the drawing should be initialized, i.e. it should be set to "zero" . This
will ensure that the modification mechanism functions optimally. You can of course do this always when
you want to continue at a neutral status.
As the component parts in the model remember their modification even during modeling, it may be that the
corresponding markings have already been set. This could cause some irritations. Select the RESET
MODIFICATION FLAGS entry in the context menu of component parts view to reset any existing
information about model modification.
The entries which details are situated on which drawings are kept, as well as the already detailed detail
blocks. Please select the INITIALIZE ALL ANEW entry from the context menu to reset the model
completely.
Please note, however, that now any information will be deleted (unless the assigned detail styles! )
It will then no longer be possible to ask the model where the different component parts were
inserted or to insert component parts already detailed but not yet inserted.
Tip:
This complete initialization is reasonable if you made some detailing beforehand "as a test" or for a
meeting and you now want to create the final workshop plans.
9.3.13. DetailCenter Express!
The DetailCenter Express! is an extension of the DetailCenter to carry out recurring detailing tasks as fast
as possible.
In the actual DetailCenter, you can make exact detailing settings and you can decide for each component
part separately whether and how it has to be detailed and placed on drawings. On the other hand, the
DetailCenter Express! works off the complete detailing according to a pre-set pattern.
Start such a detailing pattern with the preparation of the model for detailing and complete it with clearance
work functions after insertion of the 2D-details in the workshop plans.
TIP: You can define the patterns for different tasks (see ->Patterns function) and then carry out the
detailing with a single mouse click.
As you perhaps know already from the installation assistants of this and other programs, the DetailCenter
Express! will guide you through the necessary settings for the detailing pattern. You only can start detailing
after having made all necessary settings.
For this purpose, the dialog offers you different pages one after the other which can vary depending on
your default settings. In this manual, we can therefore only describe any possible pages in the order of
their being displayed. It can, however, also be that one or more pages don't exist due to your default
settings.
Start the DetailCenter Express

The model has to be saved under a valid drawing name first to be able to work with the
DetailCenter Express! Click on any entry in the component parts list (see ->Component Parts Overview)
of the DetailCenter and select the context menu. Click on the DETAILCENTER EXPRESS! entry and the
following dialog opens:
Main--Dialog Box for the DetailCenter Express!:

Settings:
BACK Click on this button to display the previous page.
MORE Click on this button to display the following page.
PROCEED Click on this button to start detailing. Detailing will be worked off according to
your current settings. In the selection pages, you can watch in a display what is
in process at the very moment
It is true that you can work with AutoCAD or other applications during detailing process, depending on the
computing capacity of your hardware. We recommend, however, to refrain from this!
After the DetailCenter Express! completed its work, you are informed about it in an info box.
Description of the Different Selection Pages

In the following, you will see the different possible selection pages. The pages are displayed in the main
dialog box after having been selected with the buttons MORE and BACK
Each following page depends on your previous settings. If the previous settings are modified, you can
ignore already filled in pages again. Nevertheless, the program will remember the specifications for later
activation. Click on the PROCEED button with the mouse and you can start the process at any time you
like, if your specifications are complete.
Selection Page STARTING PAGE:
This page is always displayed first. Here, you will set which tasks have to be done for you by the
DetailCenter Express! .
Settings:
Selection If the Prepare Detailing field has been checked, you can set which corrections
have to be made first before style assignments and detailing will be started.
If the Connect Single Parts..... field is activated, you can connect single parts
and group parts with detail styles.
If the Connect Groups..... field is activated, you can connect groups with detail
styles.
If the Connect -Views... field has been checked, you can connect views of work
fields as well as plan and top views with detail styles.
If the Detail the Parts field has been checked , you can have the parts detailed
as detail blocks.
Insert Detail Blocks...: You can insert detailed detail blocks into workshop plans
or activate the single sheet drawing output of details.
If single sheet drawing has been selected, the parts will be detailed in any case.
Detailing therefore has not to be activated extra.
Clean Up Detailing: You can set which corrections still have to be made after
end of detailing.
To give you an example: If you want to put out all stiffeners and plates as well as the groups as DIN A-4
single sheet drawings, independent of already existing style assignments, select the following entries on
the starting page: Prepare Detailing (to delete former assignments), Connect Single Parts with Detail Style,
Connect Groups with Detail Style and Insert Detail Blocks/Single Sheet Drawings. There you will make the
further settings.
Hint: Please note that the DetailCenter Express! always works off the complete component parts
list. The list is worked on as if you had transferred the complete model for detailing (see also -
>Detail Center/Component Parts Overview).
Selection Page PREPARE DETAILING:
On this page, you will set which tasks have to be done before starting all further steps.
Settings:
Selection Cancel Writeprotection and Displayflag: Any existing markings are canceled
(see also ->DetailCenter/Component Parts Overview). Thus you can be sure
that all component parts will be seized by the following actions, if desired.
Delete all Current Detail Style Assignments: All detail styles which have already
been assigned before will be separated from the parts. Thus you can be sure
that a detail style will be assigned only to the component parts selected in the
DetailCenter Express!
Reset All Modifyflags ...:. All modify flags set by the program will be reset to
initialize the model. (see also ->DetailCenter/Modification Management).
Remove all Pointer..:. All pointers referring to detailed or inserted detail blocks
entered in the model drawing will be deleted. (see also -
>DetailCenter/Modification Management).
Delete existing Detail Blocks: Former detail blocks in the detail library of the
model will be deleted.
If all fields on this page have been checked, your model drawing will be completely initialized. It is the
same as if a detailing never took place before.
Depending on the time of application of the DetailCenter Express! it is, however, also reasonable to
exclude some points.
Selection Page DETAIL STYLE FOR SINGLE PARTS:
On this page, you make the default settings, which single parts have to be connected with which detail
styles. Both group parts and parts without group are treated here.
The same defaults are valid for automatic connections and for the manual connections in the component
parts list of the DetailCenter (see also ->DetailCenter/Component Parts Overview).
Settings:
Selection In the Selection Lists you choose the desired detail style to assign to the
corresponding component part type. The parts can of course only be recognized
as such if they were created with the corresponding AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL functions.
At style selection, you can differentiate between the detail styles currently
existing in the model drawing and the detail styles saved on the hard drive. If
you select a detail style from the hard drive (marked with an asterisk put first,
e.g. *plates), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the style existing
in the drawing.
Selection Page DETAIL STYLE FOR GROUPS:
On this page, you make the default settings, which groups have to be connected with which detail styles.
Only the groups as such are used for assignment, but not the corresponding single parts (non-recursive
connection).
Settings:
corresponding group type. The type depends on the main part of the group.
e.g. *supports), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the style
existing in the drawing
Selection Page DETAIL STYLE FOR VIEWS:
On this page, you make the default settings, which views on the model have to be connected with which
detail styles.
Settings:
corresponding view.
e.g. *plan view), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the style
existing in the drawing
Selection Page WORK OUT:
On this page, you make the default settings, how the component parts have to be worked out. If you
choose the automatic single sheet output, you don't have to make any additional settings here.
Settings:
Selection Each Position only once: Only one detail block will be created of each position
number, divided into single parts and groups.
Overwrite existing Detail Blocks: Detail blocks having the same position in the
detail library will be overwritten.
Selection Page INSERT DETAILS IN THIS DRAWING:
On this page, you make the default settings, how the worked out detail blocks have to be inserted into the
drawing.
In addition to the actual insertion task, the DetailCenter Express! also permits to fill in the frame field of the
drawing frame as well as to create a parts list. You can select the drawing frame etc. on the following
pages.
Settings:
Selection Automatic Single SheetDetails: A drawing will be created for each single detail
block. Selecting the option ...optimized Scale or ...optimized Size permits to
choose whether the detail scale has to be adopted to the drawing sheet (i.e. to
ignore the default from detail style) or whether a suitable drawing frame has to
be searched for the detail block.
Dispatch Details on the Drawing: Several details will be dispatched
automatically on the drawing according to your defaults.
Use Mark Numbering: At insertion, the mark number will be directly created
according to the current setting in the Detail Center (see also -
>DetailCenter/Insert.
Fill Framefield: The frame field of the drawing frame will be filled with the
corresponding specifications.
Create Partlist: A parts list of the displayed details will be created on the
drawing frame (parts list related to the drawing). See also function ->Drawing
Parts List.
For more detailed information about the drawing frames and how to prepare them for output of frame field
and parts list, please refer to ->Automatic Single Sheet Output.
Selection Page SINGLE SHEET OUTPUT:
On this page, you make the further default settings for the automatic single sheet output. Depending on the
selected output type (optimized scale or optimized size) certain fields are not accessible. For more detailed
information about single sheet output of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D, please refer to ->Automatic
Single Sheet Output.
Settings:
Selection Don't Scale Parts: The parts are displayed without scale. The detail style
settings are ignored
Different Frames for Plates and Groups: Different frames can be set for these
details.
Use alternative Frame at Vertical Format: Details in vertical format can be
equipped with another frame.
Scale File: The file is displayed which is the base for the drawing scales if the
option 'Optimized Scale' has been selected.
Frame File: The file is displayed which is the base for the drawing frame
definitions.
Mark Number File: The file is displayed which is the base for the definitions of
US-mark number, if the 'Use US-mark numbering' option has been selected.
Output Path: The folder is displayed where the completed workshop drawings
will be saved.
If you click on the right button beside the corresponding display, you can modify
the files and paths of the defaults.
Selection Page SINGLE SHEET OUTPUT...DRAWING BORDERS:
On this page, you select the desired drawing border(s) for the single sheet output. For more detailed
information about the drawing borders, please refer ->Automatic Single Sheet Output.
Settings:
Selection In the Selection Lists you choose the desired frame type for the output. Only the
borders defined in the sheet pattern file will be displayed.
It is always the set standard frame which will be used unless there is an
exception for the corresponding detail.
Selection Page FILL FRAMEFIELD:
On this page, you make the default settings for filling in the frame field including the generation of a
drawing number. You can also pre-set under which file name the completed workshop plans have to be
stored.
Settings:
Selection Use DWG information table data: The order data for the frame field are
transferred from the drawing information table of the models (see function -
>Drawing Information). Otherwise, another page containing the order data will
be displayed.
Store as Drawing Number: The file name of the workshop drawing is identical
with the drawing number in the frame field. Otherwise, the current position
number is used at single sheet output or a describing name at compilations.
Start DWG Count at: Enter the page number for the drawing which has to be
created next. In the field Next Page, the current continuous number will be
displayed for your information.
Drawing Number: Enter the structure of the drawing number. You can use three
variables which will be replaced by the current values at drawing generation.
Variables... The available variables at the number are displayed for your
information.
Drawing No. Model: The drawing number of the model drawing is displayed for
your information.
The variables at the number permit you a mixed structure of fixed and current values. They have the
following significations:
# is replaced by the current page number

$ is replaced by the drawing border code (format)
% is replaced by the drawing index
If you want to have drawing numbers like e.g. DWG-A4-Bl.12, DWG-A4-Bl.13 or DWG-A3-Bl.14 ,
enter the value DWG-$-Bl.# as drawing number. The designations A3 and A4 replacing the $ come from
the entries of the sheet pattern file and describe the used sheet format.
Selection Page FILL HEADER...ENTRIES:
On this page, you enter the order data for the fill header. 'Adopt Model Data' option has to be deactivated.
Settings:
Selection You can enter the corresponding data in the Entry Fields. They are inserted into
the framefield.
Selection Page CLEAN UP DETAILING:
On this page, you make the default settings which tasks have to be done after end of detailing or style
assignment.
Settings:
Selection Remove unused Detail Styles: All detail styles which are not connected with a
detail will be removed from the model drawing. Copies on the hard drive are
saved.
Delete View List: Entries existing of manual assignments in the view list of
DetailCenter will be deleted. (see also ->'DetailCenter/View List') .
Delete inserted Detail Blocks: All inserted detail blocks existing in the detail
library will be deleted.
If this field is not activated, the detail blocks e.g. of the single sheet output can
still be used for other purposes.
If the field Save the Model Drawing has been checked, the model drawing will
be saved after completion of the DetailCenter Express! . Otherwise, you have to
save it manually to avoid that the information about the worked out and inserted
details will be lost.
Single Sheet Output

The automatic single sheet output permits to create an individual drawing for each detail to obtain e.g. a
handy compilation of all bracing plates on DIN A-4 sheets or a compilation of documents. Two variants are
offered which, however, have only one difference in procedure.
The first variant is the optimized scale. Here, the program decreases scale until the detail is completely
displayed in the selected drawing border. Scale setting of detail style is ignored and a file with the available
scales is used instead. This avoids use of scales which are not based on practical work or which are not
customary in the corresponding workshop.
The second variant is the optimized size. Here, the component part is worked out as usual with the scale
of the corresponding detail style. Then, the smallest drawing frame will be specified where this part can be
completely displayed.
If the optimization cannot be carried out due to unfavorable defaults (e.g. a 1:10 scale overview on a DIN
A-4 sheet), the best possible variant will be carried out nevertheless and the program hints to the fact that
the detail doesn't match completely.
Scale File
If you selected the 'Optimized Scale' option, the scale selection of the program is based on the entries in
the scale file.
You can thus create specific files for different customers and be sure that no other scales will be used at
the output. In the DetailCenter Express! you can create specific defaults with different files for your
customers.
The file is a text file having the extension .scl, which can also contain some comments marked with a
semicolon at the beginning of the line. The default-file is pro_st3d.scl in the subordinate folder
\format of your AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D-installation.
Structure of a Scale File:
; AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL for AutoCAD 2000 - Scale Definition File

; ----------------------------------------------------------
; Customer: Messrs. XYZ, Hamburg
1:2.5
1:5
1:10
1:20
1:50
1:100
The desired scales are entered per line one after the other, a special order is not required.
Sheet Pattern File
If you select the drawing borders of the selection pages or the 'Optimized Size' option, this selection is
based on the entries in the sheet pattern file.
You can thus create specific drawing borders and insertion definitions for different customers and be sure
that no other frames will be used at the output. In the DetailCenter Express! you can create specific
defaults with different files for your customers.
The file is a text file having the extension .frm, which can also contain some comments marked with a
semicolon at the beginning of the line. The default-file is pro_st3d.frm in the subordinate folder
\format of your AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D-installation.
Structure of a Sheet Pattern File:
The file is divided into the areas header, frame field attributes and the actual frame definitions. All entries
consist of a group name in pointed brackets and the data group of keyword, equals sign and the following
data.
[GROUP NAME]
Keyword1=Data1
Keyword2=Data2
...
You needn't fill in entries which are not required or the complete entry can be omitted.
1) Header Area, Group Name [HEADER]
You enter a short name under the keyword Name (for later program-options) and a short file description
under the keyword Description. The description will then be displayed in the selection page of the
DetailCenter Express!
2) Frame Field Attributes, Group Name [TITLEBLOCK]
Here, you specify which current program data will be transferred into which block attribute of the frame
field at running time. You can thus even specify your own defined frame fields with your own attributes. For
more detailed information about how to assign attributes to blocks, please refer to your AutoCAD-
documentation.
You can assign block attributes to the following keywords. Depending on the settings in the DetailCenter
Express! these are filled with the current values or with the drawing information of the model drawing.
FileName complete path of the created 2D-drawing (Express).

Customer client (Express).
JobName order (Express) or project name of the model
JobNumber order number (Express) or project number of the model
DrawingName component part description with position number (Express) or
drawing name of the model
DrawingNumber drawing number (Express) or drawing number of the model
DrawingPage sheet number (Express).
DrawingIndex drawing index (Express) or drawing index of the model
DrawingScale scale (Express).
DoneBy 'done by' (Express) or 'signed by' of the model
Date 'done on' (Express) or 'signed on' of the model
3) Frame Definitions, Group Name [NAME1], [NAME2] etc.
Here, you enter which drawing frames are used and specify the insertion areas of details and parts list.
Each available frame obtains an own group. The group names then will be displayed in the selection lists
of the DetailCenter Express!
Please note: The keywords Path, SizeX,SizeY and Area1 have to be assigned with current values,
otherwise the frame will not be accepted for selection.
Path complete path of drawing frame If you enter a file name without path, the file
will be expected in the subordinate folder \format of AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D.
SizeX the dimensions of the drawing frame in X-direction
SizeY the dimensions of the drawing frame in Y-direction
Area1 the insertion area of details as 2D-points; specify the lower left and the upper
right corner of the area in the format (x1,y1)-(x2,y2)
DwgNumberCode the code of the drawing frame; this code can be adopted into the drawing
number
ListStyle the name of parts list definition for the drawing parts list (see also ->'Drawing
Parts List).
ListInsertPoint insertion point for the drawing parts list as 2D-point; enter this point in the
format (x,y)
The following two entries describe the position of the point related to the list (on the left at the top etc.). The
list is extended according to this default.
ListHorizontalStart Description of the position of the parts list's insertion point in horizontal
direction. Enter left or right.
ListVerticalStart Description of the position of the parts list's insertion point in vertical direction.
Enter top or down.
If you define your own frames, please note that the lower left point of the drawing frame has the
world coordinates 0,0 and that you store the drawing in top view on the frame. The positive X-axis
is showing to the right, the positive Y-axis to the top.
Enter the frame field as a block with the name of the drawing file (i.g. as block 'dina4', if the
drawing frame has to be saved as 'dina4.dwg'.
The following example once again shows you the most important specifications of a frame definition:
Drawing List
At single sheet output, a drawing list is automatically created as text file.
You can see the position of the corresponding part and the file name of the created drawing in this file. The
drawing number, scale (and whether it is suitable) and drawing frame are displayed as well. The data
depend on the selected type of single sheet output.
Example of a Drawing List:
DetailCenter Express! drawing list

----------------------------------
Output date: 13.02.2001

Output path: d:\ps2000\detail
Output mode: Best scale
Job number:
Model drawing: e:\dwg\halle.dwg
1.) created group drawings
Pos |Scale |Max |Dwg-Number |Dwg-File

====|======|====|=============|==========
100 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A3-Bl.7 |BG100.dwg
101 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A3-Bl.23 |BG101.dwg
103 |1:15 | |DWG-A3-Bl.20 |BG103.dwg
104 |1:10 | |DWG-A3-Bl.4 |BG104.dwg
105 |1:15 | |DWG-A3-Bl.18 |BG105.dwg
2.) created single part drawings
Pos |Scale |Max |Dwg-Number |Dwg-File

====|======|====|=============|==========
1 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A4-Bl.6 |Pos1.dwg
5 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.3 |Pos5.dwg
7 |1:5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.16 |Pos7.dwg
8 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.14 |Pos8.dwg
12 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.8 |Pos12.dwg
14 |1:5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.1 |Pos14.dwg
15 |1:2.5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.21 |Pos15.dwg
16 |1:2.5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.2 |Pos16.dwg
As you can see, the groups Pos 100 and 101 as well as the single parts Pos 1,2 and 6 don't match the pre-
set frame size. The scale 1:50 was the smallest scale pre-set in the scale file.
9.4. Insert 2D Cut Command
Command Name: PS_MAN_CUT

This command is used to insert a cut into 2D details. The prerequisite is that the details are still intelligent
details (see 'Intelligent Details').
You have to select the objects to be considered for the cut first after selecting the command. To select
individual objects from a construction group you have to activate the pick helpers first (see Intelligent
Details/Pick Helpers), otherwise you can only select the group as a whole.
You are then prompted to enter a Cutting Line, which you select by clicking on it or by specifying two
points.
Then you have to indicate the depth of the cut. You can click on the end point of the depth of the cut. By
clicking on this point you specify the line of vision for the cut and decide if any parts located behind it are to
be displayed as well.
The program now calculates a cut, which is then immediately deposited onto the crosshairs from where it
can be easily placed into the drawing.
The following example of a cut on a construction group shows the interconnections:
Example Cut in A Processed Detail
The edge of the cut is located in front of the left stiffener and the depth of the cut extends beyond the head
plate you thus see all of these parts from the right; the shape is cut and the drill holes are invisible.
9.5. Insert Drawing Border Command
Command name: PS_FORMAT

AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D allows you to easily insert drawing frames in different formats and scales.
The program package comes loaded with several sample frames and borders. You can also add your own
frames and borders.
A dialog box gives you access to several well-sorted border variations. You can change your selection any
time during the process.
A drawing border is inserted as a scaled block corresponding to the drawing scale. The matching original
blocks are filed in scale 1:1. After having defined a title block with block attributes within a border, you can
fill it in using the command 'Drawing Info.'
Dialog Box: Inserting Drawing Border
Settings:
Format Size A0-A4: Select the desired drawing borders by clicking the corresponding button.
You can store three variants per sheet size (e.g., different borders for your
customers), which can be accessed directly. By clicking the ASSIGN button,
you can change the field assignments any time
Scale: The drawing border is inserted in the scale entered here.
Active limits: Limit is put on edges of the border to avoid drawing outside of the border. You
can enter limit parameters by clicking ASSIGN button.
Paperspace: If this button is clicked, the border is inserted in paper mode.
Modelspace: If this button is clicked, border is inserted in model space.
Load: By clicking this button, the selected drawing border is inserted and displayed in
maximum size.
Assign: By clicking this button, you can assign different drawing border blocks in order
to format selection fields.
Assigning Drawing Borders
By clicking the ASSIGN button, you can add different borders to the selection or modify the assignments.
The following dialog box is displayed:
Dialog Box: Drawing Border Blocks
Settings:
Size and Variant: Here, you can determine in which selection window the drawing borders can be
selected
In the Size field you enter the format, in the Variant field you determine whether
the border should appear under row 1, 2, or 3.
Path: Here the complete path to the block containing the drawing border is displayed.
By clicking the SELECT button, you can search the file as in Windows.
When creating your own drawing borders blocks, you have to make sure that
these are stored in scale 1:1, otherwise scaling by < means of 'Scale' will not be
performed correctly. Select the lower left corner of your drawing borders as
insertion point.
X-Size and Y-Size Enter the border size (insertion 1:1) in x- and y-direction in these fields. In case
you have activated the "Activate Limits" field, the entered values will be set as
limited parameters. You can also enter other values to define the limits.
Note: This is the drawing border name displayed in the format selection fields of the
main dialog.
9.6. Insert Elevation Command
Command name: PS_KOTE

Using this command, elevations for component parts may be inserted in the drawing. This command may
also be used to insert length and width distances as elevation symbols. The parameters length, width, and
height correspond to the related parameters of the work borders (see command 'Work Borders').
Dialog Box: Inserting Elevations
Settings:
Base Coordinates: Enter the coordinates of origin for Length (Y), Width (X), and Height (Z)
measurements. The picked points will then be referenced to these coordinates.
Usually you enter the origin of the of work borders.
Sizes: Sign size: the size of the elevation symbol.

Text Size: size of text of elevation data.
Scale 1: scale to which measurements are scaled. Here you enter the scale for
details. When selecting the command, the default scale is entered
automatically.
Options: Lines: the elevation symbol is represented as a triangle

Filled: the elevation symbol is represented as a partly filled triangle.
Guide: a tracking center line is drawn from the measuring point to the insertion
point of the elevation symbol.
Lower edge the elevation symbol is reversed, e.g., for indication of the lower
edge.
Example:
Various Elevations
HEIGHT, WIDTH,
LENGTH Select the button representing the selected measurement, and the elevation will
be inserted.
First, click the definition point (measuring point), then you can position the
elevation symbol (ORTHO is activated automatically), and finally you position
the dimension text (ORTHO is deactivated again when it was in the OFF-
position before the function was selected).
9.7. Insert Weld Symbols Command
Command name: PS_WELD

Using the command, weld seams or weld symbols may be inserted in the model or in any kind of 2-D
drawing. To preserve memory, a weld seam in a 3-D model is represented by a line only, but it contains all
necessary data, so that a weld symbol can be added later. After inserting the weld symbol, you can still
change data in the dialog and check the result immediately in the drawing.
A symbol can be composed of an upper and/or a lower part. Since the settings are identical, only one
variation is described here.
Weld seams are objects as well, and allow any kind of alteration at a later date by using the context menu
'Change PS Properties.'
HINT: Define the required seams by using the dialog and store them by using the template function
(see function 'Templates'). This allows fast access to the symbols.
Dialog Box: Inserting Weld Seams / Weld Symbols
Settings (View):
Topside/Bottomside: Enter which data from the 'Properties' tab are to be assigned to the
weld symbol.
If Thickness is clicked, the thickness of the weld seam is displayed.
If Sign is clicked, the weld seam symbol is displayed.
If Length is clicked, the length of the weld seam is displayed.
If Gap is clicked, the value for the gap is displayed.
If Comment is clicked, the comment is displayed.
Line Form: Determine the type of line to be used.

Void: no tracking center line will be displayed.
Line: the tracking center line of single line.
Arrow: an arrow is inserted at point of origin of the tracking center line.
Point: a dot is inserted at point of origin of the tracking center line.
Options: Select the type of weld seam.

All around: the weld symbol is added for an all around weld seam.
Field Weld: the weld symbol is added for an on-site seam.
Replaced: the weld symbol is added for an alternating weld seam.
Text Size: Size of the text
Sign Size: Size of symbol representation
Scale: Enter the scale for the data in the entry fields Label Size and Character Size.
When selecting this function, the default scale is entered automatically.
Add Ref Click this button to add additional tracking or reference lines to an existing weld
symbol. This requires that you first click the respective weld symbol and then on
the new starting point of an additional tracking center line.
Settings(Data):
Thickness: Thickness of the weld seam.
Length: Length of the weld seam.
Gap: Here you can determine gaps in the weld seam.
Comment: You can add comments to the weld symbol.
Add. Length: Additional length details.
Sign: Here you select the type of the weld seam (flat-flap weld, HV weld, etc.)
Flag Click this button and you can insert a weld symbol according to dialog
parameters (e.g., in model projections, workshop drawings).
First click the point of origin of weld symbol (starting point of the tracking center
line) and then position the flag. While determining the flag position, the result is
directly displayed on your screen.
Weld Click this button and insert a weld seam as a line containing dialog parameters
into the model.
By clicking the Display button, you can also add a symbol at a later date.
Display Click this button and you can add a weld symbol to a weld seam at a later date.
First you have to click the Weld Seam and then position the Symbol Flag.
Example
Weld Symbol with Two Tracking

Center Lines
Weld symbols according to sample dialog parameters would look like this:
Example:
Weld symbol for a

circumferential
flat-flap weld on site
9.8. Dimensioning Command
Command Name: PS_DIM

The AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D dimensioning commands allow dimensioning of component parts and
groups automatically in the drawings as well as manual dimensioning with useful help functions.
For example, the overall view of the model, individual component parts or groups may be dimensioned for
control purposes; then details may be created manually (see function 'DetailCenter/Views
Overview/Manual Detailing') in cases where automatic detailing is not suitable for your application. In
addition, all major standard functions of regular AutoCAD dimensioning are available for revision or
modification of 2-D workshop drawings.
The dimensioning functions are principally based on the settings for detailing style (dimensioning),
therefore general settings like AutoCAD dimensioning style, optimization, etc. have to be executed in the
respective dialog box and then serve as defaults (see 'Detailing Style/All Tabs for Dimensioning'). The
detailing style dialog can also be accessed using the dialog box described below.
Use the DetailCcenter to define a new style (see DetailCenter / Define Detail Style / New Style).
HINT: Before starting manual dimensioning, please check the settings of the detailing style. You
also have to take care that the settings of scale and scaling are correct. Please refer to the chapter
"Detailing" and carefully read through the chapter "Dimensioning Style"
Dialog Box for Dimension Setting:

Settings:
Settings: Here, you set the general direction of dimensioning as well as some other useful
options.
Direction Horizontal: The manual dimension chain is always running in
horizontal direction.
Direction Vertical: The manual dimension chain is always running in vertical
direction.
Direction Aligned to Line: The dimension chain is running in the same direction
like a pre-set line. To carry out the function, click on the line determining the
direction .
This is the optimal method to dimension along a diagonal shape by clicking on a
shape line.
Any Direction: The dimension chain is running in the direction determined by the
two points picked first. This is for example reasonable when there isn't any line
to be clicked on.
Arc Dimension: You can dimension the length of an arc.
Angle Dimension: You can dimension an angle.
Choose Position: You can choose the position of the dimension chains at
automatic parts dimensioning. If this field is not checked, the settings of detail
style are valid for the distances of dimension chains.
Continuing DimChain: A dimension chain can be built continuously by clicking
on individual points. If this field is not checked, you have to continue
dimensioning single distances. See Dimension Chains.
In Element Context: Shape shortenings are evaluated at manual linear
measures if the part to be dimensioned still is an intelligent detail . Click on
the Reference Shape first.
In the Scale 1: input field, you enter the plot scale of the drawing to scale text
sizes correctly.
Len Scale: Here you enter the length scale if your component parts were scaled
in a scale. You enter e.g. the value 10 if you have selected the scale 1:10 with
object scaling at detailing. The details now have been decreased by factor 10.
Fence Chain Dimension: Here you determine the dimension chains to be created for fence chain
dimension. Please refer to Fence Chain Dimension for more detailed
information about this function.
Work Frame: A dimension chain is created stretching only over fence points of
work frame auxiliary lines.
Shape Center: A dimension chain is created stretching only over fence points of
shape centers.
Shape Edges: A dimension chain is created stretching only over fence points of
shape edges.
Overall Dim: A dimension chain is created stretching over the outer dimensions
of the structure.
All Points: A dimension chain is created stretching over the selected fence
points. This allows you to mix different reference points. You can select from the
points: work frame, shape center, shape edges (as described above) and other
(any AutoCAD-elements; terminals with lines, center with circles etc.).
Style Selection: Here you determine the detail style your dimensioning has to be based on.
SINGLE PART Click on this button to dimension a shape or any plate automatically. The
relevant points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in
detail style and the dimension chains are created according to the
corresponding defaults. Pre-selection of a direction isn't of any importance here.
You have to click on the part to be dimensioned. If the 'Choose Position' option
has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position
you like.
GROUP Click on this button to dimension a group automatically. The relevant points for
dimensioning are determined according to the settings in detail style and the
dimension chains are created according to the corresponding defaults. Pre-
selection of a direction isn't of any importance here.
You have to click on any part of the group you like. If the 'Choose Position'
option has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any
position you like.
INSERT DIM Click on this button to insert a dimension in an existing dimension chain. The
other dimensions will be adapted.
Click on a dimension of the desired dimension chain as reference dimension
first. Then you select all dimensions belonging to this chain (The program filters
the dimensions which are not situated in a line with the reference dimension).
Now, the dimension chain will be reconstructed and you can then insert the
desired new dimension.
DELETE DIM Click on this button to delete a dimension from an existing dimension chain. The
other dimensions will be adapted.
Click on a dimension of the desired dimension chain as reference dimension
first. Then you select all dimensions belonging to this chain (The program filters
the dimensions which are not situated in a line with the reference dimension).
Now, the dimension chain will be reconstructed and you can then select the
dimension to be deleted.
END PLATE Click on this button to dimension an end plate automatically. The relevant points
for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in detail style and the
dimension chains are created according to the corresponding defaults. Pre-
selection of a direction isn't of any importance here.
You have to click on the end plate first and then the connecting shape (This is
the shape to which the end plate belongs). If the 'Choose Position' option has
been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position you
like.
SINGLE DIM Click on this button to create a single dimension.

Linear Dimension: Click on the first and second dimension point as well as the
position of the dimension line. The dimension is aligned according to the
direction. If you selected 'To Line', you have to click on the line determining the
direction before clicking on the points.
If you selected the option In Element Context , you have to click on the
reference shape first.
Arc Dimension: Click on the center of the arc first and then the starting point and
end of the arc (the end will be corrected correspondingly). Afterwards, you pick
the dimension line position. An arc is principally looked on anti-clockwise from
beginning to end.
Angle Dimension: Click on the vertex of the angle first and then the end of the
first and second side. Afterwards, you pick the dimension line position. An angle
is principally looked on anti-clockwise from beginning to end.
DIM CHAIN Click on this button to create a dimension chain out of several dimensions. Click
on the position of the dimension line first and then the points to be dimensioned.
The dimensions are aligned according to the direction. If you selected 'To Line',
you have to click on the line determining the direction before clicking on the
position of the dimension line.
If you selected the option In Element Context , you have to click on the
reference shape first.
If you selected the option Continuing DimChain , you are dimensioning

according to the AutoCAD-dimensioning function Continue. If this option has
not been activated, you continue indicating pairs of points for all dimensions
following the first one. Thus, interrupted dimension chains can be created. See
also Dimension Chains.
FENCE CHAIN Click on this button to create a fence chain dimensioning. The dimensions are
aligned according to the direction. If you selected 'To Line', you have to click on
the line determining the direction first. See also Fence Chain Dimension'.
DETAIL STYLE By clicking on this button, the dialog for setting parameters for the detail style is
displayed. If you move to another style in the 'Style Selection' list, the data in
detail style dialog will be updated.
Thus you can compare the settings of different styles.
Dimension Chains
During the acquisition of the measurement points the dimension chains are able to capture the points
correctly even if the dimensions have been indicated in a different sequence or if the dimensions overlap.
The picture below illustrates the interconnections:
Example (1) shows a dimensioning using the "Continuing Dimension Chain' option and the following
sequence: First, click the distance C/F, then point D, and finally point A.
Example (2) shows the result if the first dimensioning is like (1) and the next input is the dimensioning of
the distance from the dotted line to point B. The 'Combine Identical Dimensions' option in the detail style is
active as well (since A/B, B/C, and C/D were created!).
Example (3) shows a dimension chain without the 'Continuing Dimension Chain' option. The following was
dimensioned: The distance A/C and then D/E. A new measurement of the distance B/F would now divide
the distance of 400 and create a second measurement from point E to F.
Fence Dimensioning
Fence dimensioning is a semi-automatic dimensioning mode, where the program determines the relevant
points for dimensioning in several different objects. Once this is done, you can position the dimensioning
lines. Via pre-settings for "Fence Chain Dimensioning " you can select the dimension chains and the
reference points. With the settings for "Direction" you have determined the general dimensioning direction.
This figure gives you an example for fence dimensioning. Select the objects (here shapes and work
borders), then highlight the points set under "fence chain dimension." You can manually add more fence
points by clicking the area and delete them again by clicking.
The program then prompts you to determine the insertion points for the dimension lines for highlighted
dimension chains. The dimension line is then inserted and the dimension extended to the outer edge.
Please note that the setting "All Points" creates one single dimension chain stretching over all fence points.
This allows for fast registration of all points, but you might have to move several dimensions manually.
Direct Use of the Functions

All dimensioning functions can be selected via direct calls. The dimensioning direction is also selected via
this function.
Single Horizontal: PS_DIM_SHO
Single Vertical: PS_DIM_SVE
Single To Line: PS_DIM_SLN
Single Free: PS_DIM_SFR
Chain Horizontal: PS_DIM_MHO
Chain Vertical: PS_DIM_MVE
Chain To Line: PS_DIM_MLN
Chain Free: PS_DIM_MFR

Angle Dimension: PS_DIM_ANG
Arc: PS_DIM_RAD
Single Part automatic: PS_DIM_SDF
Pick Single Part: PS_DIM_SPK
Group automatic: PS_DIM_PDF
Pick Group: PS_DIM_PPK

9.9. Cut Out 2D Command
Command name: PS_CUT_OUT

Using this command, you can cut any 2D lines at a polyline at the same time. After selecting the
command, you have to pick the points of the polyline. The same command functions are available as
when drawing an AutoCAD polyline.
All of the lines extending past the polyline are cut off at this line.
HINT: If you want to cut out "intelligent" AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D 2D objects using this
command (e.g., shapes after detailing), you first have to explode them to form AutoCAD lines.
Remember, however, that the objects then will have lost their properties.
9.10. Shortening 2D Shapes
Command name: PS_SHORT2D

Since shapes are shown in full scale during detailing, they may sometimes be very long and not fit in the
drawing. Under certain circumstances, you might deliberately want to have some out-of-scale shapes
(lengthwise) in your drawing, e.g., if large areas of the components do not have any drill holes or similar
features.
This command allows you to shorten finished shapes in a way that areas with many details remain
unchanged and a break is inserted in an insignificant area. The figure below shows the original shape and
then the shortened display (slightly enlarged).
Select this command and you will be first prompted for the shape to be shortened and then for the lower
left corner and then for the upper right corner of the shape shortening. If you now press the ESC key, the
shortening is automatically determined and carried out. If you want to dimension the shape manually later,
you can then consider the shortening as well (see command 'Dimensioning').
10. Import, Export, Interfaces
10.1. Data Exchange with AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
It is possible to send and receive data to and from other programs via the import and export interfaces of
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D. In most cases, these are 3D-constructions of other CAD-programs or the
static systems of programs for static calculations. The exchange takes place via a special file format
defined by independent standard committees (like e.g. Deutscher Stahlbauverband DSTV (German
Association of Steel Construction) or even by the program manufacturers themselves. The data to be
exchanged are mostly saved as ASCII-text file; therefore they are independent of the used operating
systems. In case of possible transfer problems they can be adapted with any text editor you like.
Additionally to the acknowledged formats, AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D also has its own exchange
format based on a clear text file. This format exactly describes the positioning and detailing of component
parts, group structure and parts list or part information.
Data Exchange in Practice

In practice, data are often exchanged between CAD and static programs. This exchange is limited to the
exchange of systems. A static system is created for the rough analysis of costs (determination of the
expected cross-sections). Then the system is transferred to the CAD-program to create overviews or
visualizations for the offer.
At the following construction, a more detailed model of the system is created and could be retransmitted to
the static program to carry out more detailed calculations. After construction, however, it occurs quite often
that special NC-production data for DCC machines are transmitted which contain already all shape
detailing processess. In addition, the parts list data are transferred to the corresponding PPS systems for
storing and for the placing of orders.
Data Transfer Problems

AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D has a great number of interfaces to allow for a universal use. There should
always be a common denominator to be found for the data exchange. The volume of exchangeable
information always depends on the complexity of interface definition and the corresponding implementation
degree of transmitter and receiver.
It might be that AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D could interpret the complete 3D-model including all
connections as file of a certain interface, the writing program, however, can only write the position of
standard shapes. In this case, important data will of course be lost during transfer and would have to be re-
modeled - if necessary.
Interface Format Selection
Import and export of the new AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D interfaces like PXF or Product Interface Steel
Construction is affected via a common dialog box for all interfaces, which will be described in this chapter.
In addition, the commands of formats like DSTV-NC or DSTV-PPS which are already existing for quite
some time, are still available. These are described in a separate chapter and cannot (yet) be loaded via
the common dialog.
When the import or export command is loaded, a File Selection Dialog opens first, where you can select
the required interface format under File Type. If an Interface Dialog is planned for the interface, this dialog
appears in form of individual pages in a dialog box which is identical for all formats. In addition, a page for
General Settings can be displayed where you can enter data which are independent of the corresponding
interface. See also -> Import and -> Export command.
The following figure shows the dialog box. In this example, the common page General Settings is
available.
Interface Dialog for Data Exchange (Dialog Box)

Settings:
Control Field, Options: Individual pages of the selected interface.
General Settings: Common page for all interfaces, see also -> Import and -> Export command.
Status Line: The information about the current import or export process is displayed.
CONTINUE: By clicking this button, import or export will be continued, if the selected
interface command is waiting for further specifications or if the process has
been stopped for your information.
Please refer to the above Status Line or to the individual pages for more
detailed information.
ERROR REPORT: By clicking this button, you can view an error report, if it is created by the
selected interface command.
In this error report, you are e.g. informed whether errors occurred in a read file
or whether certain data cannot be evaluated by AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D.
VIEW FILE: If you click this button, the read or created interface file will be displayed, if it is
an ASCII text file.
In the following chapters, you will find a description of the different interfaces and of their property pages.
In most cases, a description of the interface formats can be obtained by the corresponding manufacturers
or standard committees.
10.2. Data Import Command
Command Name: PS_IMPORT

This command allows for importing data of other programs in AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D via an
exchange file. In most cases, these data are 3D-models of other CAD-programs or the static systems of
programs for static calculations.
At printing of this manual, the following interfaces have already been integrated in the new arranged import
dialog:
DSTV Product Interface Steel Construction (*.stp)

PXF Data Exchange Format (*.pxf)
STAAD III (*std)
It is, however, possible that you will find already further formats in your AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
version. The performance range of the interfaces (implementation degree) can have been extended, too.
Please refer to the up-dated hints on your installation-CD.
Import Data
When this function is loaded, a File Selection Dialog opens where you can select the required interface
under File Type. Then, you select the file to be imported. Depending on the interface, an Interface Dialog
opens where you can make further specifications concerning the data to be imported. Please refer to the
description under -> Data Exchange with AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D for more detailed information.
After file selection resp. after confirmation of import process in the dialog, the data are evaluated and the
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D model is created. Depending on the complexity of the interface and on the
volume of the data, this process may take some time. You are, however, informed about the current state
in the AutoCAD-command line or in the interface dialog. After the creation of the model has been finished,
a note box will be displayed.
Working Areas
A working area can be created automatically to permit you to work with the basic views of the imported
model immediately. A rectangular working area will be created approximately describing the outer
dimensions of the model (only the end points of the shape axes are considered at the calculation ). See
also ->General Settings. This is an ideal starting point for the control of the imported model resp. for the
creation of further views.
Unknown Shapes and Material Names

As the data in the exchange formats mostly are the used shapes and plates, it is recommended to provide
all existing shape data bases correctly. You should do this above all if you import constructions containing
foreign shape series.
You will find the standard designation for the data exchange in the TRANS.METIC and TRANS.ZOLL
fields of the *.dbf-files of the shape data base (see ->Shape Data Base Command). For the DIN shape
series this is e.g. the designation according to the DSTV defaults. The import command expects exactly
these names in the exchange files and uses them to determine the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D access
code (see ->Insert Shapes Command).
If the name is not existing, the shape is considered to be unknown. A dialog appears where you can assign
a AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D shape to the unknown shape.
Dialog for replacing shape

names
Enter the access code in the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D shape name input field or select the shape
from a list by clicking SELECTION button. The shape type is displayed first at selection (e.g. HEA). After
having selected the type, you can select the required shape from the existing shape sizes by double
clicking the entry.
The determined assignment is only valid for the current load of import command. If you want to keep the
assignment permanently, you have to check the Keep Assignment permanently field. The shape
replacement is now saved and will be available later for this or other import commands.
The assignment of unknown designations is also available for material names. The process is the same as
described under shape names.
General Settings
If the interface dialog is available in the selected import command, it can also contain a page for General
Settings apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the
import process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields
are not activated.
Interface Dialog, GENERAL SETTINGS Tab:
Settings:
Create Error Report: If this field is checked, an error report will be created during import and model
generation. You can see here which data are defective or which cannot be
evaluated by AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D.
If such an error report was created, you can display it by clicking the Error
Report button in the dialog box.
Create Working Area

Automatically: If this field is checked, a working area of 6 basic views will be created with the
help of the outer dimensions of the imported model. In the Name input field, you
can indicate the name of the working area. If it still exists, the new views obtain
the index 2.
Connect Shapes
After Import: If this field is checked, continuous shape parts (bars) will be connected to a
common shape. Only those shapes are connected which have the same size
and position, which are situated on a common axis and which dont exceed a
preset distance of the end points.
Max. Distance: Enter the maximum distance which is allowed for the end points
to be connected to be recognized as continuous shape. Enter a tolerance in the
Tolerance Value input field for possible deviations of the gusset coordinates.
This is reasonable when you import data of static programs as these are
generating a system of bars from gusset to gusset (e.g. plate connections)
although in reality it is a continuous shape.
Example for shape connection
The static program transfers this system as 4 bars of 1-2, 2-3,4-2 and 5-2. Four
shapes are created first which are connected in the way that there will be one
remaining shape of 1-3 and one of 4-5.
Supposed the fact that bars of 1-2, 2-3,4-4a and 5-5a were transferred, the bars
4-4a and 5-5a would only be connected to a shape if the distance of 4a to 5a
was smaller than indicated in Max. Distance input field.
10.3. Data Export Command
Command Name: PS_EXPORT

This command allows for exporting data of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D into other programs via an
exchange file. In most cases, these data are 3D-models as static system or the position and detailing of
single shapes.
At printing of this manual, the following interfaces have already been integrated in the new arranged export
dialog:
DSTV Product Interface Steel Construction (*.stp)

PXF Data Exchange Format (*.pxf)
STAAD III (*std)
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Standard Interface (*.ps3)
It is, however, possible that you will find already further formats in your AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
version. The performance range of the interfaces (implementation degree) can have been extended, too.
Please refer to the up-dated hints on your installation-CD.
Export Data
When this function is loaded, a File Selection Dialog opens where you can select the required interface
under File Type. Then, you select the file to be exported. Depending on the interface, an Interface Dialog
opens where you can make further specifications concerning the format. Please refer to the description
under -> Data Exchange with AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D for more detailed information.
After file selection resp. after confirmation of export process in the dialog, the model data are evaluated
and the data record is created. Depending on the complexity of the interface and on the volume of the
data, this process may take some time. You are, however, informed about the current state in the
AutoCAD-command line or in the interface dialog. After the data generation has been finished, a note box
will be displayed.
General Settings
If the interface dialog is available in the selected export format, it can also contain a page for General
Settings apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the
export process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields
are not activated.
Interface Dialog, GENERAL SETTINGS Tab:
Settings:
Create Error Report: If this field is checked, an error report will be created during export and file
generation. You can see here which model data cannot be evaluated by
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D for the interface.
If such an error report was created, you can display it by clicking the Error
Report button in the dialog box.
Create Additional
Gussets at Connec-
tions:: If this field is checked, continuous shapes at connections or theoretical points of
intersection with other shapes will be divided.
Max. Distance: Enter the maximum distance which is allowed for the end point
of a shape towards the continuous shape to be recognized as shape to be
divided. In the Min. Bar Length input field, you enter the minimum length of the
bar which has to be created by the division. If this length is smaller, a division
will not be made and eccentricities will be determined instead.
This is reasonable when you export data to static programs as these are
expecting a system of bars from gusset to gusset (e.g. plate connections)
although in reality it is a continuous shape. As AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
of course cannot be as specialized as a static program, you can switch off this
option by this way, if the static program offers better functions for this purpose.
Example for shape division:
The AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D model has the shapes of 1-2, 3,4 and 5-6.
The shape of 1-2 is divided first into two parts of 1-6a and 6a-2.
Another division of the new created shape 1-6a and two other parts 1-4a and
4a-6a is made, if the resulting two bars have at least the same length as
indicated in Min. Bar Length input field.
10.4. New Interfaces
In this chapter, you will find a description of the interface dialogs and implementation degrees of the
different interfaces. Please note, however, that this is the state at printing of the manual and that your
current AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D version can have been extended in the meantime. Please refer to
the up-dated hints on your installation-CD.
As the implementation degree of import and export can differ from each other, these areas are treated
separately at each interface description. These are data which can be interpreted or written by AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D at the very moment the import exchange file might however contain further data
which could be read at a later moment.
Due to their data structure, most of the interfaces support this selective reading of data. Load data of static
programs can e.g. be assigned to an element, the position in the space as well. If the load data cannot be
evaluated, this doesnt have any influence on the interpretation of position.
10.4.1. DSTV Product Interface Steel Construction
The product interface steel construction of the German Association of Steel Construction (DSTV) is a
relatively new data exchange format of all the programs participating in a production process.In a
standardized format, it contains the data exchange between e.g CAD and static programs, PPS-systems
or DCC-machines and ideally is meant to replace the previous formats after good long testing.
File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.stp
The interface format was revised several times in the past, AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is only
supporting the latest valid version.
Data Import
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is able to evaluate the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates,
i.e. the position of the parts in the space without detailing processes and connection elements. Plates, the
contours of which are transferred as polygons are displayed correctly. If the shape was, however, created
by cuts or similar things, this information would be lost and only the mostly rectangular basic solid would
be displayed. In addition, the static system for standard shapes can be read, i.e. the position of the parts in
the space including eccentricities.
After File Selection, it is verified whether this is a valid file of this interface. Then the header area is read
and displayed in the appearing Interface Dialog. The import can still be interrupted here, if you recognize
that the wrong file was selected. Click on the CONTINUE button of the dialog box to continue the import.
The data record is analyzed and the function recognizes itself whether it is a matter of CAD or static data
or whether both data types are together in a common file.
Before the actual model generation will take place, you once again have the possibility to make individual
import settings. You start model generation by once again clicking the CONTINUE button. You could e.g.
select which data type has to be preferred at a common file or whether a working area has to be created,
etc.
Interface Dialog Import, CONTROL FIELD Tab:
This page shows the entries of the exchange file header and doesnt accept any further settings. You can
only interrupt the import process if it isnt the required file.
Interface Dialog Import, OPTION Tab:

Settings:
Ignore not supported

entries: If this field is checked, unknown interface commands of the current
implementation degree are ignored and cannot be re-exported. This means that
only those entries remain in the file which can be processed by AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D.
This option is provided for a later implementation degree of the interface. In this
degree, it will be possible to manage modifications and to transfer unknown
data 1:1. If need be, the references will be up-dated.
Position Numbers in
Shape Data...: If this field is checked, the imported position numbers will be adopted into the
parts properties.
Control Entries in
Shape Data...: If this field is checked, the reference numbers and codes of the exchange file
parts will be adopted into the shape properties. This facilitates finding mistakes
or incomplete data resp. controlling the origin of modification.
Format Selection: Here, you select which data of a mixed file are decisive for the model
generation.
Prefer CAD at mixed data: The CAD elements (component parts) are preferred
and any possible static data are only evaluated as additional information.
Prefer Static at mixed data: The static elements (bars) are preferred and any
possible CAD data are only evaluated as additional information. This is an
option for a later implementation degree.
Data Export
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is able to export the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates,
however without detailing processes and connection elements. A plate made out of a number of polygons
is exported correctly. If it was, however, created by detailing processes, only the basic polygon will be
output. In addition, the static system for standard shapes can be written. Depending on the settings on the
General Settings page, it is tried to determine intermediate gussets for connections and eccentricities.
After file selection, you can enter the header area specifications in the appearing interface dialog.
Click on the CONTINUE button of the dialog box to continue the export. The model is analyzed and the
export data record is prepared according to your settings on the Option page. The data then are written in
the selected file by once again clicking the CONTINUE button.
ex
Interface Dialog Export, CONTROL FIELD Tab:
Settings:
Output File: You can see the selected output file as this name is entered in the exchange
file.
Detailed by:, Company: In the input fields, you enter the variable header area data or the part code
(authorization).
Authorization: The authorization is entered in the header area and builds - together with a time
mark - the code for the origin resp. the modification of a component part. The
modification management, however, is provided only in a later implementation
degree of the interface.
ex
Interface Dialog Export, OPTION Tab:
Settings:
Data Selection: Export Only CAD data: The model data are exported as CAD system data
(component parts).
Export Only Static data: The model data are exported as static system (bars).
Export mixed CAD/Static data: A file of CAD and static data is written. The
CAD-data are preferred and the static data describe the static system of these
CAD data. This is an option for a later implementation degree.
10.4.2. AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Standard Interface
The AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Standard interface is an exchange format of its own to put the
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D model data at the disposal of other programs. The format puts a rather
exact copy of the construction including detailing processes at disposal. This is the reason why foreign
programs can evaluate its data for their different requirements.
File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.ps3
The file structure follows the example of Windows *.ini files and is mainly self-explaining. The complete
data records are always output serially for each single component part. References dont have to be
resolved during evaluation. In addition, references are created by indication to permit this kind of
evaluation, too.
You can obtain a detailed description of the data structure for the development of your own import routines
in your programs at any time you like.
Data Export
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D can export the model data including detailing processes, group structure,
parts list data and drawing information. In addition the used bolts are output, too.
Concerning detailing processes, holes, cuts, polycuts and rectangular copes are transferred at the very
moment. In case of detailing by means of Boolean operations between the component parts, this
information will be lost because they are not evaluated. Furthermore, only the names of special shapes are
transferred at the moment, but not their cross-sections.
ex
Interface Dialog Export, SETTINGS Tab:
Settings:
Bolts Data Output: If this field is checked, all bolts existing in the model and being assigned to a
group will be output.
Detailing Processes
Output: If this field is checked, all detailing processes of component parts are output.
Apart from that the output is only limited to the position of shapes and plates as
well as to their parts list data to keep the file small e.g. for mere parts list
programs.
Floating Point
Output: Here, you preset the accuracy of floating point numbers like coordinates. The
complete number of decimal places is always output, if need be filled up with
noughts.
Length/Size Accuracy: Enter the accuracy for all values except for the
coordinate points.
Coordinate Accuracy: Enter the accuracy for all values of coordinate points.
Inches as Fraction: In drawings, the sizes are output in the imperial system e.g.
1-2 3/8. Otherwise, the decimal value is output in inches (in our example
14.375).
10.4.3. STAAD III Interface
The STAAD III interfaces serve for the exchange of static systems between the programs of STAAD
program family and AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D. Data can also be exchanged with any kind of software
being able to interpret this format.
File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.std
The exchange format corresponds to the output file of the graphic editor of this program family.
Data Import
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is able to evaluate the static system data for standard shapes, i.e. the
position of the parts in the space including eccentricities. Please note that it is not possible to interpret all
shortened display forms like REPEAT etc. in the data format of the exchange file. The list shortenings of
the form n TO m are, however, understood.
Data Export
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is able to export the static system for standard shapes. Depending on the
settings on the page General Settings, it is tried to determine even intermediate gussets for connections
and eccentricities.
10.4.4. PXF Interface
The PXF interface serves for the exchange of constructions between the programs of REBIS program
family and AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D. Data can also be exchanged with any kind of software being
able to interpret this format.
File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.pxf
Data Import
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is able to evaluate the data group 4000 for standard shapes, i.e. the
position of the parts in the space. In addition,general data groups and coordinates which are necessary for
transfer are evaluated.
Data Export
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D is able to export the data group 4000 for standard shapes. In
addition,general data groups and coordinates which are necessary for transfer are exported.
10.5. Previous Interfaces
In the following chapter, you will find the description of the interfaces which have already been integrated
in AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D for quite some time. They cannot or not yet be controlled via the
common import and export dialog. You can reach these interfaces by their own command names and each
single interface has its own user control which often differs from the others.
This does, however, not mean that the used file format corresponds to an outmoded state. The content of
the data is always on the latest passed version of the standard committees. All these formats have proved
their worth in practice and are intensively used there.
10.5.1. DSTV PPS Interface
Command name: PS_PPS

Using this interface, data can be transferred from the parts lists under AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D to a
PPS (Production, Planning, and Control) program. The data is transferred as an ASCII file.
PPS data generation is made according to the rules of the DSTV interface description CAD parts lists
rd
issued in November 1997 (3 edition).
After having created the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D 3D-work frame and carried out positioning (basic
requirement), the PPS data can be generated. Use AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D menu item OTHER /
GENERATE PPS DATA.
The following dialog box will be displayed:

Settings:
Head (Title Block) Data
Here, the title block data of the data records 1 through 5 of the PPS file are defined.
Work Num.
Enter the work No. (max. 2 digits. It will appear in data record No. 1 of the PPS file.
Order No.
Enter the order No. (max. 8 digits). It will appear in data record No. 2 of the PPS file.
Draw No.
Enter the drawing No. (max. 3 digits). It will appear in data record No. 4 of the PPS file.
Index
Determine the revision index of the drawing (max. 1 character). It will also appear in data
record No. 4 of the PPS and is added to the drawing number. A revision index defined in
the title block (Rev. Index) will make this information superfluous.
Worker in charge (12 characters). It appears in data record No. 5 of the PPS file.
Definition of a name in the title block will make this information superfluous.
Output Weight
Output of internally calculated weights. Otherwise, no output will take place, and the values will be given
by the PPS.
Output Area
Output of internally calculated surfaces. Otherwise, no output will take place, and the values will be given
by the PPS.
According to DSTV
The order of the panels is according to the DSTV standards. Apart from this, you can determine yourself
the order by entering the values 1-27 in the input fields under Panel Order
.
Material=Name+Material
The name of the component part is set in front of the material name.
Header
The header is output.
Delimiter
The delimiters of data records are determined.
Title Block (Drawing Head)

These are the optional panels of the title block. They will appear in data record No. 9.
Change Index
Define the revision index (1 character) of the drawing. When this panel is used, the Title
Block Data / Index panel will be superfluous.
Subassembly/Construction Group
Definition of subassembly (3 digits)
Marking
Definition of subassembly (30 digits)
Surface
Surface finish
Addition %
Addition to weight (per cent)
Worker
Name of the person in charge
TB Date
Enter the date of engineering
For License
Date on which the drawing has been presented for approval
Of License
Date on which the drawing has been returned after approval
For testing
Date on which the drawing has been transferred to the test engineer
Release for Production

Date of release for production
File
By clicking this button, you define the path in the PPS data output file. PPS file name and path can be
freely defined by the user, but they should contain order and drawing number.
Template
The input can be used as template.
OK
When you quit the dialog box using OK, you are prompted to select the parts for which the NC data to be
generated. After selection, their structure is analyzed, and the data records of the PPS file are generated.
For a better control of the parts already processed, these parts are deleted on the screen. By using the
command PS_REGEN, you can recall the parts.
Hints for Transfer to Knieriem

Since the Knieriem system cannot process different groups of components having the same main part as
PosNo 12.1 or 12A, these groups require special handling.
In such cases, use the option 'Positioning/Options/Differentiation Groups 25-Max+1' in order to obtain
different numbers. The Knieriem system will accept these numbers without any problem, since they are
handled as Z parts. If you want all component groups to be handled as Z parts, turn off the option
'Transfer Mainpart Group' and enter a start value for group positioning.
Description Reference
The material designations are based on:

nd
Uniform designations for data exchange in steel constructions, issued August 1993 (2 edition)
Example for a PPS-File
************************************************************
** PPS DATA FILE created by AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D PPS MODULE V 1.00**
**
** Time 13:49
** Date 25. 7.1996
**
************************************************************
0&@
1&11
2&2222222
4&33&3
5&gggg
9&&&&&&&&&&&
S&M 16 x 70 DIN 6914&70&40&5000&6&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&1
H&FL 120x20&315&120&11&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 18.876&&&&&6&&1
H&BRFL 160x15&239&160&14&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 18.876&&&&&4&&1
H&BLECH 8x791x864&864&790&8&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 26.187& 0.416&&&&&&1
H&IPE 240&3481&120&4&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 30.700&&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 240x15&309&240&12&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 28.314&&&&&2&&1
H&BLECH 8x488x499&499&488&10&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 7.661& 0.122&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 160x10&698&160&9&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 12.584&&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 200x10&1030&200&6&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&&&1
H&BLECH 10x84x95&95&84&18&4&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.423& 0.005&&&&&&1
S&M 16 x 60 DIN 6914&60&30&5001&12&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&1
H&BLECH 10x95x168&168&94&15&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.423& 0.005&&&&&&1
H&BLECH 10x65x114&114&65&17&4&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.247& 0.003&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 200x10&985&200&7&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 200x10&280&200&13&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&4&&1
H&HE 200 A&3850&200&2&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 42.300&&&&&9&&1
H&IPE 240&4317&120&1&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 30.700&&&&&&&1
H&HE 140 A&580&140&5&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 24.700&&&&&1&&1
H&FL 140x20&152&140&16&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 22.022&&&&&4&&1
S&M 16 x 45 DIN 7990&45&20&5002&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&1
10.5.2. DSTV-Statics Interface
Command name: PS_STATIK

Using this interface, information from a structural analysis program (e.g., Dlubal) can be directly transferred
into the work frame, provided that the structural analysis program is in compliance with the DSTV interface
convention Structural Analysis / CAD issued in Feb. 1992.
This interface can read and process data as described herein.
Please note that the format mentioned previously does not give port definitions. Only the correct shapes
can be entered in the defined position.
Herein, the bi-directional information flow of the statics CAD Statics is described. Please note that
only the flow statics CAD has been implemented so far.
The following dialog box will be displayed:
Settings:
Read of Statics Data/Project

Give full description of the path of the data record to be read in or select a file by clicking the 'File' button
on the right.
Data records of any statics data end with SC2.
Delivery toStatics/Project
This option has not yet been implemented.
Create System Lines

All system lines being defined by the data are created. They are filed in the layer PS_RAHMEN.
Insert Shapes
All defined shapes are inserted. First, no optimizing is made. Co-linear shapes of identical type and
alignment are not combined. Such shapes are due to the fact that structural analysis is made from one
junction point to the next, whereas a shape can stretch over several junction points.
Connect Elements
This option activates optimizing. Shapes of the same type and of same position are combined in a way
that a shape has maximum length.
Colinear Tolerance
The value indicates up to which distance segments can be considered as co-linear and thus suitable for
connection (values in mm).
Angle Tolerance
The value indicates up to which angle distance segments can be considered as co-linear and thus suitable
for connection (values in degrees).
Shape Table
Since the shape designations used in the different structural analyses are not identical to those used by
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D, you will be asked when entering a file with an unknown designation.
In the above example, you are asked to indicate the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D designation for IPE
80. This information is saved, so that each unknown designation must be entered only once.
After selection of the designation, the display field will appear:
Here, the data can be managed, deleted, and new data can be entered in the port analysis shape table.
10.5.3. DSTV-NC-Interface
This interface gives you the opportunity to generate your NC data directly from within your AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D model. For this purpose, the program creates a manufacturer-independent NC file in
ASCII format, which you may use for further processing with the postprocessor of your NC machine. The
generated NC data are production-means-neutral.
The NC data generation is carried out according to the standards "Standard Description of Steel
Construction Parts for the NC Control" of the DSTV association from November 1997, 5, revised edition.
General
This is a standard interface of geometrys for steel construction parts concerning the
NC production operations
Sawing
Drilling
Burning
Punching
Signature
with the goal to be independent from NC machine manufacturers, which means that NC machines are
exchangeable as long as the same data processing organization exists.
The interface uses standardized controls to regulate the link between CAD and graphics system to the NC
controls via the CAM level.
The part's geometry is made available to the interface regardless of the type of production operation and
then forwarded to the NC machine via the NC machine-specific postprocessor.
Installation
The installation of the NC data is carried out automatically by AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D.
If your version comes equipped with the hardware protection plug (dongle):
If this extension is unlicensed, you may start the program max. 32 times for evaluation purposes. Any
further use is disabled.
If your version comes equipped with a software protection, it is not possible to start the program for
evaluation purposes.
NC-Data Output
After you have created your 3D model and performed a positioning (prerequisite), you may generate your
NC data. This is done with the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D OTHER / NC DATA GENERATION menu
option or the PS_NC_SUPPORT LISP command.
The following dialog box appears after the command has been selected:
Settings:
Order Number
Here you enter the max. 12 digits of the order number, which will later be the first entry in the parts
description header in the NC file.
Drawing Number
Here you enter the max. 12 digits of the drawing number, which will later be the second entry in the parts
description header in the NC file.
Directory Name
Indicate the folder name, in which the NC data are to be saved (below the NC data directory). Example:
Your NC data path is C:\PRO_ST3D\NCD
and created a subdirectory called "Meier5." The file for the position number 10 will then have the following
path name:
C:\PRO_ST3D\NCD\MEIER5\P10.NC
Options
Specify the following settings:
Overwrite
Any existing file with the same name will be overwritten without asking for confirmation first.
Straight End Forward

If this option is activated, every shape, if it is a straight one with an uncut end, will be turned
so that this end is viewed as the shape start.
Sign
This enables you to indicate a signature block with the following settings.
Position Number
The position number is entered into the signature text.
Send Number
The dispatch number is entered into the signature text.
Order Number
The order number is entered into the signature text.
Drawing Number
The drawing number is entered into the signature text.
Name
The shape name is entered into the signature text.
Note
The comment row 1 is entered into the signature text.
Input
The right input is entered into the signature text.
Position
Select the position of the signature text.
Text Size
Select the text size of the signature text (in mm).
Input Field
Enter any additional input text.
3D Cuts
If this option is activated, 3D cut information is created. This information consists of a SC
record with base on the cutting plane and the cutting plane perpendicular.
3D Holes
If this option is activated, three-dimensional holes are indicated with one originating point
and the perpendicular of the hole.
OK
If you exit the dialog box with OK, you will be prompted to select the parts for which you want to generate
the NC data. Once all parts are selected, the structure of the parts is analyzed and the corresponding data
records of the NC file are created.
Example for a NC-File
ST
123
125
3
3
RST_37-2
1
HE200B
I
2980.00
200.00
200.00
15.00
9.00
18.00
61.30
1.15
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
BO
o 492.48o 140.00 22.00 0.00
o 492.48o 60.00 22.00 0.00
EN
11. Special Shapes, 3D Solids, Miscellaneous
11.1. Special Shapes Command
Command name: PS_MK_OBJ

By using the special shape management of AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D, you can add your own
custom shapes to the program which will then be processed like pre-defined standard shapes. These
special shapes can be saved in any number of catalogs containing any number of shapes, i.e., you can
establish same sorting as with standard shapes. The selection menu then shows catalog names as a
shape type and the shapes contained in each catalog appear as shape size, making it easy to choose
between different system shapes.
The program then organizes these shape catalogs into special shape master groups, which all basically
have the same properties and are consequently described together in this chapter. There is a distinction
between general special shapes, roof-wall shapes and combination shapes. You create the first two
groups by drawing a cross-section; for combination shapes you combine existing shapes to create a new
shape (e.g., two U-shapes welded together).
Example - Special Shapes:
The left shape was drawn as a cross-section

and then stored as a special shape , the right one
is a combination of two U-shapes.
In addition, you can store each shape in three different display modes (low, normal and high - which must
be created individually). You thereby avoid having to deal with a confusing number of lines when working
with rather complex shape like in the left example, but you can show the complete shape if needed.
Nonetheless, you can always select the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D standard display modes (only
centerline, envelope etc. see command Shapes/Settings) without having to change any parameters.
Dialog Box: Creating Special Shapes
Settings:
Catalog: This list shows you all catalogs included in this group.
Shapes: This list shows you all shapes in the selected catalog. In front of each shape
name you will find the symbol for the different resolutions stored for this shape
(l/n/h for low/normal/high. When no mode has been stored, you will see a
dash).
Catalog: Here you can enter the name of a new catalog or will see the current catalog.
Shapes: Here you can enter the name of a new shape or will see the current shape.
In Process: The complete path for the special shape is displayed.
Resolution: Here you can determine, which display mode should be used for the new
shape. You can choose between Low, Normal and High, but it is up to you how
the shapes are displayed in these different resolutions.
Consequently, you have to create three different versions of a shape, if you
want to see it in all three resolutions (for lower resolutions you should use basic
cross-sections). The program, however, executes all internal computations and
sections for the highest resolution in order not to loose details.
Create When you click this button, the catalog entered in the Catalog field is created
Catalog - still not containing any shape.
Please note that catalog names are file subdirectories and cannot contain
spaces, special characters, etc.
Create When you click this button, the shape entered in the Shape field is created.
Shape See Create Shape
Please note that these shape names are file names and cannot contain
spaces, special characters etc.
Bill When you click this button, the following dialog is displayed:
Editor
Starting from the cross-section drawing and the entered material data the
program calculates the weight and displays it in the entry field Weight. Here
you can determine which shape data will be applied to the standard parts lists
and you can change the weight. The shape name entered in the Name field will
appear in the parts lists and in the legend. It does not have to match the shape
name in the selection list and may contain any kind of character.
For example, if you have entered shape name U50503 for shape selection, you
can enter here the more specific description U 50x50x3.
Save When you click this button, the shape you have created and modified will be
stored as the final special shape.
Delete Shape By clicking this button, you can delete a specific shape.
Create Shapes
Before selecting the command for special shapes, you first have to display the new shape in cross-section
1:1 on your screen.
Task sequence for common special shapes and wall-roof shapes differs from that for combination shapes.
After having displayed your cross-section, select the command by clicking the respective button or via
keyboard command PS_MK_OBJ plus the given parameter.
General SSOPRO
Special Shapes: Special shapes must first be displayed with closed polylines
(e.g., two polylines for hollow sections). These lines may not intersect.
Select the command and click the CREATE SHAPE button.
First click the outermost polyline, then on possible inner polylines or abort the
query by pressing ESC or the right mouse button, if there are no polylines. If
you selected the Segments setting, you can select lines if these are single line
segments, too. It havent to be real polylines.
The program automatically determines possible insertion points for this shape
(center, envelope). By clicking, you can also add custom insertion points. End
selection by pressing ESC or the right mouse button.
You then return to dialog to give a name for shape selection, to choose catalog
and display resolution and to customize the parts lists (button Bill Editor). You
then click SAVE. Now you can work with the new shape like any other shape.
Roof Wall Shapes: SDAWA
Same procedure as for general special shapes with the exception that you
cannot click inner polylines.
Combination Shapes: SCOMBI
For this task, you have to add existing shapes (also special shapes) as cross-
sections. Same procedures as for general special shapes, but you have to click
individual shapes, not on polylines.
Any Parts of SSOPA

Parts Lists:
You can append parts list information to any non-steel part (e.g., to an AutoCAD
block or AutoCAD element). When collecting parts for the parts lists this part
will then be added as well, and the parts lists does not have to be manually
modified later.
If you click this element by using the context menu "Change PS Properties" at a
later time, you will see this dialog to select or change parts list data.
After selecting the command, click an element and the following dialog for parts
list data is displayed, in case this specific part does not yet have any parts list
data: Under Weight, you just enter the weight of this part.
Please note that the part will only be added at parts list entry if the Add field is
activated.
The other fields are self-explanatory or see command 'Shapes/Change

Properties/Data.'
11.2. 3D Solids Command
For solids, AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D does not use the AutoCAD solid command ACIS but rather a
modified version, which works faster and produces smaller graph files. Consequently you cannot combine
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects and AutoCAD 3D solids (e.g., subtract their volumes). In case you
do combine objects, there will be no errors, but nothing will happen! In order to give you the same
performance range as with AutoCAD, all solids have been redefined (see command 'Boolean
Operations').
As these solids are real AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D objects, they can be processed with the help of
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL commands (e.g. drilled). These solids can be detailed as normal component
part.
Please note that the component parts need a clear direction for detailing. The X-axis of the UCS valid at
insertion is taken as standard. You can, however, determine the axis anew by means of the context menu,
Modification of PS Properties.
Cube/Rectangle: PS_SOLID_BOX
This command creates a rectangular object.

You determine the edges by clicking the two diagonally opposed corner points
or by entering their coordinates.
In case the volume cannot be determined by using the points you entered
(maybe you clicked on two points on a UCS plane), the program prompts you to
enter the missing dimensions.
Sphere: PS_SOLID_SPHERE
This command creates a sphere.

First, you have to enter the central point of the sphere and then the diameter of
the sphere or click it.
Cylinder: PS_SOLID_CYLINDER
This command creates a cylinder.

First you have to enter starting and end point of the cylinder and then the radius
or click it.
Cone: PS_SOLID_CONE
This command creates a cone or truncated cone.

First , you have to enter starting and end point of the cone axis or indicate it by
clicking it and the starting and end radius.
Torus: PS_SOLID_TORUS
This command creates a torus.
This requires that you first click or enter the rotation axis and then enter the
outer and inner radius.
Rotational Solid: PS_SOLID_ROTATE

This command creates a rotational solid from within any polyline.
This requires that you first click the polyline and then on the rotation axis. You
can also indicate a rotational angle, around which the polyline is rotated.
Another option is that the polyline can also rotate around the last drawn line
segment if you press the ESC key when prompted for the 'Rotation axis.'
Conical Pipe: PS_SOLID_CONICPIPE

This command creates a pipe that is conical on the inside and outside.
First, you have to enter or click the longitudinal axis. Then you can enter the
outer and inner radius at the respective starting and end point.
Pipe on Rectangular: PS_SOLID_RECT2CIRCLE

This command creates a transition from a circular to a rectangular cross-
section.
First, you have to enter or click the lower left and upper right point of the
rectangular and then click the circle.
Enveloping Solid: PS_SOLID_HULL
This command creates an enveloping solid formed by any points.

This requires that you click the points that are to form the envelope. Using this
command, you can create almost any shape (without arcs).
Extrusion: PS_SOLID_EXTRUDE
This command creates a volume by extruding a polyline, which you have drawn
beforehand.
You first click the polyline and then enter the desired height. The polyline is
then extruded along positive z-direction of UCS.
11.3. Boolean Operations
Command name: See Individual Functions

For solids, AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D does not use the AutoCAD solid command ACIS but a
modified version, which works faster and produces smaller graph files. Consequently, you cannot combine
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D with the Boolean operations of AutoCAD (e.g., subtract their volumes). In
case you do combine objects, there will be no errors, but nothing will happen! In order to give you the
same performance range as with AutoCAD, all Boolean operations were redefined (see command
'Solids').
Another option is to use the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D properties to convert the AutoPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D objects into ACIS volume models and then to process them with AutoCAD. However,
your drawings will then become larger and more sluggish.
Add: PS_ADD
This command creates a new volume by adding two existing Volumes:

You have to click both objects, and the newly created object receives all parts list information of the object
you clicked on first.
Subtract: PS_SUB
This command creates a new volume by subtracting one or several volumes

from an existing volume.
First, you have to click the object from which the other volumes are to be
subtracted. Then click the objects whose volume is to be subtracted (these will
be deleted in the process).
The new object receives all parts list information of the object you clicked on
first. Please note, however, that you will not create two independent objects in
case you "split" the first object in the process.
Form PS_COMMON
Cut-set:
This command creates a new volume by using the cut-set of two existing
volumes, i.e., the new volume is the part the two objects shared.
You have to click both objects and the new object will receive all parts list
information of the object you clicked on first.
Subtract PS_COMMON_SUB
Cut-set:
This command creates a new volume by subtracting the cut-set of two existing
volumes from the first volume. The first part is brought into line with the second,
while preserving the second part.
11.4. Add Shape Section Command
Command name: PS_ADD_SECTION
In addition to the curved shapes such as pipe bends you can also create shapes consisting of several radii
and chamfers. These shapes consisting of combined sections then act as if they were a single shape.
A practical application of this command is required if you would like to create, chamfered (bent) shapes or
shapes curved but in one piece.
Example:
A shape rotated and twisted within itself

(square bar steel)
Dialog Box: Shape Sections Tab: BENT SEGMENT

Settings:
Radius: Enter the bending radius of the segment to be attached.
Angle: Enter the angle of the segment to be attached.
Angle of Rotation: Enter the rotational angle of the segment to be attached (in reference to the
axis).
This also makes parts twisted within themselves possible.
Rotate Click this button to rotate the new segment around the angle indicated in the
input field below step by step.
Add Click this button to add the new segment to a shape end.
Delete Click this button to delete the last inserted segment.
Modify Click this button to change the last inserted segment.
Dialog Box: Shape Sections Tab: STRAIGHT SEGMENT (Without Picture)
Length: Enter the length of the straight segment.
Adding Sections
To create a shape bent multiple times, you have to have added a straight shape segment first using the
standard command for inserting shapes (see command 'Insert Shapes').
After selecting the command, you have to click the shape segment's end that is to be expanded. You can
then change the values for the currently added segment until you exit the dialog box.
The "Straight Segment" dialog tab allows you to add a straight segment of a specified length tangentially to
the last bent segment.
Another option is to draw a three-dimensional polyline and then to use the standard command for inserting
shapes with the 'Line' option to create the shape along this line.
HINT: You can still obtain the chamfers by indicating a radius in a dialog box even if AutoCAD does not let
you create a 3D polyline with radii.
11.5. Collision Check Command
Command name: PS_COLLISION

When inserting shapes you might not have looked out for overlapping, but will only get the correct
component part lengths while working with the processing commands or when fitting connections - you
might find that shapes inadvertently overlap. This can also happen in cases where you "might have lost
track of things" due to a large number of diagonally placed shapes in a small design area. This command
checks your complete work frame or elements of the construction for these overlaps (collisions).
After selecting the command, you first determine the parts to be checked; then you can enter a minimal
collision volume. After confirmation, the collision check is carried out immediately.
The minimal collision volume has the effect that that overlaps in this area are not reported as collisions to
prevent an overly extreme accuracy caused by construction tolerances. All shapes, where a collision has
been determined, will be colored in red. The overlap volume of these objects is colored in yellow for
monitoring reasons. Now you can find the overlapping shapes and correct the errors.
Example - Collision Check:
The two upper shapes still overlap,

the support, however, fits correctly.
Remove Coloring
To remove coloring, choose the AutoCAD command "Undo," which undoes a command (you now know
the critical areas) and restores original status before the collision check.
However, you could also use the command 'Regenerate.'
The yellow collision volume was inserted as independent solid and can be normally deleted
correspondingly.
After again having loaded the function, you can answer the Object Selection with clicking the RETURN-key
instead of selecting the objects for collision check. Then, all collision volumes will be deleted again.
11.6. Dispatch Blocks Command
Command name: PS_DISPATCH

Use this command to distribute as many AutoCAD blocks as desired evenly across a shape length and
add their insertion points as markings to the shape (e.g., for NC output). Of course, you can just add
markings without inserting a block.
In addition, the function allows for the parametric generation of thread bolts or similar solids of revolution at
simultaneous distribution analogously to the distribution of blocks described above.
Insertion of Thread Bolts
You can save the definitions of thread bolts in a data base (*.dfb). They have to be referenced in your
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D configuration file (see 'Data Base Definition').
Dialog Box: Dispatch/Distribute Thread Bolts:

Settings:
Distances: Specify the distribution grid for the length division.

In the Inner Distance input field, you enter the distance between the individual
insertion points.
In the Front offset input field, you enter the distance from shape start to the first
insertion point.
I n the End offset input field, you enter the distance from last insertion point to the
end of the shape.
Edge Values: The margin dimensions are exactly adhered to if the division
cannot be evenly calculated due to unsuitable shape lengths.
Inner value: The intermediate dimension is exactly retained if the division cannot
be evenly calculated due to unsuitable shape lengths.
In the Hole/Dm input field, you enter the diameter of marking or nipple hole.
In the Hole Length input field, you enter the depth of marking or nipple hole.
Dimensions: Enter the dimensions of thread bolts here. If you click an entry of the selection
list, the current values will be displayed which can be modified at any time.
The following figure shows the meaning of dimension values:
Meaning of the distances at

thread bolts
Options: If the Shape Middle field is checked, the markings are attached to the center of
the shape. Otherwise, the pick point is considered to be the base point.
If the Create Marks field is checked, a small hole (like a weld crack, see
command 'Stiffeners') for the NC output is attached to the shape. The
dimensions are preset by the specifications in the fields Hole Dm resp. Hole
Length.
If the Insert Blocks field is checked, the preset thread bolt is generated as
volume solid.
If the Build Group field is checked, a group is created out of thread bolts and
shape where the shape will be the main part. If the shape already belongs to a
group, the thread bolts will be assigned to this group.
Name: Here, you enter the name of the thread bolt.
Selection List: Select the thread bolt to be inserted for the distribution from the data base if the
'Insert Block' field is checked. The parameters are displayed in the dimension
input fields and can still be modified later.
Shapes: Click this button to determine the markings according to the selected shape, to
attach the markings, and to insert the corresponding thread bolts.
You have to click the desired shape.
Example Distribution/Dispatch
The blocks are also inserted at
the other marking
positions, of course.
Single: Click this button to attach one individual marking (incl. thread bolt) manually to
any shape position.
This requires that you first click the desired shape and then on the insertion
point of the marking. You can attach several markings at once.
Insertion of AutoCAD-Blocks
You can save the paths to the used blocks in a data base (*.dfb). They have to be referenced in your
AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D configuration file (see 'Data Base Definition').
Apart from this, the distribution of blocks is identical with the distribution of thread bolts. So, we dont have
to describe this function in detail, but only deal with the differences.
The specifications concerning the parametric dimensions are omitted of course. The blocks are inserted
exactly as you created them. Please note that the current UCS has to agree with the UCS of the block
to grant a correct alignment of the block.
In the Block Path input field, you enter the complete path to the block to be inserted or you select the block
from the selection list. You can of course attach only the marking holes without block insertion, too.
In the Drill Hole Code input field, you can enter a code which is output by the NC-data for further
processing.
Data Base Definition

You can define a data base with pre-defined thread bolts resp. paths to the blocks before you can
optimally utilize the distribution command. Any thread bolts or blocks indicated there are then displayed in
the selection list.
This DBASE-file (e.g., bolts.dbf) has to be indicated in the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D configuration
file (pro_st3d.cfg) under the entry DISPATCHTABLE. The following is an excerpt from the
configuration file.
...
USEREEDPFAD=
DISPATCHTABLE=E:\APP\PS15\PRG\bolts.dbf ; block table
1ANSICHTX=0.66
1ANSICHTY=-1.33
1ANSICHTZ=0.66
...
Meaning of the Fields in the Data Base File:
TYPE indicates the entry type (1 = thread bolt , 2 = block)

NAME name of the thread bolt or block
BLOCKPATH complete path to the block (only for type 2)
HOLEDESCRI drill hole code (only for type2)
HOLEDM diameter of marking hole
HOLELENGTH depth of marking hole
LENGTH length of thread hole (only for type1)
DM diameter of thread hole (only for type1)
FOOTDM diameter of thread hole foot (only for type1)
FOOTHEIGHT height of thread hole foot (only for type1)
HEADDM diameter of thread hole head (only for type1)
HEADHEIGHT height of thread hole head (only for type1)
NIPPELDM diameter of thread hole nipple (only for type 1)
NIPPELLENG length of thread hole nipple (only for type1)
11.7. Tube Unwind Command
Command name: PS_UNWIND
Using this command you can unwind any kind of cut-out tube and insert its development immediately into
the active UCS plane.
When you select this command, the following dialog box opens.
Dialog Box: Unfolding
Settings:
Resolution: Indicate the resolution of the unwinding. The higher the indicated value, the
more detailed is the scan of the component searching for any possible outlets or
notches. The greatest acceptable value is 360.
Inner Contour: If this field is checked, the development of an inner contour (e.g., in case of
hollow sections) is also displayed as an additional block.
Colors Outer Contour Specify the colors for the contour as well as for the tessellation line to be able to
Inner Contour: distinguish the developments from one another. In the Outer Edges and the
Tessellation Line fields you can indicate either an AutoCAD color number or
select a color number using the standard color selection dialog by clicking the
field and the COLOR button.
Create Tessellation: If this field is checked, tessellation lines are displayed.

Lines: Otherwise, only the contour is shown.
OK Click this button to create the unwinding or the development.
COLOR Click this button to open the standard color selection dialog to select a color
number.
Creating Development/Unwinding
After you have exited the dialog you have to click the tube or pipe that is to be unwound or developed.
The desired operation is then supplied "sticking to the crosshairs." Position it freely anywhere in the model
and process it further if desired.
If you have selected 'Inner Contour,' both developments are sticking to the crosshairs in the form of two
properly positioned blocks. Position them anywhere in the model and then process them individually.
Example - Tube Unwind:
By using the command 'Poly Cut / Subtract,' several other objects have been cut into a displayed tube
to create the outer contour development.
11.8. Divide Surface Command
Command name: PS_ROWADISPATCH

This command allows you to divide any surface with roof-wall shapes and display them in color. You
choose orientation and grid spacing. The program then determines necessary cutouts in the shapes.
You can work with all shapes, including special shapes and plates. Layout is done on the active UCS
plane. It is recommended to use a top view of the UCS plane.
Surface Layout
To divide a wall surface by means of front shapes, outer bordering of the surface as well as possible inner
cuts have to exist as poly-lines first.
After having loaded the function, click the Outer Poly-Line of the Surface first and then the direction
determining line for alignment. Now, pick the Origin of Division and the following dialog appears for further
specifications:
Dialog Box: Wall Surface Division (DIMENSIONS Tab):

Settings:
Grid Length: Here, you are prompted to indicate the grid length (i.e., the lengths of the
shapes to be installed).
Grid Width: Here, you are prompted to indicate the grid width. If the grid width exceeds the
shape width, the layout will show gaps, if the grid width is smaller, you will have
overlaps. In the neighboring Input Field, the shape width of the currently
selected shape is displayed (see Shapes Tab).
Depth: Here, you enter the distance between layout and active UCS plane. By entering
positive values, you move the surface along the positive z-axis of UCS.
Offset Top : Here, you enter a projection of the shape over the grid length at the upper end.
If you enter a positive value, the shape is shortened and a gap is shown. If you
enter a negative value, the shape is extended and overlaps with the next grid
element.
Offset Down : Here, you enter a projection of the shape over the grid length at the lower end. If
you enter a positive value, the shape is shortened and a gap is shown. If you
enter a negative value, the shape is extended and overlaps with the previous
grid element.
Offset Side: Here, you enter the dimension by which the shape insertion points to be moved
horizontally from the center of the grid.
Cut: If this field is checked, the shapes which are longer or wider than the outer poly-
line, are cut at this poly-line.
Offset: Here you enter how grid lines are moved against each other in longitudinal
direction.
Without offset means that they are not moved.
Axial offset means that they are moved in a way that a new line begins in the
middle of the previous line ("laid brick pattern")
Offset to Measure means that the lines are offset against each other by a value
you entered in the neighboring input field.
Color Normal: Select a color for all shapes not being cut by entering the AutoCAD color code.
The color can also be selected by clicking the BUTTON which is situated at the
right.
Color Cut: Select a color for all shapes being cut by entering the AutoCAD color code. The
color can also be selected by clicking the BUTTON which is situated at the right.
Dialog Box: Wall Surface Division (SHAPES Tab):
Settings:
Shapes: Unless having checked Use Poly-Plates field, you select here the shape to be
used for installation.
You can select the shape according to the shape categories in the lists (see ->
Insert Shapes).
Plates: If the Use Poly-Plates field is checked, a rectangular poly-plate is used as

installation element instead of a shape.
You can determine the dimensions in the Plate Width and Plate Thickness input
fields, the length corresponds to the Grid Length corrected by the offset value.
You can specify a name for the plate in the Selection List. If the Grid field is
checked, a plate grid (e.g. for a grating at the installation of stage coverings) is
created for being displayed. For more detailed information about plate names
and grids, please refer to the description of ->Insert Plates command.
CUT OUTS
You can enter additional cut outs into a surface at which the shapes have to be cut as well. In order to do
this, the poly-lines of the cut outs are required which can, however, still be drawn when the function is
activated.
Dialog Box: Wall Surface Division (CUT OUTS Tab):
Settings:
Number of Poly-Cuts: Here, you can see the number of additional cut outs existing at the moment.
ADD: By clicking this button, you can insert a cut out into the division. Click the poly-
line of the cut out in order to do so.
If the poly-line doesnt yet exist, you can draw it directly before loading this
option.
DELETE: By clicking this button, you can delete the currently selected cut out and close
the surface at this position.
If you have several cut outs in the division, you can select the required cut out
by pressing << and >>.
<<,>> By clicking these buttons, you select the required cut out if several cut outs are
existing in the division.
11.9. Global Settings Command
Command name: PS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS

This dialog box and its tabs allow you to enter the standard settings for several functions. The context
menu "Change PS Properties" allows you to select and change these properties at a later time. You
access the dialog by selecting the 'AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D / SPECIFICATIONS' option via the
context menu (right mouse button) without having selected any objects.
Most entries are explained with the individual functions, therefore just some settings will be explained in
the following.
Hints for users of previous versions: The dialog for the default settings can now be accessed via
the context menu. The function button has been eliminated.
Dialog Tabs:
GRIPS Settings for grips and stretching. When no grip is entered for an object, the
AutoCAD command "Stretch" cannot be used.
SHAPES Settings for shapes
PLATES Settings for any kind of plate (poly-plates)
BOLTS Settings for bolt display
WORKFRAME Settings for work frame
VALUES Settings for resolution of circular volumes for volume patterns
LOGLINKS Settings for links between elements
OPTIONS Other settings
COLORS Settings for the element and other highlighting colors

Dialog Box: Default Settings Tab: GRIPS
Settings:
Shapes...Length...: If the Move Length field is highlighted, a grip is created for length change (or for
position change) and all measurements can be altered.
Shapes...Cuts...: If the Move Cuts field is highlighted, a grip is created for the section. You might
now have one grip for changing the length and one for changing the section.
Please note: When you move a section grip in a way to shorten the length of the
shape, the length grip is moved simultaneously. When you move the length grip
over the section grip, the shape will be cut off at the same spot, because you
have not moved the sectional plane. When you move the section grip over the
length grip, you eliminate the section from the shape (although the sectional
plane remains at the section grip). The section grip "seizes" the sectional
plane, while the length grip "seizes" the shape length.
When you stretch a cut shape, the section angle within the shape remains the
same, just like in reality (Exception see 'Section Constant').
Shapes...Holes...: If the Move Holes field is highlighted, drill holes receive a grip and can be
moved - otherwise they remain where inserted when the shape is stretched.
Shapes...Poly-Sections... If the Move Poly-Cuts field is highlighted, poly-sections receive a grip and can
be moved (the original form of the polyline is stored, therefore you only move
the line). Otherwise, the section remains where inserted when the shape is
stretched.
Shapes...Only Along If this field is highlighted, shapes can only be stretched Along Centerline
Centerline their axis, i.e., a
change of position is not possible.
Shapes...Step Width When you have entered a value > 0, the length of the shape can only be
changed via grips in preset modular steps. When you have entered 0, any kind
of change can be performed.
Plates...Thickness...: When the Thickness field is highlighted, a grip for changing thickness is
displayed, in all other cases form changes can only be performed with constant
plate thickness.
All other plates fields have same definition as the shape fields.
Dialog Box: Defaults Tab: SHAPES
Settings: With the exception of the additional dialogs, the settings of this dialog can be
found under the section describing the shape properties (see command
Insert Shapes / Change Properties).
TEXT: If you click this button, a dialog for determining the shape labeling opens:
Text Size: Enter the text size of shape labeling. Distance: Enter the distance between
labeling and the upper side of the shape.Please note, however, that the actual
size depends on the set global scale of the drawing (see function -> Global
Scale).Prefix: Specify a prefix which has to be put in front of the labeling. Text
Style: Select the AutoCAD-text style which has to be used for labeling.If the
Name field is checked, the shape name of the shape will be added to the
labeling.If the Position Number field is checked, the position number of the
shape will be added to the labeling.If the Length field is checked, the length of
the shape will be added to the labeling.Shape Type not to be labeled: Enter the
shape types which have to be excluded from labeling.
SKETCH If you click this button, a dialog for determining the sketch display opens.
These settings have also an influence on detailing with the option Sketch
Display (see -> Detailing / Detail Style Overviews).
If the Sketch Length field is selected, you can enter the length of sketch display
from the center in the input field below to outline the shape as solid. If you enter
the value 0, the result will only be a cross-section display at the center.
If the Edge Distance field is checked, you specify the distance of sketch display
towards the two insertion points of the shape in the input field below.
If the Relative Length in % field is checked, you specify the relative size of
sketch display related to the overall length of the shape in the input field below.
In the Final Distance input field, you enter the distance of the end points of the
displayed system line towards the actual insertion points.
Middle Line:The middle line of the shape is displayed as system line.Insertion

Line: The insertion line of the shape is displayed as system line of the shape
(which could be the upper edge).
Example:
Sketch Display
Dialog Box: Defaults Tab: PLATES
Settings:
The settings of this dialog can be found under the section describing the plate properties (see command
Insert Plates / Change Properties) resp. under the section describing the shape properties (see command
Insert Shapes / Change Properties) all except the following:
Grid X-Space: If a grid is to be displayed, this is where you specify the lengthwise grid
distances.
Grid Y-Space: If a grid is to be displayed, this is where you specify the perpendicular
(crosswise) grid distances.
Grid Length: This is where you specify the maximum grid length running from the outer edge
of the plate or from existing inner contours. If you enter the value 0, the plate will
be displayed with a complete grid.
This option permits you to display the plate without complete grid. The display is
limited to the contour edges. Shapes which are situated below, remain visible by
this way.
Offset Centerline If you selected the display as middle line, this is where you enter a projection of
the middle line over the two plate surfaces.
In contrast to shapes, the center line of plates is not running along the
longitudinal direction but along the plate thickness.
Label: If you click this button, a dialog for determining the plate labeling opens.
As this dialog is identical with the shape labeling, please refer to this chapter for
the meaning of the input fields (see ->SHAPES Tab).
Plate Description If you click this button, a dialog for determining the format defaults for the output
of plate names opens (e.g. in position flags).
Name: Here, you specify the format default of the plate name at labeling and in
the property fields. Position Flag Description: Here, you specify the format
default of the plate name in position flags. Export Description: Here, you specify
the format default of the plate name at the export of parts list data.
Round at Name Values: Here, you specify the accuracy to which the
specifications concerning dimensions of the plate name have to be rounded.
This doesnt have any influence on the actual dimensions of the plate model.
Length greatest Value: The greatest value of dimensions is always regarded as
plate length. This doesnt depend on how you inserted the plate.
Format Default Structure
The names like $(N)serve as variable for the current value of the
corresponding plate and are explained in the dialog itself. The Name of the
plate is the constant part like plate, grating, etc.
In the input fields of the corresponding format description, you can enter a text
consisting of the variables and any other characters. When the program is
running, the variables are replaced by the current values e.g. for the length and
the other characters will be kept as in the original input.
Dialog Box: Defaults Tab: VALUES
Settings:
Resolution: The input fields are used to specify the resolution for creating circular volumes.
The higher the resolution, the more detailed the display but the computer
processing speed decreases. Use high resolution settings only for large scales
and important details.
2D Sub Part GripSize: Specify the size of the pick helper symbol for detailed construction groups. You
need the pick helpers to access the individual parts of construction groups in the
workshop drawing after the detailing (see 'Detailing').
Clip Plane Specify the front and rear section plane distances of
Distance: the object view. See also 'Object View' 'Section Plane Distance').
Rounding Stiffener
Thickness: Here, you specify the accuracy the plate thickness of the calculated stiffener
thickness has to be rounded at stiffeners in connections.
An unnecessary accuracy can thus be avoided resp. only certain plate
thicknesses which are available in the workshop will be used.
Dialog Box: Defaults Tab: LOGLINKS
Settings:
Create Active or If this field is checked, active or passive links referencing the corresponding
Passive Links: components are created. See also 'Logical links.'
No Update: If this field is checked, any changes made to a component are not passed on to
its associated components using an update (no update of the associated parts
of a component).
On Request: If this field is checked, you are prompted to indicate if any changes made to a
component are to be passed on to its associated components using an update.
Update: If this field is checked, any changes made to a component are immediately
passed on to its associated components using an update.
Dialog Box: Defaults Tab: OPTIONS
Settings:
Shape Clipping: When this field is highlighted, the active UCS plane (top view) displays the
cross-section of the object tapered to it theoretically. When this option is
switched off, you do not get a correct cross-section top view of an object if it
starts below and ends above sectional plane.
During normal operation, this option should be turned on.
Process Status: Is this field highlighted, an additional folder is displayed when clicking elements
with context menu 'Change PS Properties,' where you can enter data
concerning production status of an element (manufactured, galvanized,
delivered, assembled).
As this might not be of interest for your application, this function can be
switched off.
Lisp Messages: If this field is checked, worked off AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D lisp
commands will be displayed in the AutoCAD command line.
Check Measurement
UnitDialog If this field is checked, you are asked at the beginning of a new drawing in which
unit system you want to work (metrical or imperial). Otherwise the current
AutoCAD-setting will be adopted. As the consequent use of the same unit
system within a drawing is indispensable for the correct display of shapes, the
modification of the AutoCAD-system variable MEASUREMENT which is
responsible for this can cause unwanted results.
This option grants that the once selected unit system is kept and a
corresponding hint will be displayed in case of (mostly unwanted) modifications.
Name accord DSTV When this field is checked, the shape and bolt designations in a parts lists
are named according to the latest DSTV standard.
Delete Obsolete When this field is checked, drill holes or other features which lie outside of
Operations the shape after a length modification has been performed, are deleted
automatically
Delete Unused Shape When the drawing is cleaned with the AutoCAD command "Purge," in order to
References at Purge: reduce the drawing size; if this field is checked, unused shape references can
be deleted after confirmation.
Delete Unused Unused logical links are deleted when parts are deleted.
Links: During normal operation, this option should be turned on.
Real...at Shade: When these fields are checked, bolts, or curved shapes are displayed as real
objects when the AutoCAD command 'Hide/Shade" is selected.
This option should be turned on during normal operation.
Position Flags When this field is checked, all position flags placed in the work frame will not
at Shade: be hidden when the AutoCAD command 'Hide/Shade" is selected.
Construction (Add)Lines When this field is checked, all lines in model, like center lines, gravity lines
at Shade: or other construction lines will not be hidden when the AutoCAD command
'Hide/Shade' is selected.
Work Frame When this field is checked, all work frames within the model are not hidden
at Shade: when selecting the AutoCAD command "Hide / Shade.
Dont Draw Part label When this field is checked, shape labelings within the model are hidden when
selecting the AutoCAD command "Hide / Shade.
Dialog Box: Defaults Tab: COLORS
Settings:
Here, you set the colors to be used for the different display markings and objects of the program by
indicating the AutoCAD-color number. Please refer to the corresponding commands for the meaning of the
different markings.
You can also select the color in a comfortable way by clicking the corresponding input field and then
loading the AutoCAD-dialog for color selection by clicking the SELECT button.
12. Configuration - Technical Notes
12.1. Shape Database
Access to the AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D standard shape database is possible using the *.dbf files.
Existing shape data can be modified, and new shapes can be added using the selected basic shape
(SHAPECLASS_xxx). By using Microsoft-Excel, these files can be loaded, processed and stored as
'DBASE file.
Since manipulation of existing shape data results in a modification of the basic information, you
should be very careful when using this function. Incorrect input in the database will result in
incorrect dimensions in your work.
If you want to define new shapes using a basic shape, you first have to assign name, definition and basic
shape in the file ps3dshap.cfg. In the following, the necessary entries are shown:
...
...
FIELDDESCRIPTIONSTART;
SHAPECLASSNAME=I;
SHAPECLASSFILE=I.DBF
SHAPECLASSGEOMETRIE=SHAPECLASS_I;
FIELDDESCRIPTIONEND;
SHAPECLASSNAME=IPE;
SHAPECLASSFILE=IPE.DBF
SHAPECLASSGEOMETRIE=SHAPECLASS_HE;
SHAPECLASSNAME=HEA;
SHAPECLASSFILE=HEA.DBF
...
The paragraph in the middle (typed in bold italic) represents such an assignment.
FIELDDESCRIPTIONSTART and FIELDDESCRIPTIONEND delimit the assignment.
SHAPECLASSNAME is the name (that will be displayed in the field 'Shape Type'). SHAPECLASSFILE is
the file containing the data of the different shapes, and SHAPECLASSGEOMETRIE defines the basic
shape. The notations must be strictly followed when adding own definitions!
In the example, you can see that IPE and HEA shapes have an identical basic shape.
Possible basic shapes and relevant geometry entries in the *.dfb file are described on the next pages.
The access key ('Shape Size') is entered in the KEY.METRIC or KEY.INCH field. The weight per meter is
entered for each shape in the FRA_WEIGHT field and the sectional area is entered in the FRA_A field.
Basic Shapes of Standard Shapes

The shortcuts on the left side designate the entries for SHAPECLASSGEMETRIE. The dimensions
represent the field designations in the *.dbf file, in which the values must be entered. These designations
decisive for the shape geometry.
1) SHAPECLASS_I
2) SHAPECLASS_HE
3) SHAPECLASS_ EDGEPIPE
4) SHAPECLASS_U
5) SHAPECLASS_Z
6) SHAPECLASS_LE
7) SHAPECLASS_LNE
8) SHAPECLASS_COLDU
9) SHAPECLASS_T
10) SHAPECLASS_TB
11) SHAPECLASS_FLAT
12) SHAPECLASS_EDGESTEEL
13) SHAPECLASS_ROUNDPIPE
14) SHAPECLASS_ROUNDSTEEL
15) SHAPECLASS_COLDC
16 ) SHAPECLASS_HALF_I
17 ) SHAPECLASS_HALF_HE
18) SHAPECLASS_MULTIBEAM
19) SHAPECLASS_CED
20) SHAPECLASS_EAVES
Apart from the indicated geometry settings, the file contains many other values such as information on
structural analysis/statics data, etc. A detailed description of these values would go beyond the scope of
this manual. It will be made available upon request.
12.2. Connection Plate Database
You can access the AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D ARX database for plate connections using the *.dbf
files. You can then modify existing plate connections or define your own (add user-defined types). These
files can be opened by such applications as Microsoft Excel (DBASE file), modified, and then saved as a
DBASE file.
However, since any manipulation of existing data results in the modification of important program
data you should be very careful when using this function! Any incorrect entries to the database
often result in incorrect dimensions in your detailing and falsifies the statical proofs!
If you would like to add a user-defined type to a plate file, you first need to link shape type and plate file
using the ps3dshap.cfg file. For further information please read the chapter discussing the 'Shape
Database.' The following is an excerpt from this file and shows the entries that it has to contain:
...
SHAPECLASSNAME=IPE;
SHAPECLASSFILE=IPE.DBF
SHAPECLASSFREEPLATEDATA=FRPL_IPE.DBF
FREEPLATEDATADIMENSION=Metric
...
The section displayed in bold italic is such an association or link. SHAPECLASSNAME is the shape name
(with the following shape definition fields). SHAPECLASSFREEPLATEDATA is the file with the data of the
suitable user-defined plate data possible for this shape. FREEPLATEDIMENSION identifies the utilized
unit system. Please note that you use the exact same way of writing as indicated when adding your
own files! Only correctly entered files are recognized.
Use this method to "register" your own or third-party files with the program. You can use the free.dbf file
as the actual base file. This file is located in the data directory. The exact meaning of the contents can be
obtained from your AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D dealer upon request.
Other Connection Types

The following lists the meaning of the other connection plate entries of the database. However, we
strongly recommend not to change these due to the reasons mentioned above.
Standard plates: SHAPECLASSMOMENTUMPLATEDATA

MOMENTUMPLATEDATADIMENSION
Lateral Force Plates: SHAPECLASSCROSSPLATEDATA

CROSSPLATEDATADIMENSION
Shear Plates: SHAPECLASSSCHEARPLATEDATA

SCHEARPLATEDATADIMENSION
Web Angle: SHAPECLASSWEBANGLEDATA

WEBANGLEDATADIMENSION
12.3. User EEDs
The present program version uses as default USER EEDs. These are customized additional fields for the
parts lists and for positioning. If you do not want to use USER EEDs, you may turn them off. Keeping
them activated will lead to a slight magnification of drawings.
First, manually edit the pro_st3.cfg file. Use any text editor, e.g., "Notepad" or "MS-Write."
Open pro_st3d.cfg in the AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D program list. Above the file, you will find the
following structure. The entries in the list are adapted to your installation, i.e., they will not be identical with
those shown hereafter.
...
SOPROPFAD=E:\APP\PS_14NT\SOPRO
DAWAPFAD=E:\APP\PS_14NT\DAWA
COMBIPFAD=E:\APP\PS_14NT\COMBI
MATERIALDATEI=E:\APP\PS_14NT\PRG\pro_st3d.mat
STUECKLISTENPFAD=E:\APP\PS_14NT\STKLST
DETAILPFAD=E:\APP\PS_14NT\DETAIL
NCPFAD=E:\APP\PS_14NT\NC
KLICKFUNKTIONSTABELLE=E:\APP\PS_14NT\PRG\pro_st3d.fnt
HILFEDATEI=E:\APP\PS_14NT\PRG\pro_st3d.hlp
USEREEDPFAD=E:\APP\PS_14NT\PRG\pro_st3d.eed
DISPATCHTABLE=
1ANSICHTX=0.66 ; GLOBALANSICHTSFAKTOR X ACHSE
1ANSICHTY=-1.33 ; GLOBALANSICHTSFAKTOR Y ACHSE
1ANSICHTZ=0.66 ; GLOBALANSICHTSFAKTOR Z ACHSE
2ANSICHTX=-0.46 ; GLOBALANSICHTSFAKTOR X ACHSE
2ANSICHTY=-1.33 ; GLOBALANSICHTSFAKTOR Y ACHSE
...
When you delete all entries following the equal symbol in the line printed in bold, you will read
USEREEDPFAD=
The USER-EED support is turned off now. Save the drawing and start AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D
again.
When starting AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D, the following messages are displayed:
Read Matfile =E:\APP\PS_14NT\PRG\pro_st3d.mat ... Success

Read Part User Ueeds =
Read Group User Ueeds =
Read Shape Table =E:\APP\PS_14NT\DATEN\ps3dshap.cfg ... Success
This indicates that no USER EED support has been loaded.

13. Structural Elements
13.1. Structural Elements
In addition to all of the described construction tools, the object-oriented structure of AUTOPLANT
STRUCTURAL 3D ARX also enables the generation of repeatedly occurring standard construction in
parameterized form the so-called structural objects.
These are roughly pre-designed small construction sections such as handrails, stairs, or hangar frames,
which you then may modify according to your own requirements. Contrary to the parameterized variation
construction with the aid of AutoLISP programming, these structural objects are independent AutoCAD
elements, which you may change dynamically using dialogs or grips.
The structural objects are generated by the program according to pre-specified, adjustable construction
methods if these correspond with your
expectations you can generate an entire
handrail such as the one shown in the opposite
illustration in just a few seconds. Although this
is a new AutoCAD element, you can later
access each and every individual building
component, and adapt and modify it individually
using the AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL
standard functions.
However, when working with structural
objects you should remember that these
individual changes are lost once again if
you subsequently modify the structural
object using the dialog box or the grips. The reason for this is that in case of structural objects,
only the dialog parameters but not your subsequent dialog-independent modifications are saved!
This documentation will describe a few exemplary structural elements.

The quantity of available objects, however, is going to increase steadily. This means that your current
version of AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D ARX might already have more structural objects than
described in this documentation.
Most of the dialogs are self-explanatory and every modification can be checked on screen immediately.
Just try it out for yourself!
13.2. Structural Element "Handrail"
Function Call: PS_HANDRAIL

This function generates a handrail along a previously drawn 3-dimensional polyline. After calling the
function, you will be prompted to pick this polyline, and the program then constructs the handrail along this
line.
This is followed by a dialog where you can set the specifications while verifying your input directly and
immediately on screen. The spatial development of the handrail may still be modified at a later time by
changing the polyline using its grips.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Handrail, Folder DIMENSIONS:
Settings:
Connection Height: The distance between the drawn polyline and the beginning of the posts
including possible fastening plate.
Handrail Height: The distance of the upper edge of the newel posts or the center of the railing
head (if in place) measured perpendicular to the polyline.
Upper Rail Height: The center distance of the upper knee-high rail (if in place) measured
perpendicular to the polyline.
Middle Rail Height: The center distance of the middle knee-high rail (if in place) measured
Lower Rail Height: The center distance of the lower knee-high rail (if in place) measured
Hand Rail Radius: Radius of the railing head at the corners of the handrail.
If a radius is specified the corresponding shape bends are applied; otherwise a
mitered joint is cut.
Knee Rail Radius: Radius of the knee-high guardrail at the corners of the handrail.
Kick Plate Radius: Radius of the baseboard at the corners of the handrail.
Post Distance: The approximate spacing of the rail posts within the individual polyline
segments. Depending on the setting, the program uses this information to space
out the newel posts in regular intervals and rounds the value up or down as
needed.
Maximum:
Edge Offset: The spacing of the corner posts between two handrail segments starting with
the intersection of the polyline segments.
Min. Segment Length: Enter the minimum Distance for at least one Post
Min. 2 Posts Length: Enter the minimum Distance for two Posts
Start Offset: Projection of the knee-high guard rails and the railing head starting from the
middle of the first rail post towards the outside.
End Offset: Projection of the knee-high guard rails and the railing head starting from the
middle of the last rail post towards the outside.
Connect Spehere Dia. Enter the radius of thickening at the intersection points between the posts and
e.g. the knee-high guard rails.
Example of a
Thickening
Dynamic: If this field is checked, you can monitor the settings immediately on screen.
Draw Diagonal: If this field is checked, a diagonal of the actual structural element is drawn in the
different segments to support an easier selection.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Handrail, Folder PROFILE:
Settings:
Here you can select the profiles for the individual sections of the handrail. However, the corresponding
section is generated only if checked appropriately in the check box.
For example, if you would like to generate a handrail with only two knee-high guardrails, then deactivate
one of the three options for knee-high guardrails.
In the selection lists you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are available for selection.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Handrail, POSITION Tab:
Settings:
You can rotate or mirror the shapes of the different parts of the handrail around their insertion axis. This is
of great importance in combination with unsymmetrical shapes.
Select the rotation angle 0/90/180 or 270 for the corresponding part of the handrail and check the
Mirror field if the shape has to be mirrored.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Handrail, KICK PLATE Tab:
Settings:
You can add a baseboard to the handrail. The baseboard will, however, only be created, if the Baseboard
field has been checked.
0/90/180 or 270: You can rotate the baseboard around its insertion axis here by checking the
required angle.
Mirror: If this field is checked, the baseboard will be mirrored before insertion.
Other Side: If this field is checked, the baseboard will be inserted at the other side of the
railing posts.
Lateral Distance: You specify the distance of outer edge of railing post and inner edge of
baseboard. This permits you to keep some space for individual fastenings or
grouts.
Insertion Height: The distance between the drawn poly-line and the lower edge of baseboard.
Negative values will move the baseboard towards the bottom.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Handrail, Folder FASTENING:
Settings:
Here you select the fastening of the handrail posts.

If None is checked, no fastening will be provided. If Vertical is checked, the plates will be perpendicular to
the post. If Lateral is checked, plates or bent connections will be welded to the outside of the post.
Towards outside: If this field is checked, lateral connecting plates are welded to the other side of
the posts.
Plate Width: Specify the width of the connecting plates.
Plate Length: Specify the length (height) of the connecting plate.
Plate Thickness: Specify the thickness of the connecting plate.
Hole/Dm: Enter the diameter of fastening holes.
w (lateral): Enter the axis distance of fastening holes.
w (vertical): Enter the vertical distance of fastening holes if you selected lateral connecting
plates. You can thus create a plate with four holes.
If you enter the value 0, only two holes are created.
Lateral Distance: If you enter a value bigger than 0, a perpendicular connecting plate will be
inserted between plate and post. If you indicated an Inlet Radius in addition,
the additional plate will be omitted and the connection will be made as bent post
(see figure below).
Start Radius: If you enter a value bigger than 0, the connection will be made as bent post with
perpendicularly welded plate.
Dimensions at Post Connection

13.3. Structural Element "Purlin Course"
Function Call: PS_PFETTE

This function generates a purlin course within a specified plane.
For this, you select the area to be filled by clicking on the left lower and the right upper corner. The purlins
are then inserted into this area with their lower edge flush with the plane of the current user coordinate
system.
immediately on screen. The spacing of the purlin course can be changed at a later time by modifying the
(yellow) object frame using its grips. Diagonals are possible as well.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Purlin Course, Folder DIMENSIONS:
Settings:
Bottom Spacing: The distance from the centerline of the lowest purlin to the outer edge of the
selected area.
Top Spacing: The distance from the centerline of the topmost purlin to the outer edge of the
selected area.
Left Projection: Specify a purlin projection extending past the left outer edge of the selected
area. In case of a diagonal edge, this value references the centerline of the
purlin; negative values shorten the purlin towards the inside.
Right Projection: Specify a purlin projection extending past the right outer edge of the selected
area. In case of a diagonal edge, this value references the centerline of the
purlin; negative values shorten the purlin towards the inside.
Angle: The purlins are rotated around this angle value, which means they are arranged
in a diagonal fashion.
Selected Grid: The approximate spacing of the purlins within this area. The program uses this
information to space out the newel posts in regular intervals and rounds the
value up or down as needed.
The actual spacing is then depicted in the Effective Grid field.
Effective Grid: The actual distance of the purlins based on their regular spacing.
Dynamic: If this field is checked you can monitor the settings immediately on screen.
Symmetrical: If this field is checked, modifications of the structural element will be carried out
symmetrically by drawing the grips.
Draw Diagonal: If this field is checked, the area to be filled (object frame) is marked with two
additional diagonals.
Cut on Edge: If this field is checked, the purlins at the edges of the area to be filled are cut
flush. Values in the fields Left Projection and Right Projection are then not
considered.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Purlin Course, Folder PROFILE:
Settings:
Lower Edge, Upper Edge

Centrally: Here, you select at which insertion line of the shape the purlins have to be
inserted.
If the insertion line describes e.g. the upper edge of the girder, he purlins
inserted at lower edge would be situated above the girder.
13.4. Structural Element "Truss/Lattice Girders"
Function Call: PS_TRUSS

This function generates a truss girder from the bottom and lower boom as well as the diagonals and any
existing intermediate studs. Upper and lower boom can also be generated from two side-by-side profiles.
This requires that you click on the left and right outer edge of the truss girder, which then adds the truss to
the current plane of the user coordinate system.
immediately on screen. The dimensions of the binder can be changed at a later time by modifying the
(yellow) object frame using its grips.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Truss/Lattice Girders, Folder DIMENSIONS:
Settings:
Length: Entire length of the girder.
Height: Height of the girder from bottom edge of lower boom up to intersection of upper
edges of upper booms in the middle (top of roof ridge).
Roof Pitch: Roof pitch of upper boom.
Side Height: Height of the girder from bottom edge of lower boom up to upper edges
measured on the sides. This value remains constant, while the value in the
Height field can change if you adjust the pitch of the roof and vice versa.
Both Sides, Left
Side, Right Side: Here you select whether a symmetrical or a one-sided girder has to be created.
If you select Left Side or Right Side, the opposite site wont be created.
Exterior Spacing: The distance of the axis of any existing intermediary studs at the rim of the roof
truss outer edge (represented with the object frame).
Interior Spacing: The distance of the axis of any existing intermediary studs in the center of the
roof truss centerline.
Segment Spacing: The distance of the segments of the truss girder (spacing of the girder junctions
with parallel diagonals).
Number of Segments: The number of truss girder segments.
Plate Width: The spacing of the profiles if, for example, upper and lower boom are generated
from two side-by-side (U-shaped) profiles.
Structural Shape: Here you select the different variations of the framework. (Parallel or alternating
diagonal with or without intermediate studs.)
Dynamic: If this field is checked you can monitor the settings immediately on screen.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Truss/Lattice Girders, Folder PROFILE:
Settings:
Front/Rear: If these fields are checked, the selected profiles are added to the corresponding
side of the truss girder. For example, you can also generate a truss girder from
two side-by-side U-shaped profiles.
Profile Class/Size: Here you select the profile of the truss/lattice girder.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Truss/Lattice Girders, Folder DISTANCES:
Settings:
Exterior Upper Boom: The distance of the upper boom at the rim from the outer edge of the roof truss
(represented with the object frame).
Interior Upper Boom: The distance of the upper boom in the center of the roof truss centerline.
Exterior Lower Boom: The distance of the lower boom at the rim from the outer edge of the roof truss
(represented with the object frame).
Cut Edges: If this field is checked, the diagonals at upper/lower boom are
(Diagonal) cut to fit.
Top Diagonal: The distance of the diagonal from upper boom if, e.g., connective plates are to
be inserted.
Bottom Diagonal: The distance of the diagonal from lower boom if, e.g., connective plates are to
be inserted.
Cut Edges: If this field is checked, any existing intermediate stubs at upper/lower boom are
(Vertical) cut to fit.
Top Vertical: The distance of any intermediate studs from upper boom if connective plates
are to be inserted.
Bottom Vertical: The distance of any intermediate studs from lower boom if connective plates are
to be inserted.
13.5. Structural Element "Staircase"
Function Call: PS_STAIRS

This function generates a complete staircase construction with several stair heads including handrail and
corresponding working frames.
This requires that you just click the starting point and a point in the direction of the stairs (treading
direction). The number of required individual steps will be automatically calculated based on your
specifications.
immediately on screen. The dimensions of the staircase can be changed at a later time by modifying the
For a staircase with several stair heads you can add the floors one after the other in the open dialog. The
complete construction including the handrail can be saved afterwards as template. For later staircase
tower constructions, it is possible to create an assembly of standards which can be adapted to the local
conditions if need be.
Example: Staircase with

Intermediate stair head and bent
running
Dialog Window for Structural Element Staircase, Folder DIMENSIONS:
Settings:
Width: The width of the staircase across outer steel edge.
Length: Entire length of the stair construction.
Height: The height of the staircase from starting point to stair head including gridiron.
Rise: The desired rise of the staircase steps.
Number of Steps: The resulting number of steps.
Angle: The resulting gradient of the staircase.
Lower Podest: Length of the lower stair head. To create the stair head, you have to check the
input field in front of it. Otherwise, the staircase cheeks are cut at the basic
plane and the stair head is omitted.
Length of Staircase Base: Enter the Height of the

Staircasefoot
Upper Stair Head Length: Length of the upper stair head.
Gridiron Height: Height of the attached gridirons.
Side Projection: The projection of the attached gridirons beyond the outer edge of the staircase
construction. Negative values decrease the dimension of gridirons.
Real Tread: The resulting exact tread depth of the steps. This value can, however, also be
determined before and the construction will be calculated anew according to this
value.
Real Rise: The resulting exact rise of the steps. This value can, however, also be
determined before and the construction will be calculated anew according to this
value.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Staircase, Folder PLATFORMS:
Settings:
Number of Platforms: Enter the number of floors (intermediate stair heads).
Internal Distance: Enter the measure between two staircases (including cheek shapes) if the
intermediate stair heads are stair heads for change over.
Platformr No.: Select the floor you want to process.
Length, Height, etc.: Please refer to the figure below for exact meaning of the distances.
Angle Towards
Previous Platform: If you enter an angle here, you can create the bent running of the staircase or
stair heads for change over (180). Negative values create an opposite sense
of rotation.
Dimensions at the Staircase

Dialog Window for Structural Element Staircase, Folder SHAPES:
Settings:
Profile Class, Etc.: Here you select the profiles for the stair and stair header cheeks.
Drilling Stringer: If this field is checked, the stair cheeks are drilled to permit bolting the steps or
the handrail.
Bolting Stringer/
Handrail: If this field is checked, the cheeks and the handrail are bolted if a handrail
exists. Select the required bolt type in the selection list.
Bolting Stringer/
Step: If this field is checked, the steps and cheeks are bolted. Select the required bolt
type in the selection list.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Staircase, Folder TREADS:
Settings:
Shape Steps: If this field is checked, the steps are generated from shapes instead of as DIN-
steps. In the selection lists you can select the required shape as usual. All
shapes are available for selection.
Step Width: The depth of the staircase steps. The following standard dimensions are
available for selection: 240, 270 and 305 mm.
Generate Steps: If this field is checked, the stair steps are generated.
b,c,d,: Distances for the mounting holes of the staircase steps.

b is the distance of the holes from the upper edge of the steps, c is the height of
the fastening of staircase steps, d is the hole spacing of both mounting holes.
Hole DM: The hole diameter of the steps' mounting holes.
Oblong Hole Axis: The distance of the axes of the rear oblong step hole.
Recess: The offset of the staircase steps from the front edge of the staircase to the back.
Negative values move the steps to the front.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Staircase, Folder HANDRAIL:
Settings:
Generate Handrail: If this field is checked, a handrail is added to the staircase.
Start Offset: Here, you enter an offset value which moves the start of the handrail from the
front edge of the staircase to the back. Negative values move the handrail to
the front.
In case of staircases without basic stair head, you can thus move the start of the
handrail to a position where a bolt mounting is possible.
End Offset: Analogously to start offset, you enter here an offset value for the end of the
handrail.
Lateral Offset: Here, you enter an offset value which moves the handrail from the outer edge of
the staircase to the outside.
This permits you to mount the handrail outside the staircase on other shapes or
on the wall.
Height Offset: Here, you enter an offset value which moves the handrail from the upper edge
of the staircase cheek to the top. This permits you to attach a grout or an
individual fastening.
Handrail Connection: Here you specify the bolting of handrail and staircase cheek.
Automatic: The program tries to determine the most suitable fastening.
Vertical: The handrail is always bolt on the staircase cheek from above,
independently of the settings in the used handrail template.
Lateral: The handrail is always bolt laterally on the staircase cheek,
independently of the settings in the used handrail template.
Individually: The settings in the handrail template are used.
Lateral Distance: If you enter a value bigger than 0 in this input field, a vertical
connecting plate is inserted between plate and staircase cheek in case of lateral
mounting.
Handrail Template: Select the template to be used for the handrail in the selection list. This template
describes the exact structure.
The handrail templates are created by means of the structural element
Handrail and the template function. See also -> Handrail, -> Templates
function.
HANDRAIL SETTINGS: By clicking this button, you can preset the handrail structure (shapes, distances,
etc.) or edit the used handrail templates. Another dialog opens then which is
identical with the Handrail structure object. Thus you can refer to this dialog for
further information.
At staircases with handrail, this handrail will be created as structure
object of its own. This permits you to construct and modify the handrail in
detail independent of the staircase.
See also -> Handrail function.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Staircase, Working Frame
Settings:
A separate working frame can be created showing a direct overview on the staircase to allow for better
working at the staircase within the bounds of a bigger construction. By clicking the fields Front View,
Lateral View Left, Lateral View Right or Top View, you can create the corresponding working frame.
Group Name: Enter the general name of the working frame.
Edge Distance: If you enter a value here, the size of the different frames is decreased. Thus,
you can better select frames which are lying next to each other.
13.6. Structural Element "Hangar Frame"
Function Call: PS_FRAME

This function generates a hangar frame from two support members and two crossbars, which can be
connected to one another in different ways.
This requires that you click on the outer edge insertion point of the left and right vertical frame members.
immediately on screen. The dimensions of the frame can be changed at a later time by modifying the
Dialog Window for Structural Element Hangar Frame, Folder DIMENSIONS:
Settings:
Width: The width of the hangar frame across outer steel edge.
Ridge Width: Enter the roof ridge width into this field if you have selected an asymmetrical
hangar frame.
Center: Here you indicate the ridge height of the crossbars. Changing the value will
effect the pitch of the roof.
Symmetrical: If this field is checked, a symmetrical hangar frame is generated by applying the
values specified for one side to the other side.
Draw Diagonal: If this field is checked the hangar frame (object frame) is marked with two
Draw Diagonal: If this field is checked the area to be filled (object frame) is marked with two
2 Hinged Frames: If this field is checked, a frame is generated only with a crossbeam. In this case,
the specifications for the ridge height are unimportant.
Eaves Height Left: Here you indicate the left eaves height of the crossbars.
Eaves Height Right: Here you indicate the right eaves height of the crossbars.
Base Plate Upper Edge: Specify the distance of the supports from floor level (the pick points of the
supports) required to add base plates.
Left Support Projection: Here you indicate the projection of the left support upper edge beyond the
height of the eaves.
Right Support Projection: Here you indicate the projection of the right support upper edge beyond the
height of the eaves.
Left Roof Pitch: Here you indicate the roof pitch of the left crossbar. Changing the value will
effect the ridge height of the roof.
Right Roof Pitch: Here you indicate the roof pitch of the right crossbar. Changing the value will
effect the ridge height of the roof.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Hangar Frame, Folder SHAPES:
Settings:
This dialog window is used to select the corresponding profiles for the left and right vertical frame
members as well as the crossbars.
If you have selected a symmetrical hangar frame, the values specified for the left side are applied to the
right side.
Inner Edge: If this field is checked, the shapes are inserted at the inner edge and show to
the outside (frame width is inner edge steel).
Centrally: If this field is checked, the shapes are inserted on the axis.
Outer Edge: If this field is checked, the shapes are inserted at the outer edge and show to
the inside (frame width is outer edge steel).
Dialog Window for Structural Element Hangar Frame, Folder LEFT KNEE:
(Right joint is analog)
Settings:
This dialog window is used to select the connection type for joining the left crossbar with the left vertical
frame member.
Adjust to Fit: If this field is checked, the crossbar is cut to the support. You can specify a
distance in the opposite input field.
Mitered: If this field is checked, the crossbar and the support are cut to have a mitered
joint. You can specify a gap in the opposite input field.
Haunch: If this field is checked, the connection is designed as a frame haunch. You can
select a haunch template in the opposite input field (see function 'Haunch
Joint').
Free Plate: If this field is checked, the connection is designed as a plate connection. You
can select a plate template in the opposite input field (see function 'Plate
Connection').
Leave As Is: If this field is checked, no connections are implemented.
Rotate: If this field is checked, you can rotate an unsymmetrical plate provided you have
selected Free Plate as connection.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Hangar Frame, Folder APEX:
Settings:
This dialog window is used to select the connection type for joining crossbars at the ridge point.
Mitered: If this field is checked, the crossbar and the support are cut to have a mitered
joint. You can specify a gap in the opposite input field.
Free Plate: If this field is checked, the connection is designed as a plate connection. You
can select a plate template in the opposite input field (see function 'Plate
Connection').
Leave As Is: If this field is checked, no connections are implemented.
Rotate: If this field is checked, you can rotate an unsymmetrical plate provided you have
selected Free Plate as connection.
13.7. Structural Element "Bracing"
Function Call: PS_BRACING

This function generates a wall bond or bracing. You can select between a variety of different design
variations.
Available are profile bracings, tension bar bracings, as well as pressure pipes. The entire bracing including
gusset plate is generated.
To generate a bracing first place your user coordinate system over the bracing plane and then call the
function. You are now prompted to click on a system line of the bracing. Finally, click on both profiles to
which the bracing is to be joined.
The following dialog box appears. The first folder is the parent folder for all others; the tree other folders
can be selected according to the desired type of bracing.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Bracing, Folder GENERAL:

Settings:
Profile Selection: Here you indicate the utilized profile for the bracing bars. Enter the Profile
Catalog into the first selection box, the Profile Type into the second, and the
Profile Size into the third.
Bolts: Specify the bolt type.
DM: Specify the hole diameter.
Clearance: Specify the hole clearance.
Gusset Plate: These input fields are used to describe the applied gusset plates.
Gusset Plate Thickness indicates the thickness of the gusset plate.
In the input field Distance from Edge-Boundary Edge you can specify the
distance from the outermost edge of the bracing bar to the boundary edge of
the bracing (this is most often a profile edge).
Indicate a grid value in the Shorten Profiles input field. This value is used to
round off the length of the profile.
Indicate the minimum gusset plate width at the profile in the Min. Plate Width
input field.
The position of the gusset plate in reference to the bracing plane can be
specified with the fields Gusset Plate Position Front Edge, Center, and Rear
Edge.
The shape of the gusset plate can be specified with the fields Gusset Plate
Shape.
Hole Spacing: Here you enter the number of borings and the spacing of the drilled holes to be
observed. You can either specify absolute values or many times the amount of
the hole diameter. If the entries have to be a multiple of the hole diameter, put
an asterisk (*) in front of the multiplier.
Number Profile Direction specifies the number of drilled holes in the direction of
the bracing bar (on both ends).
Edge 1. Hole indicates the distance from the end of the bracing bar to the first
hole center in the direction of the bar.
Hole-Hole indicates the space between the drilled holes in the direction of the
bar.
N. Hole Edge indicates the distance from the last hole to the outer edge of the gusset plate in
the direction of the bar.
Number Crosswise specifies the number of drilled holes crosswise to the
bracing bar.
Distance Cross indicates the distance between the drilled holes crosswise to the
bar direction.
Cross Stay: If this switch is checked, the bracing is designed in the form of a cross stay.
Otherwise, only one bracing bar is added to the clicked on system line.
Welded Brace: If this switch is checked, the bracing is welded in its entirety. No borings are
added in that case.
Grouping: If this switch is checked, the individual bracing elements are formed into groups.
Symmetrical: If this switch is checked, the bracing is designed in the form of a cross stay and
remains symmetrical if modified with its grips. Otherwise, every bar can be
changed individually.
Dynamic: If this switch is checked, the bracing immediately depicts the modifications
made in the dialog. If you would like to modify many values, you can deactivate
this option for the time being.
ADD By clicking on this button, you can add

BOUNDARY EDGE additional boundary edges (lines) for
the gusset plate calculation. This method
enables you to lengthen a gusset plate up
to the base plate, for example. If the
vertical of a gusset plate end point cuts this
boundary line, the gusset plate is extended
up to this point. Otherwise, the nearest
end point of the line will be accepted.
To add a boundary edge just click on a line
or specify a line by indicating two points.
DELETE To delete an additional boundary edge just clicking on this button.

BOUNDARY EDGE
Profile Bracing
If you would like to create a bracing from profiles and gusset plates select the folder PROFILE BRACING.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Bracing, Folder PROFILE BRACING:
Settings:
Profile Position: Here you select the position of the profiles in relation to the gusset plates.
If you have checked the field Front, the profiles are located in front of the gusset
plate.
If you have checked the field Rear, the profiles are located behind the gusset
plate.
If you have checked the field Crossed, one profile is located in front of the
gusset plate and one behind.
If you have checked the field Centered, the profiles are located in the bracing
plane.
If you have checked the field Double, one profile each is located in front of and
behind the gusset plate (total of 4 profiles).
If you have checked the field Offset, one profile each is located in front of and
behind the gusset plate with one being offset to the left and one to the right
(total of 4 profiles for cross stay).

If you have selected 4 Fold, one profile is located on each side (front, rear, left,
right), which makes a total of 8 profiles for cross stay.
Profile Position: Indicate the distance of the profiles for offset or 4-fold bracings in the field
Profile Distance.
The Profile Rotational Angle field is used to specify a rotation of the profiles.
Profile Insertion Position: If the field Center is checked, the profiles are inserted along the profile axis.
If the field Center of Gravity is checked, the profiles are inserted along the pitch
line.
If the field Hole Shift is checked, the profiles are inserted along the line
measuring the distance from the outside of the angle to the rivet center.
Projection: Specify a projection of the central gusset plate extending past the shape edges
of the bracing bars. Positive values increase the size of the plate whereas
negative values decrease it.
Mirror Profiles: If this field is checked, the profiles are mirrored and then inserted.
Separate All: If this field is checked, all profiles of a cross stay are separated at the center
gusset plate.
Batten Plates: If this field is checked, opposing profiles have batten plates as stiffeners. The
input fields located next to the batten plate field can be used for a further
description of the batten plates.
Number: The number of bolts which are used to connect each batten plate with
the shapes.
Distance: The distance of the batten plates; the program divides the distances
regularly according to this specification and the values are rounded up or down
correspondingly.
Recess: In this input field, you specify the distance of batten plates from the
shape edges. Positive values decrease the size of the plate whereas negative
values increase it, i.e. the plate has a projection.
.
Shortening: Here you can specify a value to be used to shorten the profiles after the bracing
has been generated.
Hole Position: If the field Center is checked, the drill holes are drilled on the profile axis.
If the field Pitch Line is checked, the drill holes are drilled on the profile pitch
line.
If the field Hole Line is checked, the profiles are drilled along the line measuring
the distance from the outside of the angle to the rivet center.
Center Hole: At a cross stay and selected shape position Crossed, a common hole is drilled
into the shapes which are crossing each other.
Tension Rod Bracing

If you would like to create a bracing from tension rods select the folder TENSION RODS. You can select a
variety of different variations.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Bracing, Folder TENSION RODS:
Settings:
Continued: If this field is checked, a bracing with a traversing tension rod is generated. The
profiles connected with the bracing are penetrated and fastened in the back with
a tension element.
The Projection field is used to specify the projection of the tension rod beyond
the profile.
The HoleDM field is used to specify the diameter of the oblong hole to be drilled.
The Hole Length field is used to specify the length of the oblong hole to be
drilled.
The Tension Element Description field is used to specify a term for the tension
element to be used with the parts list.
If the field Generate Element is checked, the tension element is generated and
displayed.
Turnbuckle: If this field is checked, a bracing with two tension rods joined by a tension
element is generated. A butt strap is welded to the end of the tension rod, which
is used to connect to the profiles via a gusset plate.
The Butt Strap Length field is used to specify the length of the strap.
The Butt Strap Width field is used to specify the width of the strap.
The Butt Strap Thickness field is used to specify the thickness of the strap.
If the field Slotted is checked, the strap receives a slit and the tension rod is
welded to the center.
If the field Welded is checked, the tension rod is welded to the strap.
The Overlap field is used to specify by how much the tension rod and the butt
trap are overlapping.
The Gap field is used to specify a gap between the cut out butt strap and the
tension rod for production tolerances, if the Slotted option has been selected.
The Tension Length field is used to specify the length of the tension element.
Draw Bar: If this field is checked, a bracing with a tension rod is generated, which has a
welded on connection element.
The Butt Strap Length field is used to specify the length of the connection
element.
The Butt Strap Width field is used to specify the width of the connection
element.
The Butt Strap Thickness field is used to specify the thickness of the connection
element.
The BoltHoleDM field is used to specify the bolt hole diameter in the connection
element.
The Outer Radius field is used to specify the outer radius of the connection
element.
DYNBRACINGRODEXAMPLE1
Different Tension Rod Types:
Pressure Pipes
If you would like to create a bracing from pressure pipes and butt straps select the folder PRESSURE
PIPES. You can select a variety of different variations.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Bracing, Folder PRESSURE PIPES:

Settings:
Butt Strap Shape: Here you indicate the dimensions of the connecting butt strap.
The Butt Strap Length field is used to specify the length of the strap.
The Butt Strap Width field is used to specify the width of the strap.
The Butt Strap Thickness field is used to specify the thickness of the strap.
The Overlap field is used to specify the overlap length of the pressure pipe and
the strap.
Butt Strap Type: If the field Inserted is checked, the butt strap is welded into the pipe.
If the field Pipe Slotted is checked, the pipe is slit and the strap is welded at that
point.
If the field Strap Slotted is checked, the strap is slit and the pipe is welded at
that point.
If the field T Profile is checked, a T profile section is welded onto the pipe. You
can select a profile in the Selection Lists depicted opposite.
If the field Head Plate is checked, a head plate is welded onto the pipe and a
butt strap is welded onto this head plate.
Profiles: You can select the profile in the selection lists, if you have selected T-profile as
butt strap type.
Head Plate: You can indicate further specifications for the head plate, if you have selected
Head Plate as butt strap type.
Width: Enter the width or the diameter of the head plate.
Thickness: Enter the plate thickness of the head plate.
Square: A square head plate is created with the same width as specified under
Width.
Round: A round head plate is created with the same diameter as specified
under Width.
13.8. Structural Element "Ladder"
Function Call: PS_LADDER

This function is used to create a ladder including its fastening at the wall. In addition, you can add a safety
cage to the ladder.
To do this, just click the left and right insertion point of the ladder and then the height point (to determine
the length) or any other point you like, if the length has to be determined later.
Then a dialog opens where you can set the specifications by direct monitor control. The ladder dimensions
can be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Ladder, Folder DIMENSIONS:
Settings:
Width: The width of the ladder as clear dimension between the uprights.
Height: The height of the ladder without possible projection as help for climbing out.
Riser: The desired distance between the rungs. The program divides the distances
between first and last rung regularly according to this specification and the value
is rounded up or down correspondingly.
Actual Riser.: The actual resulting distance

between the rungs is
displayed.
Ground Distance: The distance between the

upper edge of the first rung
and the ground area of the
ladder.
Top Distance: The distance between the

upper edge of the last rung
and the climbing out area of
the ladder.
Projection: The height of the help for

climbing out related to the
climbing out surface of the
ladder (axis measure).
Recess: The depth of the help for

climbing out (axis measure).
Sharp Bend: The front jump-in of the help

for climbing out (axis
measure), if it has to be
created with a bend.
Draw Diagonal: If this field is checked, a diagonal of the actual structural element is drawn in the
ladder to support an easier selection.
Draw Rungs: If this field is checked, the Rungs are displayed even if there is no Shape given.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Ladder, Folder SHAPES:
Settings:
Selection Lists: Select the profiles of the ladder uprights and rungs as usual. All shapes are
available for selection.
0/90/180 or 270: You can rotate the profiles around their insertion axis here by checking the
required angle.
Mirror: If this field is checked, the profile will be mirrored before insertion.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Ladder, Folder WALL MOUNTING:
Settings:
You can add a wall fastening to the ladder here. The wall shape is, however, only created if the Wall
Shape field has been checked before.
In the Selection Lists, you can select the required profile as usual. All shapes are available for selection.
0/90/180 or 270: You can rotate the wall profile around its insertion axis here by checking the
required angle.
Mirror: If this field is checked, the wall profile will be mirrored before insertion.
Position: Select the insertion position of the wall profile.

Inner Edge: If this field is checked, the wall shape is inserted at the inner edge
of the upright and shows to the inside.
Centrally: If this field is checked, the wall shape is inserted in axis position on the height
of upright axis.
Outer Edge: If this field is checked, the wall shape is inserted at the outer edge of the
upright and shows to the outside.
Wall Distance: The distance between upright axes and wall surface where the ladder has to be
mounted.
Ground Distance: The distance between the axis of the first wall profile and the ground area of the
ladder.
Intermediate Distance: The desired distance of the wall profiles. The program divides the distances
between the first and last wall profile regularly according to this specification
and the values are rounded up or down correspondingly.
Top Distance: The distance between the axis of the last wall profile and the climbing out area
of the ladder.
Dialog Window for Structural Element Ladder, Folder SAFETY CAGE:
Settings:
You can add a safety cage to the ladder here. The safety cage is, however, only created if the Safety cage
field has been checked before.
In the Selection Lists, you can select the required profile as usual. All shapes are available for selection.
0/90/180 or 270: You can rotate the profile around its insertion axis here by checking the required
angle.
Mirror: If this field is checked, the profile will be mirrored before insertion.
Position: Select the insertion position how the stiffening ring is connected with the upright.
Inner Edge: If this field is checked, the connection between stiffening ring and
upright is inserted at the inner edge of the upright and shows to the inside.
Centrally: If this field is checked, the connection between stiffening ring and
upright is inserted in axis position on the height of upright axis.
Outer Edge: If this field is checked, the connection between stiffening ring and
upright is inserted at the outer edge of the upright and shows to the outside.
Radius: Specify the radius of cage stiffeners.
Number of Bars: Specify how many longitudinal bars the cage has to consist of. The bars will be
divided regularly on the resulting semicircle.
Intermediate Distance: The desired distance of the stiffeners (rings) of the safety cage. The program
divides the distances between the first and last ring regularly according to this
specification and the values are rounded up or down correspondingly.
Depth, etc.: Please refer to the below figure for the meaning of the other distances.
Dimension at the
Cage
(5 Bars)
Index
Combo Profiles ..............................................372
COMPARE PARTS........................................211
2 Connection155, 168, 172, 175, 187, 189, 191,
193
2D Details, Intelligent Details ..................... 238 Connection Database, Other Connection Types
2D Details, Pick Helpers ............................... 239 ...................................................................415
2D Details, Profile Shortening.................... 238 CONNECTION PLATE DATABASE ..............414
2D-Details, Die Pickhelfer ............................. 239 Construction Component Overview, Additional
2D-SCHNITT ANBRINGEN........................... 322 Control Switches........................................279
Construction Component Overview, Assigning
Detail Styles...............................................281
A Construction Component Overview,
Associate a Style .....................................281
Active and Passive Links ................................ 20 Construction Component Overview,
ADD PROFILE SECTION ............................. 380 Construction Component Parts List ...........279
ADDITIONAL HAUNCHES............................ 159 Construction Component Overview, Copy
ALIGN ............................................................. 44 Detail Styles .............................................278
APOINT 0,0,1.................................................. 79 Construction Component Overview, Delete
AREA CLASSES............................................. 30 Detail Styles .............................................278
Automatic Dimensioning ............................... 330 Construction Component Overview, Function
Automatic Sorting ....................................... 282 Bar.............................................................276
AXES NAMES................................................. 68 Construction Component Overview,
Generate Views........................................282
Construction Component Overview, Import for

Detailing.....................................................282
Construction Component Overview, Multiple
NDERUNGSVERWALTUNG ...................... 305
Selection and Drag&Drop .......................280
Construction Component Overview, Separate
B Detail Styles...............................................282
Construction Component Overview, Set and
BASE PLATE ................................................ 161 Remove Default Detail Styles .................278
Base Plates, Tolerances ............................. 164 Construction Component Overview, Status
Basic 3D Shapes............................................. 15 Indicator ...................................................279
BENT PROFILES .......................................... 104 Construction Component Overview, View
Bolting together ............................................. 144 and Modify Detail Styles .........................278
BOLTS .......................................................... 144 Construction Component Overview, Work
BOOLEAN OPERATIONS ............................ 379 Tools .........................................................283
BRACING.............................................. 181, 444 Construction Component Overview, Write-
Bracing, Generating a Bracing................... 185 Protection.................................................282
Context Menus ................................................11
Contour Incisions...........................................129
C Controlling Links ..............................................20
COORDINATE SYSTEMS...............................12
chamfer ................................................. 134, 378 COPY ..............................................................36
CLONE............................................................ 46 COPY/MOVE ...................................................35
COLLISION CHECK...................................... 382 Countersinking...............................................131
Collision Check, Remove Coloring.............. 382 Create Profiles .............................................375
COMBINE ..................................................... 124 Create Special Profiles ..................................374
CUT............................................................... 121 Detailing Style, Special Settings for Individual

Cut out .......................................................... 128 Parts and Construction Groups .................248
CUT OUT 2D................................................. 338 Detailing, Basic Detailing Principle............232
Cut Plane ........................................................ 84 Detailing, Detailing 3D Models ...................232
Cut Profiles.................................................... 121 Detailing, Intervention Options ..................232
CYLINDRICAL WORK FRAME....................... 62 DETAILLIERUNG ..........................................232
DETAILLIERUNG 2000 .................................230
DETAILSTIL ..................................................240
D Direct Call of the Copy Functions ....................38
Direct Call of the Mirror Functions ...................43
DAS DETAILCENTER................................... 233 Direct Call of the Move Functions....................39
Define Classes or Change Name.................... 29 DIRECTIONAL VECTORS ..............................48
Description of Drill Hole Fields ...................... 138 DIREKTE AUSARBEITUNG..........................304
DESIGN TOOLS ............................................. 49 DISPATCH ....................................................383
Detail Block Overview, Add Detail Library 292 Dispatch Block, Table Definition Block ..........386
Detail Block Overview, Delete Detail Library DISPLAY CLASSES ........................................28
.................................................................. 292 DIVIDE...........................................................124
Detail Block Overview, Directory List ............ 292 Divide Profiles................................................124
Detail Block Overview, Function Bar ............. 292 Divide Roof-Wall Surface...............................389
Detail Block Overview, Insert Detail Blocks... 293 DIVIDE SURFACE.........................................389
Detail Block Overview, Preview ................. 292 DRAWING BORDER .....................................323
Detail Block Overview, Revisions.............. 293 Drawing Borders, Assign Drawing Borders 324
Detail Block Overview, Target Drawing..... 293 Drill Hole Fields .............................................137
Detail Center, Context Menu ...................... 236 DRILLING ......................................................137
Detail Center, Detail Center Interface ........ 234
Detail Center, Detail Styles......................... 236
Detail Center, Dimensioning Styles ........... 237 E
Detail Center, General Dialog Info ............. 233
Detail Center, General Information Scale ELEVATION ..................................................325
and Dimension Styles ............................. 237 Extending Profiles .......................................120
Detail Center, Information Window............ 236
Detail Center, Level 1:Construction
Component .............................................. 235 F
Detail Center, Level 2:Display Views
Overview .................................................. 235 Family Classes ................................................32
Detail Center, Level 3:Detail Block Overview Fasten Base Plate........................................164
(or Import) ................................................ 235 Find Groups .................................................198
Detail Center, Preview ................................ 236 Find Parts, Define Search Condition .............214
Detail Center, Scales................................... 237 Find Positions..............................................203
Detail Center, What is the Detail Center (1) FREE PLATES ..............................................147
.................................................................. 231 Free Plates, Connection Types ..................151
Detail Center, What is the Detail Center (2) Free Plates, Direct Call of Plate Functions ....153
.................................................................. 233 Free Plates, Drill Hole Diagram Descriptions.152
Detail Center, Work Tools........................... 235 FREE VIEW .....................................................80
Detailing Style, Dimensioning Settings.......... 253 Frequent Errors ...............................................10
Detailing Style, FLAGS Tab ........................ 270
Detailing Style, GLOBAL SETTINGS Tab .. 242
Detailing Style, Position Flag and Weld Symbol G
Settings ..................................................... 270
GENERAL INFO ................................................4
GENERATE PARTS LIST .............................215
Generation of Groups ................................. 195 Menu Option OUTPUT ..................................225

GLOBAL SETTINGS ..................................... 393 Menu Option SETTINGS ...............................223
Global Settings, Defaults, GRIPS Tab ......... 394 MIRROR ..........................................................42
Global Settings, Defaults, LOGLINKS Tab 400 MITERED CUT ..............................................123
Global Settings, Defaults, OPTIONS Tab .... 401 MODIFY.........................................................118
Global Settings, Defaults, PLATES Tab ...... 397 MODIFY LENGTH .........................................119
Global Settings, Defaults, PROFILES Tab... 395 MOVE ..............................................................39
Global Settings, Defaults, VALUES Tab .... 399
Global Settings, Dialog Tabs...................... 393
Global View ..................................................... 78 N
Grips ............................................................... 15
Group Data.................................................... 197 NEW FEATURES ............................................11
Groups .......................................................... 194 NOTCH..........................................................126
H O
HANDRAIL .................................................... 418 OBJECT SNAP................................................22

HANGAR FRAME ......................................... 439 OBJECT UCS ..................................................76
HAUNCH....................................................... 178 OBJECT VIEW ................................................74
Haunch, Generating Haunch Connections .... 180 Object-Oriented .................................................9
Haunch, Unrestricted Haunch Positioning..... 180 Only with Hands-on Experience ........................4
HIDE................................................................ 26 OUTLET ........................................................131
Hide Parts ................................................. 26, 28 Outlets ...........................................................131
I P
Insert Bent Plates.......................................... 113 Parts List Processing Main Window ..........221
INSERT PROFILES ........................................ 87 Parts list, importing parts ...........................217
INSTALLATION................................................. 5 Parts list, output.............................................219
INTELLIGENTE 2D-DETAILS ....................... 238 Parts lists file .................................................215
Penetrations ..................................................129
PERSPECTIVE................................................81
L PICK PROFILE..............................................107
PLATE CONNECTION ..................................146
LATERAL FORCE PLATES .......................... 157 Plate Connection, Generating Plate
LAYER ............................................................ 24 Connection...............................................146
Links................................................................ 19 PLATE PROCESSING ..................................133
Links, active .................................................... 20 PLATES.........................................................108
Links, passive.................................................. 20 POLYCUTS ...................................................128
Logic Links .................................................... 19 Position Flags ..............................................204
LOGIC LINKS.................................................. 19 Position Flags, Direct Call of the Functions ...210
POSITIONING ...............................................199
Possible Connections ....................................173
M PPS Data, Designator Reference................364
PPS Data, Transfer to Knieriem Hints ...........364
Manual Contents ............................................... 4 Practical Link Applications ...............................21
MDI (Multi Document Interface) ...................... 11 Pressure Pipes ..............................................451
Menu Option DATA RECORDS .................... 222 PRO STEEL 3D .................................................6
Menu Option FILE ....................................... 222 PROCESS PARTS LIST................................218
Profile Bracing............................................... 447 PS_FRAME ...................................................439

Profile Database, Basic Profiles ................ 405 PS_FREEVIEW ...............................................80
Profile Properties Dialog Box....................... 20 PS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS.............................393
Profile Sections, Adding Sections ................. 381 PS_GLOBAL_VIEW........................................78
Profiles .......................................................... 124 PS_GROUNDPL ...........................................161
PS_ADD........................................................ 379 PS_GROUP...................................................194
PS_ADD_SECTION...................................... 380 PS_HANDRAIL .............................................418
PS_AREA_CLASS ......................................... 30 PS_HAUNCH ................................................178
PS_BOLT...................................................... 144 PS_HIDE .........................................................26
PS_BRACING....................................... 181, 444 PS_HIDE_CLASS ...........................................28
PS_COLLISION............................................ 382 PS_INS_PPROF ...........................................107
PS_COMMON............................................... 379 PS_INS_PROF................................................87
PS_COMMON_SUB ..................................... 379 PS_INS_RPROF ...........................................104
PS_CONST..................................................... 49 PS_KOTE......................................................325
PS_COPY ....................................................... 35 PS_LASCHE .................................................174
PS_COPY_FREE............................................ 38 PS_LAYER......................................................24
PS_COPY_MIRROR....................................... 43 PS_MAN_CUT ..............................................322
PS_COPY_X................................................... 38 PS_MK_OBJ.................................................372
PS_COPY_XY ................................................ 38 PS_MODIFY..................................................118
PS_COPY_XYZ .............................................. 38 PS_MODIFY_CTA.........................................123
PS_COPY_Y................................................... 38 PS_MODIFY_CTP.........................................128
PS_COPY_Z ................................................... 38 PS_MODIFY_PAE.........................................133
PS_CREATE_PARTLIST ............................. 218 PS_MODIFY_PCH ........................................134
PS_CUT_OUT .............................................. 338 PS_MODIFY_SHE ........................................119
PS_CUTPLANE .............................................. 84 PS_MODIFY_SHP ........................................119
PS_DETCENTER ......................................... 233 PS_MOVE_FREE............................................39
PS_DIM......................................................... 330 PS_MOVE_MIRROR.......................................43
PS_DIM_ANG............................................... 337 PS_MOVE_X...................................................39
PS_DIM_MFR ............................................... 336 PS_MOVE_XY ................................................39
PS_DIM_MHO .............................................. 336 PS_MOVE_XYZ ..............................................39
PS_DIM_MLN ............................................... 336 PS_MOVE_Y...................................................39
PS_DIM_MVE ............................................... 336 PS_MOVE_Z ...................................................39
PS_DIM_PDF................................................ 337 PS_NOTCH ...................................................126
PS_DIM_PPK ............................................... 337 PS_OBJ_UCS.................................................76
PS_DIM_RAD ............................................... 337 PS_OBJ_UCS_CEN .......................................76
PS_DIM_SDF................................................ 337 PS_OBJ_VIEW ...............................................74
PS_DIM_SFR................................................ 336 PS_OBJ_VIEW_CEN......................................74
PS_DIM_SHO ............................................... 336 PS_OUTLET .................................................131
PS_DIM_SLN................................................ 336 PS_PARTLIST ..............................................215
PS_DIM_SPK ............................................... 337 PS_PERSP......................................................81
PS_DIM_SVE................................................ 336 PS_PFETTE ..................................................425
PS_DISPATCH ............................................. 383 PS_PICKHELPER.........................................239
PS_DRILL............................................. 135, 137 PS_PLATE ....................................................108
PS_DWG_INFO ............................................ 227 PS_POS ........................................................199
PS_ENDPLATE ............................................ 146 PS_POS_DIFF ..............................................211
PS_ENDPLATE_FLANGE ........................... 153 PS_PPS.........................................................361
PS_ENDPLATE_NORM ............................... 153 PS_REGEN .....................................................27
PS_ENDPLATE_SPLICE ............................. 153 PS_RIP..........................................................114
PS_FAMILY CLASS ....................................... 32 PS_RIP_ANGLE ...........................................114
PS_FORMAT ................................................ 323 PS_SCALE....................................................229
PS_SCHEARPLATE..................................... 170 SHAPECLASS_FLACH ................................410

PS_SEARCH ................................................ 212 SHAPECLASS_HE .......................................405
PS_SETUCS................................................... 70 SHAPECLASS_I ...........................................405
PS_SHORT2D .............................................. 339 SHAPECLASS_RUNDROHR .......................410
PS_SOLID_BOX........................................... 377 SHAPECLASS_RUNDSTAHL ......................411
PS_SOLID_CONICPIPE............................... 378 SHAPECLASS_T ..........................................409
PS_SOLID_CYLINDER ................................ 377 SHAPECLASS_TB .......................................409
PS_SOLID_EXTRUDE ................................. 378 SHAPECLASS_U..........................................406
PS_SOLID_RECT2CIRCLE ......................... 378 SHAPECLASS_Z ..........................................407
PS_SOLID_ROTATE.................................... 378 SHEAR PLATES............................................170
PS_SOLID_SPHERE.................................... 377 Shear Plates, Generating the Strap Connection
PS_SOLID_TORUS ...................................... 378 ...................................................................173
PS_STAIRS .......................................... 431, 453 Shortening 2D Shapes ..................................339
PS_STATIK .................................................. 366 Shortening Profiles .....................................119
PS_SUB........................................................ 379 Show Parts ................................................27, 28
PS_TRUSS ................................................... 428 SPECIAL PROFILES.....................................372
PS_UNWIND................................................. 387 Special Profiles, Display Variation .................373
PS_VERT_DAWA......................................... 389 SSOPA ..........................................................376
PS_VMID ........................................................ 22 SSOPRO .......................................................375
PS_VSCH ....................................................... 22 STAIRCASE ..................................................431
PS_WEB_ANGLE......................................... 166 STANDARD FUNCTIONS ...............................14
PS_WEIGHTCENTER .................................... 54 Start Menu .........................................................5
PS_WELD..................................................... 327 STATICS INTERFACE ..................................366
PS_WORKFRAME ......................................... 55 STIFF PLATES ..............................................154
PS_ZSCH........................................................ 22 Stiff Plates, No Connection Possible .........156
PSPPT ............................................................ 22 Stiff Plates, Possible Connections.............156
PURLIN COURSE......................................... 425 Strap, Generating the Strap Connection........177
PYRAMIDAL WORK FRAME.......................... 66 Strap, Possible Connections..........................177
STRAPPED JOINTS......................................174
R
T
RECTANGULAR WORK FRAME ................... 56
REGENERATING............................................ 27 Template Management Dialog ......................17
RIBS.............................................................. 114 TEMPLATES ...................................................17
Ribs, Slanted................................................. 117 Tension Rod Bracing .....................................449
Roof-Wall Profiles ......................................... 372 TOP VIEW .......................................................79
ROTATE.......................................................... 40 TREPPE ........................................................453
TUBE UNWIND .............................................387
Tube Unwinding, Generating
S Development/Unwinding............................388
SCOMBI........................................................ 375
SDAWA......................................................... 375 U
SEARCH ....................................................... 212
SELECT LINES............................................... 16 User EEDs.....................................................416
SELECT VIEW ................................................ 70 USER EEDs ..................................................416
SHAPECLASS_ RECHTROHR .................... 406 USER-DEFINED PLATES .............................158
SHAPECLASS_4KT ..................................... 410
SHAPECLASS_COLDU ............................... 408
V W
View Overview, Add Standard or Free View WEB ANGLE .................................................166
.................................................................. 289 Web Plate, Generate Web Plate Connection
View, Generate User-Defined ......................... 72 ...................................................................169
VIEWS OVERVIEW ...................................... 285 Web Plate, Possible Connections ..............169
Views Overview, Add and Remove New WEIGHT CENTER...........................................54
Views ........................................................ 287 Weld Seams ..................................................327
Views Overview, Detailing............................. 287 WELD SYMBOLS ..........................................327
Views Overview, Function Bar ...................... 286 Work Areas, several ........................................59
Views Overview, Manual and Other Views.... 289 WORK FRAME ................................................55
Views Overview, Manual Detail from Work Frames Are Objects ...............................60
Construction Components ..................... 290 Work Session ....................................................7
Views Overview, Manual Detail from the
Model........................................................ 290
Views Overview, Preview ........................... 286 Z
Views Overview, Status .............................. 286
Zeichnungsinformationen ......................227, 340

At Struct Ref

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

At Struct Ref

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Page 1

1.1. Table of Contents

4.9. Cut Plane Command 84

9.3.5. Component Overview 275

13.7. Structural Element "Bracing" 443

1.2. General Information

Contents of this Manual

Not Provided in this Manual

Only with Hands-on Experience ...

3D Display of a Steel Construction

2. General Info, Templates, Coordinates

2.1. AutoPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Construction

Conventional Construction with 2D CAD 3D Construction with AutoPLANT

Display of shapes and connections in several views

Positioning of the individual components and parts

Manual or system-supported generation of bill of

Automatic mapping/detailing of the finished

A Work Session with the Program

Shop drawings have not been required up to this point.

Verifying the structure using collision checking.

Automatic generation of 2D details.

Creation of manual 2D details and construction global views.

Creating shop drawings.

Object-Oriented What Does that Mean?

Example for a 3D Problem:

The 3D view is on the left, the front

2.2. New AutoCAD 2000 Features

MDI (Multi-Document Interface)

Context Menu Shape Selection:

In addition to standard commands, this context menu also offers special

2.3. Coordinate Systems

World Coordinate User Coordinate

2.4. AutoCAD Standard Commands

After stretching it, you will see

2.5. Select Lines

Pick the desired (point) <line>

2.6. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Dialog Templates

Dialog Box: Template Management

Previous Template Files and Version Control

DELETE The selected entry is deleted.

2.7. Logical Links

What Are Logical Links ?

In this example, using the command Stiffener , two stiffener

Active and Passive Links

Dialog Box: Changing (Shape) Properties

DELETE This button is used to delete the selected link.

<< / >> This button is used to select the desired link.

Notes about working with Links

3. Auxiliary Commands, Display, Copy

3.1. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Object Snap

Shape End Point: (PSPPT)

Virtual Intersection (PS_VSCH)

Virtual Intersection (PS_ZSCH)

Perpendicular to Plane: (PS_LOTPL)

Relative Point: (PS_VREL)

This function locates a point relative to a 3D reference point.

Relative Line Point: (PS_VREL)

3.2. AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL 3D Layer Commands

Command name: PS_LAYER

Work Frame On: LFRAMEON

Work Frame Off: LFRAMEOFF

Element Layer On: LELEMON

The layers for the main elements are activated.

Element Layer Off: LELEMOFF